?K4feO| .D5^ Division Section Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2016 https://archive.org/details/dipavamsaancientOOdipa 1 THE DI PAY A MSA. D I PAYA MSA AN ANCIENT BUDDHIST HISTORICAL RECORD. EDITED AND TRANSLATED BY HERMANN OLDENBERG. WILLIAMS AND NORGATE. 14, HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON; and 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH. 1879. • • INTRODUCTION. The DlPAVAMSA, an edition of which I here lay before the public, is a historical work composed in Cey- lon by an unknown author. George Tumour, who first drew the attention of European scholars to the Dipa- vamsa 1 ), declared it to be identical with a version of the Mahavamsa to which the Mahavamsa Tika occasionally alludes, the version preserved in the Uttaravihara mo- nastery. This is certainly wrong 2 ). We must undertake, therefore, a research of our own as to the origin of the Dipavamsa and its position in the ancient literature of the Ceylonese. The Mahavamsa Tika, when commenting on the title I 1) See the Journal As. Soc. Bengal, vol. Vr, p. 790, 1054; VII, p. 919 et seq. 2) The arguments by which Tumour supports his theory are entirety founded on errors and inaccuracies. Tumour says, for instance, that the opening lines of the Dipavamsa are quoted in that Tika as contained in the Uttaravihara -Mahavamsa. The Tika quotes those lines indeed (India Office MS. of the Mahav. Tika fol. ko'), but without the slightest reference to the Utt.-Mahavamsa. The onty passage referring to the Mahavamsa of the Uttaravihara which I know, is quite sufficient to show that this work was ditferent from the Dipavamsa. In the Mahavamsa Tika (India Off. MS. fol. gha') we are told, that the Uttaravihara -Mahavamsa contained a state- ment somewhat different from the usual one, with regard to the d&.scen- I dants of king Sihassara : „ Uttaraviharavasinam pana Mahavamse Sihassarassa ! ranno puttapaputtaka caturasitisahassani rajano ahesum, tesam kanitthako Bkaggusakko (corrected to Bhagusakko) nama raja, tassa puttapaputtaka dvavisatisahassani rajano ahesum, tesam kanitthako Jayaseno ’ti vuttain. “ The Dipavamsa (3, 43. 44) in the contrary agrees with the statements of our Mahavamsa (p. 9) which are in contradiction to the Mahavamsa of the Uttaravihara. h 1 2 Introduction. of the Mahavamsa, contains the following important re- marks x ) : „Mahavamsam pavakkhamiti mahautanam vamso tanti- paveniparampara ’ti pi sayam eva va mahantatta ubha- yattha paridipitatta va Mahavamso, tarn Mahavamsam. tesam pi buddhabuddhasavakadinam pi gunamahantanam Mahasammatadinam pi va rajamahamattanam (rajamahan- tanam?) pavenidipitatta ca buddhagamanadipakarehi maha- dhikaratta sayam eva mabantattam veditabbam. anupamavamsaanuggahadinam (°dinam Paris MS.) sabbam anhatam (annatam Par. MS.) katam snppaka- sitam apariyagatam (ariyabhatam Par. MS.) uttamasabbhi van- nitam snnantu dipatthutiya sadhusakkatan ti (comp. Dipav. 1,5) imina Atthakatbanayen’ ev’ assa mabantattam paridipi- tam (paridipitattani?) ca veditabbam. — tenabu p or ana: dipagamanam buddbassa dbatun ca bodhiagamam (bodbi- yagamam Par. MS.) samgabattheravadan ca dipamhi sasanagamam narindagamanam vainsam kittayissam snnatha me ’ti (comp. Dipav. 1, l). imaya pana gathaya nayena (gatba- nayena Par. MS.) pi assa sakhya (samkbya Par. MS.) ma- bantattaparidipitattam neyyam. evam Mahavamsan ti lad- dhanamam Mahaviharavasinam vacanamaggam poran- atthakatbam ettba Sihalabhasam bitva Magadbikabbasaya pavakkhamiti adbippayo." As two stanzas are quoted here, the first of which is said to be taken from an Atthakatha, the second from a work of the „Porana“, and as immediately afterwards mention is made of the Sinhalese „Poranatthakatha“, the contents of which are expressed in the Mahavamsa in Pali, there can be very little doubt that this Atthakatha and 1) I give this passage according to the India Office MS. (fol. ho'), together with the various readings of the Paris MS. (fol. ho 1 ) which M. Feer has kindly communicated to me. — Comp. Tumour’s Introd. to the Maha- vaipsa, p. XXXI. Introduction. 3 that work of the Porana are identical with each other and with the Poranatthakatha mentioned afterwards. If I am right in asserting the identity of the works alluded to under these various expressions, we learn from this passage the following important fact, viz.: there was an Atthakatha handed down and probably also composed in the Mahavihara, written in Sinhalese, the introductory stanzas of which allude to a historical account of Bud- dha’s visits to Ceylon, of the Councils, of Mahinda etc., intended to be given in that very Atthakatha, and these stanzas are almost identical with the opening lines of the Dipavamsa. There must, therefore, most probably be some relation between this Atthakatha and the Dipavamsa which will be of a sufficient interest to justify a further inquiry. Let us see what results we may obtain as to the contents of this Atthakatha and as to its literary form? Let us ask particularly in what way the Pali stanzas quoted from this Atthakatha were connected with its main sub- stance which was composed in Sinhalese? The Mahavanisa Tika, after the passage quoted above, goes on to give some details about the way in which the author of the Mahavamsa made use of this Sinhalese Atthakatha on which his own work is based. It is said in the Tika: „ayam hi acariyo poranamhi Sihala [ttha] - katha - Mahavamse ativittharapunaruttidosabhavam pa- haya tarn sukhaggahanadippayojanasahitam katva ’va ka- thesi“. The work in question is called here, as repeatedly afterwards, Sihalatthakatha - Mahavamsa. It is not difficult to account for this expression where the two at first sight contradictory elements of a (theological) com- mentary (Atthakatha) and of an extensive historical nar- rative (Mahavamsa) are combined together. If we look at Buddhaghosa’s Atthakatha on the Yinaya, we find that the author has there prefixed to his explanation of the sacred texts a detailed historical account of the origin of the Tipitaka, its redaction in the three Councils, and its propagation to Ceylon by Mahinda and his compa- nions. Buddhaghosa’s commentary is based, as is well l* 4 Introduction. known, on that very Sinhalese Atthakatha of the Maha- vihara, which we are now discussing, and we may assume almost with certainty, that to this Atthakatha a similar historical introduction was prefixed which may have been even of a greater extent than that of Buddhaghosa. If our inference is correct, we have found in what way the title „Sihalatthakatha-Mahavamsa“ could apply most pro- perly to this work: it is a historical account (Maha- vamsa) which forms a constituent part of a theological commentary (Atthakatha), and which is composed in order to give to the dogmatical contents of the latter the indis- pensable historical foundation 1 ). We are not very likely to go too far astray, if we try to form an idea of the style of composition of this Sinhalese Atthakatha-Mahavamsa according to the analogy of what we have before us in Buddhaghosa’s comment. According to this, the Atthakatha-Mahavamsa appears to have been written, in the main, in prose; it was inter- mixed, however, with a considerable number of stanzas in order to emphasize the more important points of the narration and to raise them above the level of the rest. The Pali verses quoted above, which are taken apparently from the introduction to the whole work, render it highly probable that all these stanzas were composed in Pali. It was necessary, of course, to convey to the Sinhalese clergy of that time the understanding of the sacred Pali texts by a commentary written in Sinhalese; if, however, in the course of such a commentary the most important and remarkable points were to be expressed in a metri- cal form, we may easily understand, that for such a pur- 1) In order to show how an Atthakatha could contain extensive and detailed historical statements, we may refer also to the quotations which the Mahavamsa Tika gives from the Atthakatha of the U 1 1 a ra vi h ara, concerning the history of Susunaga (Tumour’s Introduction, p. XXXVII), of the nine Nanda kings (1. 1. p. XXXVIII), of Candagutta (1. 1. p. XLII), of the descendants of Mahasammata (1. 1. p. XXXV). It we compare the last passage with the statements about the same subject given above (p. 1, n. 2) from the Mahavamsa of the U It a r avihara , we are lead to believe, that the Mahavamsa also of the Uttaravihara formed a part of the Attakatha of that monastery in the same way as was the case in the Mahavihara. Introduction. 5 pose the language of the sacred texts which contained so abundant a stock of models for metrical composition, appeared much more appropriate than the popular dialect of the Sinhalese. A considerable number of verses ascribed to the „Porana“, i. e. taken from the ancient Sinhalese Attha- katha, and quoted by Buddhaghosa or in the Mahavamsa Tika, present the same close resemblance and almost identity with passages of the Dipavamsa, which we have observed in the two verses given above. In proof of this I give the following examples : Samanta-Pasadika (MS. Orient. 1027 of the Brit. Mu- ;seum) fol. ga': tenahu porana: Vedisagirimhi Rajagahe vasitvix timsa rattiyo kalo ’va gamanassa ’ti gacchama dipam uttamam. | | palina Jambudipato liamsaraja va ambare evam uppatita tlxera nipatimsu naguttame. | j purato purasetthassa pabbate meghasannibhe patitthahimsu kutamlii hamsa va nagamuddhaniti. Comp. Dipav. 12, 35 — 37 . Samanta-Pas. fol. kah’ — kha: sa panayam (i. e. the second Council) yehi therein samgita samgitesu ca vissnta Sabbakami ca Salho ca Revato Khuddhasobhito | Yaso ca Sanasambhuto, ete saddhiviharika thera Anandatherassa ditthapubba tathagatam, | Sumano Vasabhagami ca neyya saddhiviharika dve ime Anuruddhassa ditthapubba tathagatam. | dutiyo pana samgito yehi therein samgaho sabbe pi pannabhara te katakicca anasava ’ti. Comp. Dipav. 4, 50 — 51 . Mahav. Tika fol. khau: tenahu porana: yakkhanam buddho bhayajananam akasi, te tajjita tam saranam akamsu buddham, lokanukampo lokahite sada rato so cintayi attasukham acintamassa. | iman ca Lankathala manusanam G Introduction. poranakappatthitam vutt[k]avasam vasanti Lankathala manusa bahu pubbe va Ojamandavaradipe ’ti. Comp. Dipav. 1, 66. 73. Mahav. Tika fob tam: tenahu p or ana: Suppatitthitabrahma ca Nandiseno Sumanadeviya putto mata pita c’ eva gihibhuta tayo jana ’ti. Comp. Dipav. 19, 9. Mahtiv. Tika fob dhri': tenahu porana: Anula nama ya itthi sa liantvana naruttame catumasam Tambapannimhi issariyam anusasita ’ti. Comp. Dipav. 20, 30. These passages which we may almost with certainty pronounce to belong to the ancient Atthakatha-Mahavamsa of the Mahavihara, will suffice to show, to what extent the author of the Dipavamsa borrowed not only the ma- terials of his own work, but also the mode of expression and even whole lines, word for word, from that Attha- katha. In fact, a great part of the Dipavamsa has the appearance not of an independent, continual work, but of a composition of such single stanzas extracted from a work or works like that Atthakatha; many of the repeti- tions and omissions J ) which render some chapters of the 1) The most striking example of such repetitions is the account of the three Councils, each of which is described twice, the author, no doubt, having had before him two different authorities. The case is similar in the following passages: (12, 51 — 53 :) samano ’ti mam manussalokeyam khattiya pucchasi bhumipala, samaua mayam maharaja dhammarajassa savaka tam eva anukampaya Jambudipa idhagata. | avudham nikkhipitvana ekamantam upavisi, nisajja raja sammodi bahum atthupasamhitam. | sutva therassa vacanam nikkhipitvana avudham tato tlieram upagantva sammoditva c’ upavisi. (17, 27 :) punnakanarako nama ahu pajjarako tada tasmim samaye manussanam rogo pajjarako ahu. An instructive example of the abrupt and fragmentary character of some parts of the Dipavamsa is contained in the account of the conversion of young Moggallana (5, 55 — 68), which would be almost unintelligible if we did not possess the same narrative in the Mahavamsa (pp. 28 — 33). Introduction. 7 Dipavamsa almost illegible, we may account for not by the inadvertence of copyists, but by this peculiar method of compilation. The results we have obtained regarding the connexion between the Dipavamsa and the ancient Atthakatha of the Mahavihara, furnish us with a clue for gaining an insight into the relative position of the Dipavamsa and the second important historical text of the Pali literature, the Mahti- vamsa. The two works are, indeed, in the main nothing but two versions of the same substance, both being based on the historical Introduction to the great Commentary of the Mahavihara. Each work represented, of course, their common subject in its own way, the Dipavamsa following step by step and almost word for word the traces of the original, the Mahavamsa proceeding with much greater independence and perfect literary mastership. The Dipa- vamsa, as regards its style and its grammatical peculia- rities, betrays the characteristics of an age in which the Sinhalese first tried to write in the dialect of the sacred texts brought over from India; there are passages in the Dipavamsa which remind us of the first clumsy attempts of the ancient German tribes, to write Latin. The Maha- vamsa is composed very differently; its author masters the Pali grammar and style with a perfect ease which cannot have been acquired but after many fruitless at- tempts, and which may be compared with the elegant mastership of Latin composition by which the Italian poets and scholars of the renaissance excelled. The turning- A careful consideration, however, of this passage shows that the boundary- line between what is said and what is omitted does not present those signs of capricious irregularity which inevitably characterize gaps caused by a copyist’s carelessness. The omissions are governed by a certain principle. The important and interesting parts of the story are fully told ; the less prominent events which form only the connecting links between the chief points of the narrative, are altogether omitted. I think that both these omissions and those repetitions are to be accounted for, in the main, by the extremely awkward method in which the author compiled his work, though I do not deny, of course, that many of the gaps which are found throughout the whole work, are to be referred to a different origin, viz. to the misfortunes to which the tradition of the Dipavamsa has, from then till now, been exposed. 8 Introduction. point between the ancient and the modern epoch of Pali literature in Ceylon, is marked, no doubt, by the great works of Buddhaghosa, which were not less important from a literary than from a theological point of view. Both Mahavamsa and Dipavamsa finish their records at the same point, viz. with the death of king Mahasena. This coincidence is, of course, nothing but a consequence of the two works’ being derived from the same source. We may find in this a new confirmation of our opinion that this source is the Attbakatha-Mahavamsa of the Maha- vihara Monastery. The reign of that very king Mahasena was a fatal time to this monastery. A hostile party suc- ceeded in obtaining king Mahasena’s sanction for destroy- ing the Mahavihara; during a period of nine years the monastery remained deserted by its former inhabitants; afterwards, after long and violent ecclesiastical struggles, it was reconstructed. We may easily understand, there- fore, why historical writers belonging to the Mahavihara fraternity should stop just at the epoch of Mahasena’s reign, where the past destinies of their spiritual abode were divided from the present. After these remarks about the relation of the Dipa- vamsa to the ancient theological commentaries and to the Mahavamsa, we now proceed to collect the data which throw a light on the question, at what time the Dipa- vamsa was composed. Tumour infers its anterior origin, compared with the Mahavamsa, from the fact of the first line’s, as he says, of the Dipavamsa being quoted in the Mahavamsa Tika, the authorship of which he ascribes to Mahanama, the author of the Mahavamsa itself. But apart from Tumour’s opinion on the age of the Mahavamsa Tika being totally wrong, we have seen, that those lines are quoted in the Mahavamsa Tika not from the Dipavanisa itself, but from the Atthakatha on which the Dipavamsa is founded. So we lose the date on which Tumour’s opi- nion is based. What remains, are the following data: 1) The Dipavamsa cannot have been written before A. D. 302, because its narrative extends till that year. Introduction. 9 2) Buddhaghosa was acquainted with a version of the Dipavamsa which, however, differed in some details from that which we possess 1 ). 3) The continuator of the Mahavamsa (p. 257, ed. Tur- nour) tells us, that king Dhatusena (A. D. 459 — 477) or- dered the Dipavamsa to be recited in public at an annual festival held in honour of an image of Mahinda. 4) These data being given, it is only of a secondary importance, that the Mahavamsa Tika, which was com- posed in much later times, mentions an Atthakatha on the Dipavamsa 2 ). The result is, that the Dipavamsa — be it in that very version which we possess or in a similar one — was written between the beginning of the fourth and the first third of the fifth century. We do not know as yet the exact date of the composition of the Mahavamsa 3 ), but if we compare the language and the style in which the two works are written, there will scarcely be any doubt as to the priority of the Dipavamsa. The words, besides, by which Mabanama characterizes the works of his prede- cessors : poranehi kato p 1 eso ativittharito kvaci ativa kvaci samkhitto anekapunaruttako, apply so extremely well to those peculiarities of the Dipa- vamsa of which we have spoken above, that they appear to have been written most probably with reference to this very work. 1) Some lines from that version of the Dipav. are quoted in the Sa- mantapasadika. They partly agree with our text; partly they differ in such a way that they cannot be reconciled with it. See my notes on Dip. 11, 17 ; 12, 1 . — The Dipav. is also quoted in the Attakatha on the Kathavatthu; see the note on 5 , 3 0 . 2) fol. ne (with reference to the ecclesiastical quarrels in Mahasena’s reigu): ye keci bhikkhu va ussapitanikayantaraladdhika va tath’ eva amha- kam acariva akamsu ’ti vadeyyuin, tesam pi tarn parikappitavippbanditam eva, tesam abhilapamattam va ’ti Di p avams at thaka t h ay a m vuttam. 3) The arguments of Tumour who brings it under the reign of Dhatu- sena (Introd. p. LIY), are extremely weak. 10 Introduction. I have made use in editing the text of the Dipa- vamsa, of the following MSS.: I. MSS. written in Burmese characters. 1) F: MS. belonging to Major Fryer who brought it to England from British Burmah. About the third part of the Dipavamsa (6, 87 — 15, 9i) is wanting; instead of this the MS. contains a fragment of the Thupa- vamsa. The MS. has been written Sakkaraj 1190 = A. D. 1828. 2) N: A Collation of the MS. presented by the late king of Burmah to the Colonial Library in Colombo. This MS. was collated by Gombadde Watte Dewa Aranolis with the MS. M (see below), for the use of Mr. Rhys Davids; its readings are indicated, for the most part in English characters, sometimes in Sinhalese writing, at the margin of M. If the reading of N is not ex- pressly indicated by Dewa Aranolis, but if we are, from the silence of the collation, to draw the conclu- sion, that N agrees with M — a conclusion which is, of course, by no means alw r ays a safe one — , I de- signate such readings by n. If only a part of the single words is indicated, I include in brackets those parts which we are to supply from M. II. MSS. written in Sinhalese characters. 3) G: MS. of the Paris National Library (collection Grim- blot; fonds Pali 365). Although this MS. is writ- ten in Sinhalese characters, its readings agree at a good many passages with the Burmese MSS. The text of G has been corrected from a MS. very simi- lar to B. 4) A : MS. of the India Office (Pali Collection no. 95). 5. 6) B. C: Copies of two MSS. of the Dadalle Wihare, made for Mr. Rhys Davids, now in the Cambridge University Library (Add. 945. 946). In the five first Bhanavaras there are frequent corrections in C made from another MS. than that from which C has been copied. I designate these corrections by c. Introduction. 11 7) M: Copy made by Gombadde Watte Dewa Aranolis for Mr. Rhys Davids from a MS. of the Busse Wihare. Written on paper. Now in the Cambridge University Library (Add. 944). 8) R: MS. of the Cambridge University Library (Add. 1255). This is a copy of a MS. belonging to Mr. James d’Alwis. 9) D: MS. in the possession of Mrs. Childers, London; it is a copy made for the late R. C. Childers. 10) E : MS. of the Paris National Library (Coll. Grim- blot, fonds Pali 366). 11) S: A copy written on paper, which the priest Subhuti of Vaskaduve was kind enough to send me. There are some good corrections, written with pencil, on the first leaves, which I designate by s. I have used, besides, the following abbreviations: X = all Burmese MSS. Y = all Sinhalese MSS. Z — the class of MSS. represented by CDEMRS. All our MSS. are derived from the same original source which was very incorrectly written in Burmese characters, as we may infer from some of the blunders common to all of our MSS. x ). Perhaps this was the MS. brought in 1812 from Siam to Ceylon by the Modliar George Nadoris 1 2 ). The way in which the single MSS. are derived from their common source, will be shown by the following table: Burmese Archetype Xj ~ Y NFsGi W^ two elements A B c G 2 combined. As to their critical value, the Burmese MSS. (X) deserve to be classed first; least is the value of Z, the Z CDEMRS. 1) See, for instance, 1, 6. 55; 4, 45; 11, 3; 22, 18. 2) See Journ. As. Soc. Bengal VI, p. 790. 12 Introduction. apparent correctness of which is owing not to real an- cient tradition, but to arbitrary attempts of emendators. It appeared desirable to print not the text corrected as far as possible, but the text of the codex archetypus, and to give in the footnotes my own emendations as well as those tried already in the MSS. In many passages I have refrained from correcting manifest grammatical blun- ders, errors in numbers of years etc., because I was afraid of correcting not the copyist but the author him- self. Many passages also appeared to me too hopelessly corrupt for me to try to correct them. Of the various readings I could give, of course, only a selection, or the work would have increased to its threefold extent. I cannot finish without having expressed my sincere thanks to the librarians and owners of MSS. who very liberally lent them to me or allowed me to collate them. My special thanks are due also to Dr. R. Rost who aided my undertaking from its beginning to its end with the greatest kindness in many various ways, and to my learned friends Dr. G. Biihler and Mr. Rhys Davids, but for whose kind and indefatigable assistance I should not have been able to add to the Pali text of the Dipa- vamsa a translation written in the language of a foreign country. Berlin, September 1879. The Editor. 1 , 1 - 5 . 13 Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammasam- buddhassa. Dipagamanam buddhassa dhatu ca bodhiyagamam samgahacariyavadan ca dipamhi sasanagamam narindagamanam vamsam kittayissaip, sunatha me. | pitipamojjajananain pasadeyyam manoramam anekakarasampannam cittikatva sunatha me. | udaggacitta sumana pahattha tutthamanasa niddosam bhadravacanam sakkaccam sampaticchatba. | sunatha sabbe panidhaya manasam, vamsam pavakkhami paramparagatam tbutippasattham bahunabhivannitam etamhi nanakusumam va ganthitam, | anupamam vamsavaraggavasinam apubbam anaiinam tatha suppakasitam ariyagatam uttamasabbhi vannitam sunatha dipatthuti sa- dhusakkatam. | 5 Those readings of the MSS. which the Editor thinks to be correct, are spaced out, as well as his own conjectures. I, 1. This verse is quoted in the Mahavamsa Tika (Tumour’s MS.), dhatu ca ABGX, dhatufi ca Z, Mahav. T. dhatu may be the genitive; compare some examples of similar genitives and locatives at 15 , 21. 27; 16, 32; 17 , 53. — 4. “abhatam ABcG2, Mahav. T., “abhabhatam F, "agatam NGlZ. — nanakusumavarabhutaganthitan N, nanakusumam varabhutagau- hitam F, nanakusumavadasutapanditam Gl, etamhi nanakusumam va ganthi- tam Y, Mahilv. T. — 5. This Cloka which is quoted in the Mahavamsa Tika, runs there thus: anupamavamsaanuggahadinam sabbam aniialam katam suppakasitam apariyagatam uttamasabbhi vannitam sunantu dipatthutiya sa- dhusakkatan ti. 14 l, e— 20. Asabhan thanapallankam acalam dalham akampitam caturange patitthaya nisidi purisuttamo. | nisajja pallankavare narasablio dumindamiile dipadanam ut- tamo na chambhati vitabhayo va kesari disvana Maram saha- senavahanam. | Maravadam bhinditvana vitrasetva sasenakam jayo attamano dhiro santacitto samahito | vipassanakammatthanam manasikaran ca yoniso saramasi bahuvidham dhaminam anekakaranissitain. | pubbenivasananan ca dibbacakkhuu ca cakkliuma 10 sammasanto mahanani yame tayo atikkami. | tato pacchimayamamhi paccayakaram vivattayi anuloraam patiloman ca manas 1 aka sirighano. | natva dhammam parinnaya pahanam maggabhavanam anusasi mahanani vimutto upadhisamkhaye. | sabbahnutaiianavaram abhisambuddho mahamuni buddho buddho ’ti tam nainam samahna pathamam ahu. | bujjhitva, sabbadhammanam udanain katva pabhamkaro tad’ eva pallankavare sattaham vitinamayi. | samitasabbasantaso katakicco auasavo 15 udaggo sumano hattho vicintesi bahuin hitam. | khane kliane laye buddho sabbalokam avekkhati, pancacakkhu vivaritva olokesi bahii jane. | anavaranahanan tam pesesi dipaduttamo, addasa virajo sattha Lankadipam varuttainam | sudesam utusarnpannam subhikkham ratanakaram pubbabuddhamanucinnam ariyaganasevitam. | Lafikadipavaram disva sukhettam ariyalayam natva kalani akalan ca vicintesi anuggaho: | Lankadipe imam kalam yakkhabhuta ca rakkhasa 20 sabbe buddhapatikuttha, sakkii uddharitum balam. | 6. asabhan thanam pallankam? D a sab alas ut t a: dasabalasam- annagato bhikkhave tathagato catuhi vesarajjehi samannagato asabhan thanam patijanati parisasu sihanadam nadati. — dalham X, duttham Y. — caturo ange X. Compare Abhidhanapp. 157. — 7. sahasenam agatam Z, [sahasena]va[gatam] N, sahasenavahanam ABFG. The reading of Z may be correct. — 12. anusasi Ns, annnasi F, anussabhi (corrected into anussasi) Gl, anussahi ABG2, anussari Z. — 16. paiica cakkhum s. 1 , 21 — 33 . 15 niharitva yakkhagane pisace avaruddhake khemam katvana tam dipam vasapessami manuse. | titthantesu ca ime pape yavatayum asesato, sasanantaram bhavissati Lankadipavare tahim. | uddharitvan’ aliam satte pasadetva bahu jane acikkhitvana tam maggam anjasam ariyapatham | anupada parinibbayi suriyo atthamgato yatha. parinibbute catumase hessati pathamasamgaho, | tato param vassasate vassaii’ attharasani ca tatiyo samgaho hoti pavattatthaya sasanam. | 25 imasmim Jambudipamhi bhavissati mahipati mahapuhno tejavanto Asokadhammo ’ti vissuto. | tassa ranno Asokassa putto hessati pandito Mahindo sutasampanno Lankadipam pasadayam. | buddho natva imam hetum bahum atthupasamhitam kalakalam imam dipam arakkham sugato kari. | pallankam animisah ca cankamam ratanagharam ajapalamucalindo khirapalena sattamam. | sattasattahakaraniyam katvana vividhan jino Baranasim gato viro dhammacakkam pavattitum. | 30 dharnmacakkam pavattento pakasento dhammam uttamam attharasannam kotinam dhammabhisamayo ahu. | Kondahno Bhaddiyo Vappo Mahanamo ca Assaji ete panca mahathera vimutta anattalakkhane. | Yasasahaya cattari, puna pannasa darake Baranasi Isipatane vasanto uddhari jino. | 22. titthantoham ime pape XGls, titthantesucam ime pape Z, titthan- tesu ca papesu ABG2. I think that at least one line is ■wanting. We may fill up the gap thus: „pisace pavesessami Giridipam manoramam, titthantu ca ime papa yavatayum asesato. “ 24. parinibhiij'i G1XZ, parinibbeyam ABG2. p ar i n i b b ey y a m ? ■ — - 25. vassasate vassanatth 0 XZGl, dve vassasatanatth 0 A2BG2, vassasatanatth 0 Al. I think that the reading of XZGl is correct, and that a Cloka which contained a mention of the second Council has been omitted in our MSS. — 27. pasadaye Y (°yum Gl), “yarn Xs. — 31. pavattento all the MSS.; pa- vattente? — pakasente AB. — 33. Yasasahaye cattaro? — - Bara- nasi may be a locative; compare the note on dhatu 1, 1, and the expression „jati vijjante“ in the Buddhavamsa (Jat. vol. I, p. 4). But perhaps we should write Baranasim, comp. v. 34 and the comment on Kaccayana’s Grammar, 2, 18. 16 1, 34—49. Baranasim vasitvana vutthavasso tathagato Kappasike vanasande uddhari Bhaddavaggiye. | anupubban caramano Uruvelam avasari, 35 addasa virajo sattha Uruvelakassapan jatirn. | agyagarc ahinagam damesi purisuttamo. disva acchariyam sabbe nimantimsu tathagatam: | hemantaii catumasamhi idha vihara Gotama, mayam tam niccabkattena sada upatthahamase. | Uruvelayam hematite vasamano tathagato jatile saparisajje vinesi purisasabho. | mahayanham pakappimsu Ariga ca Magadha ubho, disva yanhe mahalabham vicintesi ayoniso: | mahiddhiko mahasamano anubhavan ca tani mall a, 40 sace mahajanakaye vikubbeyya katheyya va, | parihayissati me labho Gotamassa bhavissati, aho nuna mahasamano nagaccbeyya samagamam. | caritam adhimuttin ca asayan ca anusayam cittassa solasakare vijanati tathagato. | jatilassa cintitam natva paracittavidu muni pindapatam Kurudipe gantvana mahaiddhiya | Anotattadahe buddho paribhunjitvana bhojanam tattha jhanasamapattim samapajji bahum hitam. | buddbacakkhuki lokaggo sabbalokam vilokayi, 45 addasa virajo sattha Lafikadipavaruttamam. | mahavanam mahabhimam ahu Lankatalam tada. nanayakkha mahaghora ludda lohitabhakkhasa | canda rudda ca pisaca nanarupavihesika nanadhimuttika sabbe sanniptite samagata. | tattha gantvana tammajjhe vimamsetvana rakkhase niharitva pisacanam manussa hontu issara. j imam attham mahaviro cintayitva balnim hitam 37. catumasamhi? — 40. ca („ca“ is wanting in B G) maha sace mahajanakaye ABG, ca tam maha s° m° Xs, ca maha sace mahante jaua- kaye ca Z. If we take the reading of X as correct, anubhavam instead of anubhavo is well in keeping with the style of the LHpavamsa, and perhaps we may even accept maha (or mail a in?) as a neuter nominative. — 46. ahu? — 47. nanarupa vihesaka? — 48. gantvana tammajjhe FG1, gantvanabham majjhe N, gantvan’ aham majjhe s, gantvana te majjhe Y. — 48. vibhimsetvana (vibh 0 G‘2) ABcG2, vimamsetvana (vim 0 X) XGlZ. viddhamaetvana? 1, 49—56. 17 nabham abbhuggamitvana Jambudipa idhagato. | yakkhasamagamamajjhe upari siramatthake nisidanatp gahetvana dissamano nabhe thito. | 50 tbitam passanti sambuddham yakkhasena samagata buddho ’ti tam na mannanti yakkho anfiataro iti. | gafigatire Mahiyasu pokkhalesu patitthite thiipatthane Su- bhangane tasmim padesasmi thito naruttamo samappito jhanasama- dhiiu uttamam. | jhanam lahum khippanisantika.ro muni samapajjati citta- kkhane, sahasa tam utthati jhanakhaniya samapayi sucittehi para- migato. | thito naro iddhi vikubbamtino yakkho va mahiddhi maha- nubhavo, khaniyam ghana meghasahassadhara pavassati sitalavata- duddini. | abam karomi te unham, mama detha nisiditum, atthi tejabalam mayham parissayavinodanam. | 55 sace vinoditum sakka nisidahi yathicchitam, 52. Gangatire — Subhaiigane is wanting in BG2Z. — Mahiyapu AGl, Mahissasu X. I have written Mahiyasu, this being the site of the Mahi- yanganathupa, as is said in the Mahavamsa (p. 3), or of the „Mahi nama uyyanam" (Mahav. Tika). — Sut.amkhane AGl, Subhaiigane N, Sutaiigaue F (which may be correct). — 53. khippanisantikaro N G1 , °karoBG2, °ka A, khippanippantikaro F, khippati santikaro Z. In several passages of the Ang- uttara-Nikaya , a man who is endowed with promptitude of attention, is called „khippanisanti kusalesu dhammesu“. — cittakkhane F, cittakhane N, cintane A, eittane Gl, cintane BG2. Z has the following reading: muni samapajji sacintane tada. There is in the Kathavatthu (Phayre MS. fol. yah) a chapter called „ khauikakatha", in which the proposition is discussed: „eka- cittakkhanika sabbe dhamma ’ti.“ This means, I believe: „ all qualities may be considered in a moment by one thought". Perhaps we may compare also Lai. Vist. p. 447: „ sarvam tad ekacittekshauasamayuktam". I feel in- clined, therefore, to correct: muni samapajjat’ ekacittakkhane, and to translate: „he entered upon meditation (by revolving) in a moment by one thought (the whole system of Dhamma’s)." — The following hemistich may be corrected thus: sahasa tamh’ utthati, jhanam khane viva samapayi su ci t ta p ar am i ga to. — 54. naro AGlX, nabhe Z, which may be correct. — iddhi AG1FZ, iddhim N. — khaniyam ghana meghasa- hassadhara X (khaniyamkhana 0 F) , khanayamahameghasahassadharo (khau 0 Gl) AGl, khanaya m° dharo Z. ghatayam (ganthayam?) gh" m°? — sitalavataduddini AFG, 0 dundubbi ZN. Compare Mahavagga I, S, 2. — 55. karomi vo unhaip ? 2 18 1, 5G— 66. sabbehi samanunnatam, tava tejabalam kara. | unham yacatha main sabbe, bhiyyo tejam mahatapam khippam karoma accunham tumhehi abhipatthitam. | thite majjhantike kale gimbanam suriyo yatba evam yakkbanam atapo kaye thapita darunam. j yatba kappaparivatte catusuriyaatapo evam nisidane satthu tejo hoti tatuttari. | yatba suriyam udentam na sakka avaritum nabhe 60 evam nisidanan cammam n’ atthi avaranam nablie. j nisidanam kappajalam va tejam suriyam va pathavi malnitapam vikirati aggijalam v’ anappakam. | angararasijalitatapam tahim nisidanam abbbasamam pa- dissati pakkam va ayomayapabbatupamam. | dipesu unham uidasseti dussabam, yakkbasu patisaranam gavesayum purattbimam paccbimadakkhinuttaram uddbam adbo dasa disa imayo. | katham gamissama sukhi arogii kada pamuncama imam subheravam. | sace ayam yakkbo mahanubbavo tejo samapajjati pajjalayati sabbeva yakkha vilayii bbavissare bbusam va mutthi ra- 65 jam vatakbittam. | buddbo ca kbo isinisabho sukbavaho disvana yakkhe du- kkhite bbayattite anukampako karuniko mabesi vicintayi attasukham amanuse. j 56. tava tejabalam pliara? Comp. Buddbavamsa (Jilt. I, p. 24, v. 168). — 58. bhavittha darunam, s; thapito d°? — 59. tathuttari (°ri B) AB. taduttari FZ, tatuttari N. tat’ uttarim? — 60. naro Y, nabhe X (at the two places). — 61. A1G1F omit va. — pathavi X, patthapi ABG, pat- tbari Z. Mahavamsa Tika (fol. kho): te patbavisuriyatejaeammakhandabhi- bhutaya (sic) vakkhagana. — 62. p attain va N, sakkain va F, pakka va Y. — 63. dipisu XGl, dipesu Y (dipetu Bl). — nidasscti N, nidasoti F, nida- yeti Y. I do not think that nidasseti is correct, but I do not know how to correct it. — patissaranam N, saranam F, maranam Y. — gavesayum N, gavesisum F, bhavepisu Gl, bbavcsupi ABG2, bhavatajjitesu Z. — 64. ka- ham gamissama? — 66. nisabha = rishabha or vrishabba? I have found this word at the following passages: in the Samvuttaka-Nikaya (Phayre MS. part I, fol. ko) Buddha is compared with a naga, a siha, an ajaniya, a ni- sabha, a dhorayha. In the Majjhima- Nikava (Tumour's MS., fol. uam) it is said of Buddha „nisabhassa appameyyassa". Sutta-Nipata (Phayre MS., fol. gau): „gantvana disva isinisabham pasanno". Buddhavanisa (Phayre MS., fol. ji): 1, 67—74. 19 ath’ annadipam patirupakam imam ninnam thalam sabba- thanekasadisam nadipabbatatalakasunimmalam dipam Girim Lankatalasamu- pamam | sunibbhayam gopitasagarantakam pabutabhakkham bahu- d h an nam akulam utusamattham harisaddalam mahim varam Giridipam imassa uttarim | rammam manunnam haritam susitalam aramavanaramaney- yakaqi varam, santidba pbullaphaladharino duma, sunnam vivittam, na ca koci issaro, | mahannave sagaravarimajjhe sugamblure umi sada pabbij- jare, suduggame pabbatajalamussite sudukkaraip attha anittham- antarani. | 70 paravanarosfi parapitthimamsika akarunika parahethane rata canda ca ruddha rabhasa ca niddaya vidappanika sapatbe idha ime. | atba rakkhasa yakkhagana ca duttha dipam imam Lanka- ciranivasitam dadami sabbam Giridipaporanam, vasantu sabbe supaja anigha. | iman ca Lankatalam manusanani poranakappatthitavuttba- vasarn, vasantu Lankatale manusa babu pubbe va Ojavaramanda- sadisani. | etehi arrnehi guneh 1 upeto mamissavaso anekabhaddako dipesu dipissati sasan’ agate supunnacando va nabhe upo- sathe. | tato padakkhiiiam katva bodhimandam naruttamo aparajitanisabhatthane bo- dhipallaiikainuttame pallankena nisiditva bujjhissati maliayaso. 68. gopitas 0 N, gopikas 0 F, sobbitas 0 Y, gobhitas 0 Gl. gopitam s°? — uttari XGl. uttaram? — 71. ca rudda (comp. v. 47) AB, va rudda BG‘2, ca ruddha Zn, varuddha F. I cannot correct the last words. — ■ 72. 0 nivasitam XGl, 0 nivaslnam Y. — v. 73 is quoted in the Mahavamsa Tika, fol. kbau („tenahu porana"). Lankathalamanusanam, “ttliitam, vasanti Laiika- th ala manusa , Ojamaudavaradipe Mahav. T. 0 nraudapadipam F. Ojavara- mandadipe? — 74. anek° AFG1, va anek 0 N, api nek“ BG2Z. — - dipesu dipissati sasanagate A B G2 , dipassa dipa sadisa anagate Z, dipissati (dis- sissati F) sasanagate FG1, dipissati sasanam etthanagate N. 2 * 20 1 , 75 — 81 . dipam ubho manusa rakkliasa ca ubho ubhinnam tulayam sukham muni bhiyyo sukham lokavidu ubhinnam parivattayi gonayugam 75 va phasukam. | samkaddhayi Gotamo dipam iddhiya bandham va gonam dalharajjukaddhitam, dipena dipam upanamayi muni yugam va navam dalka- dhammaveditam. | dipena dipam yugalam tathagato katvan' ularam vipari ca rakkhase, vasantu sabbe Giridipa rakkliasa sapakkamasa vasanam va vatthitam. | gangam gimhamki yatha pipasita dhavanti yakkba Giridi- pam atthika, pavittha sabbe anivattane puna, pamuiica dipam yathabhu- miyam muni. | yakkha sututtha supakattkarakkkasa Iaddha sudipam ma- nasabhipatthitam abkayimsu sabbe atippamodita, otarimsu sabbe chane na- kkbattamaham. | natvana buddko sukhite anninuse katvana mettarn parittam bhani jino. katvana dipam tividham padakkhinam sada rakkhara ya- 80 kkhaganavinodanam, j santappayitva pisace amanuse rakkhan ca katva dalham mettabliavauam upaddavam dipe vinodetva gato Uruvelam puna tatha- gato "ti. | bkanavaram pathamam. yakkhadamanam nitthitam. 75. misuse rakkhase ca? — 76. dalb adama ve th i tam? — 77. vipariva A N Gl , 0 rica B M G2, ° rica CRF. — Giridipe? — sapakkamasa vasanam va vattliitam Y, sapakkasa capanam pavatticitam F, clisarn pakka- mana manasa va vatthitam N. I do not try any correction. — 78. Gan- gaii ca gimh 0 ? — Giridipavattika X, Giripavattita F. — pamunci AB G2. — 79. Compare Mahav. Tika fol. khau': „atha te (rakkliasa) amhakam iccliitam patthitam nippannan ti mahahasitan nama hasitva nakkhattachaua- kilam kilimsn. 1 propose to read, therefore: ahasimsu sabbe; chanam nakkh 0 . — 81. [dal]ha[mettabhava]nam X. — Z, apparently for the sake of metrical correctness, reads thus: „up° dipa vinodayitva gatoruvelam puna pi tath°.“ 2 , 1 — 11 . 21 II. Araham pana sambuddho Kosalanam puruttamam upanissaya vihasi Sudattarame sirighano. | tasinin Jetavane buddho dhammaraja pabhamkaro sabbalokam avekkhanto Tambapannivar’ addasa. | atikkante pancavassamhi Tambapannitalam aga, avaruddhake vinodetva Surinam dipam aka sayam. | uraga ajja dipamhi pabbateyya samutthita ubhoviyulhasamgamam yuddham karimsu darunam. | sabbe mahiddhika naga sabbe ghoravisa ahu sabbeva kibbisa caiida madamana avassitii. | 5 khippakapi maliateja paduttha kakkhala khara ujjhanasanni sukopa uraga vilaratthika. | Mahodaro mahatejo Culodaro ca tejaso ubho pi balasampanna ubho pi vannatisaya. | na passati koci samara samuttari, Mahodaro manamattena tejasa dipam vinasesi saselakananam : ghatemi sabbe patipakkha- pannage. | Cujodaro gajjati mananissito: agacchantu nagasahassako- tiyo, hanarni sabbe ranamajjham agate, thalam karomi satayoja- nam dipam. | padusayanti visavegadussaha, sampajjalanti uraga mahi- ddhika rosadhannna bhujagindamucchita ussalianti ranasatthu ma- dditurn. | 10 disvana buddho uragindakuppanam dipam vinassanti niva- ttahetukam II, 2. samutthita G1XZ, samuddika AB G2, comp. Mahavamsa, p. 5, 11. 1. 2. — 4. u b h a to viy u lh as 0 ? Mali. Tika fol. gu: satngaman ti ubhato- bvulhasamgamam. — 5. avassuta? — 6. viralattika Z, viralatthika N, pilarathika F, vilarattika ABG. vilay attbika? bilaratthika? — 8. sam- uttari AFGlnZ, °rim BcG2. samu ttaram (instead of samuttaram)? — 10. padhupayanti? comp. Mahavagga I, 15, 4. — °sattu ABG2, °satthu GlZn, “pattum F. — ■ pararosadhamma (comp. 1, 71) bhujaginda mucchita ussahayanti ranasattu madditum? — 11. °kuppanam F, “kubbanam N, °dubbalam Y. — vinasanti F, vinasenti N, vinassanti Gl Z, vinasassa ABG2. uragindakuppanam d° vinassantaiu nivattihe- tu k am? 22 2, 11—25. lokassa cari sugato bahum hitam vicintayi aggasukhain sadevake. | sace na gaccheyyam na pannaga sukhi, dipam vinasam Da ca sadhu ’nagate, | nage anukampamano sukhatthiko gaccham’ aham dipasu- kham samicchitum. | Lafxkadipe gunam disva pubbe yakkhavinoditam mama sadhukatam dipam ma vinasentu pannaga. | idam vatvana sambuddho utthahitvana asana 15 gandhakutito nikkhamma dvare atthasi cakkhuma. | yavata Jetavane ca arame vanadevata sabbe ’va upatthahimsu mayam gacchiima cakkhuma. | alam sabbe pi titthantu Samiddhi yeko ’vagacchatu, avagaccha saharukkho dharayitvana pittkito. | buddhassa vacanam sutva Samiddhi sumano ahii samulam rukkham adaya saha gacchi tathagatam. | naruttaman tam sambuddham devaraja mahiddhiko chayam katvana dharesi buddhasetthassa pitthito. | yattha naganam samgamam tattha gantva naruttamo 20 ubhonagavaramajjhe thito satthanukampako. | nabhe gantvana sambuddho ubbonaganam upari tibbandhakaratamam ghorarn akasi lokanayako. | andham tamam tada hoti kesaramayaiddhiya, andhakarena onaddho sihita yarukkho ahu. | ahnamanham na passanti tasita naga bhayattita jitam pi na passanti kuto samgama karitum. | sabbe samgamam bhinditva pamuneitvana avudham namassamana sambuddham sabbe thita katanjali. | salomahatthe natvana disva nage bhayattite 25 mettacittena pharitvana unharamsim pamuncayi. | 11. attasukham? comp. 1, G6. In the Mahav. Tika (fol. khau) a stanza of the Porana is quoted which contains the words „so cintayi atta- Bukham acintamassa (sic).“ — 13. disapainukham icchituni ABG, dipavud- dliim samiccliitum Z, dipasamukham icchituni F, dipasukham samijjhitum N. samicchitum = sk. sam-irts? dipasukham samijjhatu? — 17. avagaccha FG1N, agaccha ABcG2, agaccha Z. avagacchi? — 20. sattanukam- pako? comp. v. 47. — 22. k e sar i m a h a id dhiv a? — onaddha A1X, °ddho A2BGZ. — saliita Y, patita F, sihita N. — yarukkho ahu Y, yarukkho ahosi F, yadukha ahum N. on 0 pihito sarukkho ahu? — 23. jitam pi BG, jiuam pi A, jiyam pi te Z, jivitain pi F, jvitain pi N. jinam pi te? 2, 26—42. 23 aloko Va maha asi abbhuto lomahamsano sabbe passanti sambuddham nabhe candam va nimmalam. | chabi vannehi upeto jalanto nabhakantare dasa disa virocanto thito nage abhasatha: | kimatthiyam maharaja naganam vivado ahu? tumheva anukampaya javagacchim tato aham. | ayah Culodaro nago ayan nago Mahodaro matulo bhagineyyo ca vivadanto dhanatthiko. | anudayan candanaganam sambuddho ajjhabhasatha: appo hutva maha hoti kodho balassa agamo. | so kim udisva bahu naga mahadukkham nigacchatha, imam parittam pallankam ma tumhe nasayissatha, ahnamahnam vinasetha akatam jivitakkliayam. | samvejesi tada nage nirayadukkhena cakkhuma. manussayonim dibbah ca nibbanan ca pakittayi. | pakasayantam saddhammam sambuddham dipaduttamam sabbe naga nipatitva khamapesuin tathagatam. | sabbe naga samagantva samagga hutvana pannaga upesum saranam sabbe asiti panakotiyo. | sabbe naga vinassama imam pallafikahetukain. | 35 adaya pallankavaram ubho naga samatthika: patiganhatha pallankam anukampaya cakkhuma. | adhivasesi sambuddho tunhibhavena cakkhuma, adhivasanam viditvana tuttlia mahoraga ubho: | nisidatu ’mam sugato pallankam veluriyamayam pabhassarah jativantain naganam abhipatthitam. | patitthapimsu pallankam naga dipanam antare, nisidi tattha pallanke dhammaraja pabhamkaro. | pasadetvana sambuddham asiti nagakotiyo tattha naga parivisum annapanan ca bliojanam. | 40 onitapattapanin tarn asiti nagakotiyo parivaretva nisidimsu buddhasetthassa santike. | Kalyanike gangamukhe nago ahu saputtako mahanagaparivaro namenapi Maniakkhiko, | 27. jalante Y, which may be correct. — virocento F. — • 28. kim- atthaya? comp. 13 , 2. — 31. kim udisva ABG2, kim d° Z, kimad 0 G1 , kamam d° F, kimam d° N. kim uddissa? — 36. samatthika ABG, samaggika Z, sapattika tv, papattika F. — 42. namenasi AZ, °api BGX. 24 2, 43—56. saddho saranasampanno sammaditthi ca silava. nagasamagamam gantva bhiyyo abhipasidati. | disva buddhabalam nago anukampam phanimayam abhivadetva nisidi ayacesi tatbagatam: | imam dipanukampaya patbamam yakkhavinoditam, 45 idam ntiganam ’nuggaham dutiyam dipanukampanam, | puna pi bhagava imam anukampam mabamuni, ahan c’ upatthahissami veyyavaccam karom’ aharn. | nagassa bhasitam sutva buddho sattanukampako Lafikadipahitatthaya adhivasesi sugato. | paribhunjitva pallankam vutthahitva pabbaipkaro divaviharam akasi tattba dipantare muni. | dipantare dipan’ aggo divasam vitinamayi samapatti samapajji brahmavibarena cakkbuma. | sayanhakalasamaye nage amantayi jino: idh’ eva botu pallanko, khirapalo idhagacchatu, 50 naga sabbe imam rukkham pallankan ca namassatba. | idam vatvana sambuddho anusasetvana pannage paribbogacetiyam datva puna Jetavanani gato. | nagadamanam nittbitam. Aparam pi attbaine vasse nagaraja Manikkbiko nimantayi mabaviram paiicabbikkhusate saba. | parivaretvana sambuddhani vasibhuta mabiddbika,- uppatitva Jetavane kamamano nabhe muni Lankadipam anuppatto gangam Kalyanisammukbam. | sabbe ratanamandapam uraga katva mahatale nanarangehi vatthebi dibbadussebi chadayum. | nanaratanalamkara nanaphullavicittaka 55 nanarangadhaja neka mandapam nanalamkatam. | sabbasanthatam santharitva pannapetvana asanam buddhapamukhasamghassa pavesetva nisidimsu. | 44. phaaimayam ACG2R, panim 0 Gl, phanim 0 BM, manimavam X. ph a n i b h ay a m? — 46. imam AB2G1X, mam B1 G2, amham Z. — anu- karapa A, °pam BGX, °paya Z. — 49. samapatlim N. samapatti? — 50. idba gacchatu XG1, idhag 0 ABcG2, idbacchatu Z. — 53. gangak° ABFG, gangam k° N, gaiigak 0 Z. gangaqi Kalyanikam mukham? comp. v. 42. — 54. sa b b a r a tan a m°? — mahitale? — 56. nisidasum A, 0 disura BG, °dayum Z, 0 dimsu F, °disu N. nisidayum appears to be the correct reading. 2 , 57 — 3 , 1 . 25 nisiditvana sambuddho pancabhikkhusate saha samapatti samapajji mettam sabbadisam phari. | sattakkhattum samapajji buddho jhanam sasavako tasmim thane mahathupo patitthasi cetiyam uttamam. | mahadanam pavattesi nagaraja Manikkhiko, , patiggahetva sambuddho nagadtinam sasavako bhutvana anumoditva nabh’ uggacchi sasavako. | orohitva nabhe buddho thane Dighavapicetiye samapajji samapattim jhanam lokanukampako. | go vutthahitva samapatti tamhi thane pabhainkaro vehayasam kamamano dhammaraja sasavako Mahameghavane tattha bodhitthanam upagami. | purima tini mahabodhi patitthimsu mahitale tarn thanani upagantvana tattha jhanam samapayi. | tisso bodhi imain thane tayo buddhana sasane, maman ca bodhi idh’ eva patitthissat’ anagate. | sasavako samapatti vutthahitva naruttamo yattha Meghavanarammam agamasi narasabho. | tatthapi so samapattim samapajji sasavako. vutthahitva samapatti byakarosi pabhamkaro: | 65 imam padesam pathamam Kakusandho lokanayako imam pallankathanamhi nisiditva patiggahi. | imain padesam dutiyam Konagamano narasabho imam pallankathanamhi nisiditva patiggahi. | imam padesam tatiyam Kassapo lokanayako imam pallankathanamhi nisiditva patiggahi. | aham Gotamasambuddho Sakyaputto narasabho imam pallankathanamhi nisiditva samappito ’ti. | bhanavaram dutiyam. III. Atitakappe rajano thapetvana bhavabhave imamhi kappe rajano pakasissami sabbaso, | 57. samapattim N. samapatti? — 60. nabhe X, nate Gl, nage AB G2, nabham Z. nabha? — 62. mahabodhi? — 63. tisso bodhi? — 64. "vane ramme GIN, "vane rame F, "vaDaramam ABcG2, "vanarammam Z. "vanam rammam? 26 3 , 2 — 16 . f jatin ca namagottaii ca ayun ca anupalanam sabban tain kittayissami, tam sunatha yathakatham. | pathamabhisitto raja bhumipalo jutindharo Mahasammato ntuna namena rajjam karesi khattiyo. | tassa putto Rojo nama, Vararojo nama khattiyo, Kalyanavarakalyana, Uposatho mahissaro, | Mandhata sattamo tesaxi catudipamhi issaro, 5 Caro, Upacaro raja, Cetiyo ca mahissaro, | Mucalo, Mahamucalo, Mucalindo, Sagaro pi ca, Sagaradevo, Bharato ca, Aiigiso nama khattiyo, | Ruci, Maharuci nama, Patapo, Mahapatapo pi ca, Panado, Mahapanado ca, Sudassano nama khattiyo, | Mahasudassano niima, duve Neru ca, Accima, atthavisati rajano, ayu tesam asamkhaya. | Kusavati, Rjtjagahe, Mithilayani puruttame rajjam karimsu rajano, tesam ayu asarnkhaya. | dasa dasa satan c’ eva, satain dasa sahassiyo, sahassam dasa dasasahassan ca, dasa dasasahassam satasa- 10 liassiyo, | dasa satasahassan ca koti, dasakoti, kotippakotiyo, nahutan ca, ninnahutan ca, abbudo ca, nix-abbudo, | ababam, atataii c’ eva, ahaham, kumudani ca, sogandlxikam, uppalako, pundarikapadumako, | ettaka ganita samkhepa gananaganika tahim, tato uparimabhumi asainkheyya ti vuccati. | ekasatan ca rajano Accimassapi atraja maharajjam akaresuxn nagare Pakulasavhaye. | tesain pacchimako raja Arindamo nama khattiyo, putta paputtaka tassa chapannasan ca khattiya 15 maharajjam akaresum Ayujjhanagare pure. | tesain pacchimako nija Duppasaho mahissaro, III, 2. yathatathain? — 6. Bhagiraso nama? — 8. 9. asamkhiva ABcG2. — 9. karesum? — 11. dasa satasahassan ca koti, pakoti, kotippakotiyo? compare Burnouf, Lotus, p, 854 ; Sp. Hardy, Manual, p. 6. — 12. kumudena ca? — 13. gananaganika ABGX, °ta Z. ettaka ganita samkheyya gananaganiya tahim? — uparima XGlZ, 'mam ABcG2. — bhumi XCl Gl R, “mim ABcG2M. — 14. Sakulasavhayc A B G, Bakulasavhaye N, Pagulavhaye F, Kapilavhaye Z. S agal a savhay e? 3, 16—27. 27 putta paputtaka tassa satthi te bhumipalaka maharajjam akaresum Baranasipuruttaine. | tesam pacchimako raja Abhitatto nama khattiyo, caturasiti sahassani tassa puttapaputtaka maharajjam akaresum Kapilanagare pure. | tesam pacchimako raja Brahmadatto mahissaro, putta paputtaka tassa chattimsapi ca khattiya maharajjam akaresum Hatthipuravaruttame. | tesam pacchimako raja Kambalavasabho ahu, putta paputtaka tassa battimsapi ca khattiya, nagare Ekacakkhumhi rajjam karesum te idha. | tesam pacchimako raja Purindado Devapujito putta paputtaka, tassa atthavisati khattiya maharajjam akaresum Vajirayam puruttame. j 20 tesam pacchimako raja Sadhino nama khattiyo, putta paputtaka tassa dvavisa rajakhattiya maharajjam akaresum Madhurayam puruttame. | tesam pacchimako raja Dhammagutto mahabbalo, putta paputtaka tassa attharasa ca khattiya nagare Aritthapure rajjam karesum te idha. ] tesam pacchimako raja narindo Sitthinamako, putta paputtaka tassa sattarasa ca khattiya nagare Indapattamhi rajjam karesum te idha. | tesam pacchimako raja Brahmadevo mahipati, putta paputtaka tassa pannarasa ca khattiya nagare Ekacakkhumhi rajjam karesum te idha. | tesam pacchimako raja Baladatto mahipati, putta paputtaka tassa cuddasa rajakhattiya, maharajjam akaresum Kosambimhi nagare pure. | 25 tesam pacchimako raja Bhaddadevo ’ti vissuto, putta paputtaka tassa nava raja ca khattiya nagare Kannagocchamhi rajjam karesum te idha. | tesam pacchimako raja Naradevo ’ti vissuto, putta paputtalm tassa satta ca rajakhattiya 17. Ajitajano (instead of Abhitatto) A2. — 21. Sadino Z. Malia- vamsa Tika: Sadhano. — 23. Mahav. Tika: Brahmasivi. — 24. 25. Mahav. Tika: Brahmadatta, Baladeva. — 26. Mahav. Tika: Hatthideva. 28 3, 27—40. maharajjam akaresum Rojananagare pure. | tesam pacchimako raja Mahindo nama khattiyo, putta paputtaka tassa dvadasa rajakhattiya maharajjam akaresum Campakanagare pure. | tesam pacchimako raja Nagadevo mahipati, putta paputtaka tassa pancavisa ca khattiya maharajjam karayimsu Mithilanagare pure. | tesam pacchimako raja Buddhadatto mahabbalo, putta paputtaka tassa pancavisa ca khattiya .30 maharajjam karayimsu Rajagahapuruttame. | tesam pacchimako raja Dipamkaro nama khattiyo, putta paputtaka tassa dvadasa rajakhattiya maharajjam karayimsu Takkasilapuruttame. | tesam pacchimako raja Talissaro nama khattiyo, putta paputtaka tassa dvadasa rajakhattiya maharajjam karayimsu Kusinarapuruttame. ) tesam pacchimako raja Purindo nama khattiyo, putta paputtaka tassa nava raja ca khattiya maharajjam karayimsu nagare Malitthiyake. | tesam pacchimako raja Sagaradevo mahissaro, tassa putto Makhadevo mahadanapati ahu. j caturasiti sahassani tassa puttapaputtaka 35 maharajjam karayimsu Mithilanagare pure. | tesam pacchimako raja Nemiyo Devapujito balacakkavatti raja sagarantamahipati. | Nemiyaputto Kalarajanako, tassa putto Samamkaro, Asoko nama so rajii muddhavasittakhattiyo. | caturasiti sahassani tassa puttapaputtaka maharajjam karayimsu Baranasipuruttame. | tesam pacchimako r:\ja Vijayo nama mahissaro, tassa putto Vijitaseno abhijatajutindharo. | Dhammaseno, Nagaseno, Samatho nama, Disampati, 40 Renu, Kuso, Mahakuso, Navaratho, Dasaratho pi ca, | 27. Rocanagare N. Mahav. Tika : Rojanamamhi nagare. — 30. Mahav. Tika: Samuddadatto. — 32. Talissaro ABG2X, Taliyaro Gl , Talisajo Z. Mah. Tika: Kalissaro. — 33. Purindo ABG, [Puri]ndo N, Purindado Z, Su- dinno F, Mahav. Tika. — Mahav. Tika: Tamalittiyanarnamhi nagare. — 37. Samankuro ABcG2, Mah. T>ka. a, 41—53. 29 Ramo, Bilaratho nama, Cittadassi, Atthadassi, Sujato, Okkako c’ eva, Okkamukho ca, Nipuro, | Candima, Candamukho ca, Sivi raja ca, Sanjayo, Vessantaro janapati, Jali ca, Sihavabano, Sihassaro ca yo dliiro pavenipalo ca khattiyo, | dveasiti sahassani tassa puttapaputtaka rajjam karesum rajano nagare Kapilasavhaye. | tesam pacchimako raja Jayaseno mahipati, tassa putto Sihakanu abhijatajutindharo. | Sihahanussa ye putta yassa te panca bhataro Suddhodano ca Dhoto ca Sakkodano ca khattiyo | 45 Sukkodano ca so raja raja ca Amitodano, ete panca pi rajano sabbe Odananamaka. | Suddhodanassayam putto Siddhattho lokanayako janetva Rahulabhaddam bodhaya abhinikkhami. | sabbe te satasahassani cattari nahutani ca apare tini satarajano mahesakkha siyayaca. | ettaka pathavipala bodhisattakule vutta. | anicca vata samkhara uppadavayadhammino, uppajjitva nirujjhanti, tesam vupasamo sukho ’ti. | 50 Maharajavaniso nitthito. Suddhodano nama raja nagare Kapilasavhaye Sihahanussayam putto rajjam karesi khattiyo. | pancannam pabbatamajjhe Rajagahe puruttame Bodhiso nama so raja rajjam karesi khattiyo. | sahaya annamanna te Suddhodano ca Bhatiyo. [imamhi pathame kappe pavenipa janadhipa.] jatiya atthavassamhi uppanna panca asaya: | 41. Bilaratho AZ, Bilaratho BG, Pi[laratho] N, Pilaratlio P. Vilara- ratho Mali. T. — Mah. T. : Cittarasl Ambarasi. — ca Nipuno N, va Ni- suro F, ca Nipuro A, va Nimukho BGC, va Timukho R, va Timukho M. Mah. T. : Nipuro; Lokadipasara (India Off. MS., fol. kha) : Nipuno. — 42. yo dhiro Y (ye dhira A2), bodhiro N, rodhiro F. — 45. tassa te? ■ — 48. apare A2N, aparo A1 BGZF. — mahayakaniyaya ca GIN, mahayananiyaya ca F, mahesakkha ("sakkaZ) siyaya (siyapi A) ca Y. mahesakkha vina- yaka, or something like that? — 49. vutta X, puta Gl, jata Y. — 52. pabbatamajjhe Y, °tamajjhe F, “tana m° N. — Bodhiso XGl, Bodhi Z, Bhatiyo ABG2. — 53. Bhatiyo A Z, Bhatiso B, Bliati G2, Bodhiso GIN, Bodhiyo F. — imamhi — janadhipa appears to be the second hemistich of v.49. One or two lines containing a mention of Bimbisara, are wanting here. 30 3, 54 — 4, 5. pita mam anusaseyya attho rajjena khattiyo, yo mayham vijite buddho uppajjeyya narasabho, | dassanam pathamam mayham upasamkame tathagato, 55 deseyya amatam dhammam, pativijjheyyam uttamam. | uppanna Bimbisarassa panca asayaka ime. jatiya pannarase vasse ’bhisitto pitu accaye, ( so tassa vijite ramme uppanno lokanayako, dassanam pathamam tassa upasamkami tathagato, desitam amatam dhammam abbhannasi mahipati. | jativassam mahaviram pancatimsa anunakam, Bimbisara sama timsa jatavasso mahipati. viseso pancahi vassehi Bimbisarassa Gotamo. | pannasan ca dve vassaui rajjam karesi khattiyo, sattatimsam pi vassani saha buddhehi karayi. | Ajatasattu battimsa rajjam karesi khattiyo, GO atthavassabhisittassa sambuddho parinibbuto. | parinibbute ca sambuddhe lokajetthe narasabho catuvisativassani rajjam karesi khattiyo. j bhanavaram tatiyam. IV. Satt’ eva satasahassani bhikklnisamgha samagata araha khinasava suddha sabbe gunaggatam gata. | te sabbe vicinitvana uccinitva varam varani pancasatanam theranam akamsu samghasammatam. | dhutavadanam aggo so Kassapo jinasasane, bahussutanam Anando, vinaye Upalipandito, | dibbacakkhumhi Anuruddho, Vangiso patibhanava, Punno ca dhammakathikanam, vicitrakathi Kumarakassapo, vibhajjanamhi Kaccano, Kotthito patisambhida. 5 anne p’ atthi mahathera agganikkhittaka bahu. | 54. attlie rajuna(m)? Comp. Mahavagga V, 1, 3. — so mayham vijite? — 5S. mahavira A1FG, “ram N, “viro A2. „mahaviram“ is cor- rect, comp. n Upalipauditam“ 4, 28 (5, <6). — sama hisa AlGF, sama liissa N, samatimsa A2. Bimbisaro sama timsa (or: samatimsa) jati- vasso m°. — 59. buddhena ABcG2. IV, 5. Kotthito Yu, Kotthiko G, Kotipakoti F. 4, G — 19. 31 tehi c’ afinehi therehi katakiccehi sadhuki paiicasatehi therehi dhammavinayasamgaho therehi katasamgaho theravado 'ti vuccati. | Upalim vinayam pucchitva dhammam Anandasavhayam akamsu dhammasamgabam vinayan capi bhikkhavo. | Mahakassapathero ca Anuruddho makagani Upalithero satima Anando ca bahussuto | anne bahuabhinnata savaka sattkuvannita pattapatisambhida dbira chalabhinna mahiddhika samadhijhanam anucinna saddhamme paramigata, | sabbe pancasata thera navangam jinasasanam uggahetvana dharesum buddhasetthassa santike. | io bhagavato sammukha suta patiggahita ca sammukha dhamman ca vinayaii capi kevalam buddhadesitam, | dhammadhara vinayadhara sabbe pi agatagama asamhira asamkuppa satthukappa sada garu, | aggasantike gahetva aggadhamma tathagata agganikldiittaka thera aggam akamsu samgaham. sabbo pi so theravado aggavado ’ti vuccati. | Sattapannaguhe ramme thera pancasata gani nisinna pavibhajjimsu navangam satthusasanam. | suttam geyyam veyyakaranam gathudanitivuttakam jatakabbhutavedallam navangam satthusasanam. ] 15 pavibhatta imam thera saddhammam avinasanam vaggapannasakan nama samyuttan ca nipatakam agamapitakam nama akamsu suttasammatam. | yava titthanti saddhamma samgaham na vinassati tavata sasan’ addhanam ciram titthati satthuno. | katadhamman ca vinayam samgaham sasanaraham asamkampi acalam bhumi dalham appativattiyam. | yo koci samano vapi brahmano ca bahussuto parappavadakusalo valavedhi samagato na sakka pativattetum, Sineru va suppatitthito. | 6. paucasatehi samgito (or a similar word) dhammav 0 ? comp. 5, 10. — 9. bahu abhifiuata, d’Ahvis (Catal., p. 133). — 13. aggadhammam tathagatam? comp. 5, 14. — 14. p a v i b h aj i msu ? — 13. katam dha- mmam ca A. — samkampi BG2. — • nbbi ABG2, bhumi M2n, bbumi F; this word is wanting in Z. 32 4, 20—34. devo Maro va Brahma ca ye keci pathavitthita 20 na passanti anumattam kinci dubbhasitam padam. | evam sabbaiigasampannam dhammavinayasamgaham suvibhattam supaticchannam satthu sabbannutaya ea | Mahakassapapamokkha thera pancasata ca te katam dhammaii ca vinayasamgaham avinasanam | sammasambuddhasadisam dhainmakayasabhavanam hatva janassa sandeham akarnsu dhammasamgaham. | anaimavado sarattho saddhammamanurakkhano tkiti sasanaaddhanam theravado sahetuko. j yavata ariya atthi sasane buddhasavaka 25 sabbe pi samanunnanti pathamam dhammasamgaham. | mulanidanam pathamam adipubbaingamam dhuram thera pancasata kata agga ajaniya kulan ti. | Mahakassapasamgaham nitthitam. Nibbute lokanathasmim vassani solasam tada, Ajatasattu catuvisam, Vijayassa solasam ahu, | samasatthi tada hoti vassam Upalipanditam, Dasako upasampanno Upalitherasantike. | yavata buddhasetthassa dhammappatti pakasita sabbam Upali vacesi navangam jinabhasitam. | paripunnam kevalam sabbam navangam suttamagatani ho uggahetvana vacesi Upali buddhasantike. | samghamajjhe viyakasi buddho Upalipanditam: aggo vinayapamokkho Upali mayha sasane. | evani upanito santo samghamajjhe mahagani sahassam Dasakapamokkham vacesi pitake tayo. j khinasavanam vimalanam santanam atthavadinain theranam pancasatanam Upali vacesi Dasakam. | parinibbutamhi sambuddhe Upalithero mahagani vinayam tava vacesi timsa vassam anunakam. | 21. suparich 0 N. — 22. kata. Y, katam N, kata F; comp. v. 18. — vi- nayam saipgaham Z. — 23. 0 kayasabhavanam AFG1Z, “kayassa bh° 11NG2, 0 kayani sabbavato, d’Alwis. — 24. °rakkhano? — thitiya sasana- ddhanarn, d’Alwis. thati sasanaaddhanam („it will last as long as the Doctrine")? — 26. 1 do not know how to correct kulam. — 29. dhamma- pali? — 33. atthav 0 ABc, athav" GZ, tathav 0 N, tatthavadinam F. — Upali vacesi sasanam? 4, 35—47. 33 caturasiti sahassani navangam satthusasanam vacesi Upali sabbam Dasakam nama panditam. | 35 Dasako pitakam sabbam Upalitherasantike uggahetvana vacesi upajjhayo va sasane. | saddhiviharikam theram Dasakam nama panditam vinayam sabbam thapetvana nibbuto so mahagani. | Udayo solasa vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo, cbabbasse Udayabhaddamhi Upalithero sa nibbuto. | Sonako manasampanno vanijo Kasim agato Giribbaje Veluvane pabbaji satthusasane. | Dasako ganapamokkho Magadhanam Giribbaje vihasi sattatimsamhi pabbajesi ca Sonakam. | 40 pancatalisavasso so Dasako nama pandito, Nagadasadasavassam, Pandurajassa visati, upasampanno Sonako thero Dasakasantike. | vacesi Dasako thero navangam Sonakassa pi, uggahetvana vacesi upajjhayassa santike. | Dasako Sonakam theram saddhivihari anupubbakam katva vinayapamokkham catusatthimhi nibbuto. | cattaris’ eva vasso so thero Sonakasavhayo, Kalasokassa dasavasse addhamasan ca sesake, | sattarasannam vassanam thero asi pagunako, atikkantekadasavassam chamasan cavasesake, | 45 tasmih ca samaye thero Sonako ganapumgavo Siggavam Candavajjin ca akasi upasampadam. | tena kho pana samayena vassasatamhi nibbute bhagavati Vesalika Vajjiputtaka Vesaliyam dasa vatthuni dipenti: kappati singilonakappo, kappati dvangulakappo, kappati gamantarakappo, kappati avasakappo, kappati anumati- kappo, kappati acinnakappo, kappati amathitakappo, ka- ppati jalogim patum, kappati adasakam nisidanam, ka- ppati jataruparajatan ti. | 37. vinayatthane thapetvana? — 39. Kasiyagato A2, comp. Ma- havamsa, p. 29, 1. 9. — 41. DSsakath era santike ABC2G2. Probably we ought to adopt this reading and to expunge „thero“. — 43. saddhivihari- nupubbakam N. sadd h i v i h ar i m anuppadam? comp. 5, 91. 104. — 44. atthamasan F. — 45. satt" vass 0 coro asi Pakundako? comp. 11,2. — 46. Instead of Candavajji, “vajjim, the MSS. often have Candavajjo, 0 vajjam. 3 34 4 , 48 — 5 , 9 . dasadasakavassamhi sambuddhe parinibbute Vesaliyarn Vajjiputta dipenti dasa vatthuke. | tathagatena patikkhittam sabbam dipenti akappiyam. Sabbakamx ca Salho ca Revato Khujjasobhito | Yaso ca Sanasambhuto ete saddhiviharika 50 thera Anandatherassa ditthapubba tathagatarn, | Sumano Vasabhagami ca seyya saddhiviharika dve ime Anuruddhassa ditthapubba tathagatarn, | ete sattasata bhikkhu Vesaliyarn samagata vinayam patiganhanti thapitam buddhasasane. | sabbe pi visuddhacakkhu samapattimhi kovida pannabhara visamyutta sannipate sanruigata. | dutiyasamgaham nitthitam. bhanavaram catuttham. V. Parinibbanasamaye Kusinarayam naruttame satta satasahassani jinaputta samagata. | etasmim sannipatamhi tliero Kassapasavhayo satthukappo mahanago, pathavya n’ atthi idiso, | arahantanam pancasatam uccinitvana Kassapo varam varam gahetvana akasi dhamniasamgaham. | paninam anukampaya sasanam dighakalikam akasi dhammasamgaham tinnam masanam accaye sampatte catutthe mase dutiye vassupanayike. | Sattapannaguhadvare Magadhauam Giribbaje 5 sattamasehi nitthasi pathamo samgaho ayam. | etasmim samgahe bhikkhu agganikkhittaka bahu sabbe pi paramippatta lokanathassa sasane. j dhutavadauam aggo so Kassapo jinasasane, bahussutanam Anando, vinaye Upalisavhayo, | dibbacakkhumhi Anuruddho, Vangiso patibhanava, Punuo ca dhammakatbikanam, vicitrakathi Kumarakassapo, vibhajjanamhi Kaccano, Kotthiko patisambhida, 4 8. “vassamhi Y, 0 vassani FGl, “vassaram N. — 51. The Samantapa- sadika, in -which this stanza is quoted, has neyya instead of seyya. V, 1. puruttame Z. — 4: corap. 7, 57. — 5. Magadhanam! — 5, 9—23. 35 anne p’ atthi mahathera agganikkhittaka bahu. | tehi c’ annehi therehi katakiccehi sadhuhi pancasatehi therehi dhammavinayo ca samgito. therehi katasamgaho theravado ’ti vuccati. | 10 Upalim vinayam pucchitva dhammam Anandapanditam akamsu dhammasamgaham vinayan capi kevalam. | jinassa santike gahita dhammavinaya ca te ubho Upalithero ca Anando saddhamme paramigato | pariyayadesitau capi atho nippariyayadesitam nitatthan c’ eva neyyattham dipimsu suttakovida. | aggassa santike aggam gahetva vakyam tathagatam agganikkhittaka thera aggam akamsu samgaham, tasma hi so theravado aggavado ’ti vuccati. | visuddho apagatadoso theravadanam uttamo pavattittha cirakalam vassanam dasadha dasa ’ti. | 15 Nikkhante pathame vassasate sampatte dutiye sate mahabhedo ajayittha theravadanam uttamo. | Vesalivajjiputtaka dvadasa sahassa samagata dasa vatthuni dipesum Vesaliyam puruttame. | singilonadvangulakappani gamantararamavasanam numatiacinnamathitajalogin capi rupiyam nisidanam adasakam dipimsu buddhasasane. | uddhammam ubbinayan ca apagatatn satthusasane attbam dhamman ca bhinditva vilomani dipayimsu te. | tesam niggahanatthaya bahu buddhassa savaka dvadasa satasahassani jinaputta samagata. | 20 etasmim sannipatasmim pamokkha attha bhikkhavo satthukappa mahanaga durasada mahagani: | Sabbakami ca Sajho ca Revato Khujjasobhito Vasabhagami Sumano ca Sanavasi ca Sambhuto | Yaso Kakandakaputto jinena thomito isi, papanam niggahatthaya Vesaliyam samagata. | 10. The words „paficasatehi therein 11 are wanting in all the MSS. ex- cept N. Comp. 4, 6. — 12. dhammavinavam Z. — 15. vassani? — 16. theravadanam AF. — anumati 0 Z. — 19 et seq. Compare d'Alwis, Iutrod. to Kaccayana, p. 54 et seq., Catalogue, p. 142 et seq. - — 19. apa- gatam satthusasana? ap aga t as a t thus as an a in ? Cullavagga: iti p’ idam vatthnm uddhammam ubbinayam apagatasattliusasanam. — vilomayi ABG, “masi F, “mani N, °mam Z. 3 * 36 5, 24 — 38 . Vasabhagami ca Sumano Anuruddhassanuvattaka, avasesa theranandassa ditthapubba tathagatam. | Susunagassa putto Asoko tada asi mabipati, 25 Piitaliputte nagaramhi rajjam karesi khattiyo. | tan ca pakkham labhitvana attha thera mabiddhika dasa vatthuni bhinditva pape niddhamayimsu te. | niddhametva papabhikkhu madditva vadapapakam sakavadasodhanatthaya attha thera mabiddhika | arahantanam sattasatam uccinitvana bbikkbavo varam varam gahetvana akanisu dbammasamgabam. | Kutagarasalay’ eva Vesaliyam purnttame atthamasehi nittbasi dutiyo samgaho ayan ti. | Nikkaddbitva papabhikkhu therein Vajjiputtaka so annam pakkham labhitvana adhammavadi bahu jana | dasa sahassi samagantva akamsu dhammasamgaham, tasmayam dhammasamgiti Mahasamgiti vuccati. | Mahasamgitika bhikkhu vilomam akamsu sasanam, bhinditva mulasamgaham annam akainsu samgaham. | annattha samgahitam suttam annattha akarimsu te, attham dhamman ca bhindimsu ye nikayesu pancasu. | pariyayadesitan capi atho nippariyayadesitam nitatthan c’ eva neyyattham ajanitvana bhikkhavo | annam sandhaya bhanitam ahnattham thapayimsu te, 35 byanjanacchayaya te bhikkhu bahu atthain vinasayum. | chaddetva ekadesan ca suttam vinayan ca gambhiram patirupam suttavinayam tan ca annam karimsu te. | parivaram atthuddharain abhidhammappakaranam patisambhidan ca niddesam ekadesan ca jatakam ettakam vissajjetvana ahnani akarimsu te. | namam lingam parikkharam akappakaranaui ca pakatibhavam vijahetva tan ca annam akamsu te. | 30 — 33. These stanzas are quoted in the Kathavatthu-Atthakatba (MS. of the Paris National Library, fonds Pali, 229); I designate the readings of this MS. by K. — 30. nikkaddhita K, d’Alwis. — 31. sahassa K, d’Alwis. — mahasamgiti vuccati NIC, d’Alwis, vuccati (omitting niahasam- giti) FGl, sattasatika ti v° Z, samgititi pavuccati ABG2. m ah asam g i t i t i vuccati? — 33. bh" nikayesu ca paucasu, d’Alwis; bh° vinave nika- yesu ca pancasu IC. — 35. bahuni K, d’Alwis. — 3G. vinayagambhi- ram ZIC, d'Alwis. — abhidhammam chappakarauam K, d’Alwis. — 38. vijahitva AIC. 5 , 39 — 53 . 37 pubbamgama bhinnavada Mahasamgitikaraka, tesan ca anukarena bhinnavada bahu ahu. | tato aparakalamhi tasmim bhedo ajayatha: Gokulika Ekabyohara duvidha bhijjittha bhikkhavo. | 40 Gokulikanam dve bheda aparakalamhi jayatha: Bahussutaka oa Pannatti duvidha bhijjittha bhikkhavo. | Cetiya ca punavadi Mahasarngitibhedaka. paiica vada ime sabbe Mahasamgitimulaka | attham dhamman ca bhindimsu ekadesan ca samgaham ganthiri ca ekadesamhi chaddetva annam akamsu te. [ namam lingam parikkharam akappakaranani ca pakatibhavam vijahetva tan ca annam akamsu te. j visuddhatheravadamhi puna bhedo ajayatha: Mahimsasaka Vajjiputtaka duvidha bhijjittha bhikkhavo. | 45 Vajjiputtakavadamhi catudha bhedo ajayatha: Dhammuttarika Bhaddayanika Chandagarika ca Sammiti. | Mahimsasakanam dve bheda aparakalamhi jayatha: Sabbatthavada Dhammagutta duvidha bhijjittha bhikkhavo. | Sabbatthavada Kassapika Kassapika Samkantika, Suttavada tato anna anupubbena bhijjatha. | ime ekadasa vada pabhinna theravadato attham dhamman ca bhindimsu ekadesan ca samgaham ganthin ca ekadesamhi chaddetvana akamsu te. | namam lingam parikkharam akappakaranani ca pakatibhavam vijahetva tan ca annam akamsu te. | 50 sattarasa bhinnavada eko vado abhinnako, sabbev’ attharasa honti ’bhinnavadena te saha. | nigrodho va maharukkho theravadanam uttamo anunam anadhikan c’ eva kevalam jinasasanam, kantaka viya rukkhamhi nibbatta vadasesaka. | pathame vassasate n’ atthi, dutiye vassasatantare bhinna sattarasa vada uppanna jinasasane. | 39. ahum N. — 41. Bahussutika K, d’Alwis; Bahulika ABG2. — Pannatti. — 42. punavadi. — 44. vijahitva A K. — 46. Channa- garika ca Sammiti? ■ — 47. 48. Sab b a 1 1 hi v ad a, d’Alwis. — 48. a8ne? K: Sakantikanam Suttavadi anupubbena bhijjatha. — 49. chaddetva annam akamsu te K. — 50. vijahitva AK. 38 5, 54—68. Hemavatika Rajagirika Siddhattha PubbaparaselikA aparo Rajagiriko chattha uppanna aparapara. | acariyavadam nitthitam. Anagate vassasate vassan’ attharasani ca 55 uppajjissati so bhikkbu samano patirupako, | brahmaloka cavitvana uppajjissati inanuse jacco brahmanagottena sabbamantana paragu, | Tisso ti nama namena Putto Moggalisavhayo. Siggavo Candavajjo ca pabbajessanti darakam. | pabbajito tada Tisso pariyattin ca papuni bhinditva titthiyavadam patitthapessati sasanam. | Pjitaliputte tada raja Asoko niima nayako anusasati so rajjani dhammiko ratthavaddhano. | sabbe sattasata bhikkbu anusasetvitna sasanam go dasa vatthuni bhinditva thera te parinibbuta. | brahmaloka cavitvana uppanno rniinuse bhave, ja.tiya solasavasso sabbamantana piiragu. j pucchami samanam panham ime panhe viyakara, iruvedam yajuvedam samavedam pi nighandum itihasan ca pancamam. j therena ca katokaso panham pucchi anantaro. paripakkananam manavam Siggavo etad abravi: | aham pi manava panham pucchami buddhadesitam, yadi pi kusalo panham byakarohi yathatatham. | bhasitena saha panhe: na me dittham na me sutam, 65 pariyapunami tarn mantam, pabbajja mama ruccati. J sambiidhaya gharavasa nikkhamitvana manavo anagariyam santibhavam pabbaji jinasasane. | sikkhakamam garucittam Candavajjo bahussuto anusasittha sainaneram navangam satthusasanam, | Siggavo niharitvana pabbajapesi darakam, susikkhitam mantadharam Candavajjo bahussuto navangam anusasetva thera te parinibbuta ’ti. | 54. A p a raraj agi r i ka? — chadhii N. — 57. The MSS. almost con- stantly read Candavajjo instead of Candavajji. — 60. a nusas i t v an a? — 62. samaua? comp. v. 65: manava. — 63. anantaram Al, °ro A2GIN, °ra BG2F, °re Z. anuttarara? comp. 6,28. — 65. bhasitena saha pa- nhena? — 66. sambadhasma? 5 , 69 — 82 . 39 Candaguttassa dvevasse catusatthi ca Siggavo tada, atthapannasa vassani Pakundakassa rajino, upasampanno Moggaliputto Siggavatherasantike. | Tisso Moggaliputto ca Candavajjassa santike vinayam uggahetvana vimutto upadhisamkhaye. | 70 Siggavo Candavajjo ca Moggaliputtam mahajutim vacesum pitakam sabbam ubhatosamgahapunnakam. | Siggavo nanasampanno Moggaliputtam mahajutim katva vinayapamokkham nibbuto so chasattati. | Candagutto rajjam karesi vassani catuvisati, tasmin cuddasavassamhi Siggavo parinibbuto | arannako dhutavado appiccho kanane rato sabbaso so rato danto saddhamme paramigato | pantasenasane ramme ogabetva mahavanam eko adutiyo suro siho va girigabbhare. | 75 nibbute lokanathassa vassani solasam ahu, samasatthi tada hoti vassam Upalipanditam, | Ajatasattu catuvisam, Vijayassa solasam ahu, Dasako upasampanno Upalitherasantike. | cattails’ eva vassani Dasako nama pandito, Nagadase dasavasse, Pakundakassa visati, | upasampanno Sonako thero Dasakasantike. cattalisavasso dhiro thero Sonakasavhayo, | Kalasokassa dasavasse, Tambapanniantaravase vassam eka- dasam bhave, Siggavo upasampanno Sonakatherasantike. | 80 Candaguttassa dvevasse, catusatthi Siggavo tada, atthapannasa vassani Pakundakassa rajino, upasampanno Moggaliputto Siggavatherasantike. | Asokadhammassa chavasse chasatthi Moggaliputto ahu, atthacattarisa [vassani] Mutasivassa rajino, Mahindo upasampanno Moggaliputtassa santike. | uggahesi vinayan ca Upali buddhasantike, 71. ub h o sam gah a s u tt a kam? Comp. 7,28. — 76. lokanathasmim? comp. 4 , 27. — 78. P aiidura jass a visati? comp. 4 , 41. — 82. Instead of chasatthi it ought to be satthi. — atthacattalisam Mutasivassa rajino N, atthacattarisam (°sa A) ABG, omitting the following words; athavattadi- pam F. Z : atthacattarisavassamhi Mahindo nama yatissaro upasampanno suvi- suddho Mogg 0 s° . 40 5, 83—98. Dasako vinayam sabbam Upalitherasantike uggahetvana vacesi upajjhayo va sasane. | vacesi Dasako thero vinayam Sonakassa pi, pariyapunitva vacesi upajjhayassa santike. | Sonako buddhisampanno dhammavinayakovido 85 vacesi vinayam sabbam Siggavassa anuppadam. | Siggavo Candavajjo ca Sonakasaddhiviharika, vacesi vinayam thero ubho saddhiviharike. | Tisso Moggaliputto ca Candavajjassa santike vinayam uggahetvana vimutto upadhisamkhaye. | Moggaliputto upajjhayo Mahiudam saddhiviharikam vacesi vinayam sabbam theravadam anuuakam. | parinibbute sambuddhe Upalithero mahajuti vinayam tava vacesi tirasa vassam anunakam. | saddhiviharikam theram Dasakam nama panditam 90 vinayatthane thapetvaua nibbuto so mahamati. | Dasako Sonakam theram saddhiviharim anuppadam katva vinayapamokkham catusatthimhi nibbuto. | Sonako chalabhiiinano Siggavani ariyatrajam vinayatthane thapetvana chasatthimhi ca nibbuto. j Siggavo nanasampanno Moggaliputtan ca darakam katva vinayapamokkham nibbuto so chasattati. | Tisso Moggaliputto ca Mahiudam saddhiviharikam katva vinayapamokkham chasitivassamhi nibbuto. | catusattati Upali ca, catusatthi ca Dasako, chasatthi Sonako thero, Siggavo tu chasattati, 95 asiti Moggaliputto, sabbesam upasampada. | sabbakalamhi pamokkho vinaye Upalipandito, pannasam Dasako thero, catucattarisan ca Sonako, pahcapahhtisavassam Siggavassa, atthasatthi Moggaliputta- savhayo. | Udayo solasa vassani rajjarn karesi khattiyo, chavasse Udayabhaddamhi Upalithero nibbuto. | Susunago dasavassam rajjarn karesi issaro, atthavasse Susunagamhi Dasako parinibbuto. | 85. dhammavinayiko muni N, °yako muni F, °soka muni Gl. — 94. chasitivassamhi N, atthatimsamhi Y, atthatisamhi F. The correct num- ber would be eighty. 5, 99 — 6, 3. 41 Susunagass’ accayena honti te dasa bhataro, sabbe bavisati vassam rajjam karesu vamsato. imesam chatthe vassanam Sonako parinibbuto. | Candagutto rajjam karesi vassani catuvisati, tasmin cuddasavassamhi Siggavo parinibbuto. | loo Bindusarassa yo putto Asokadhammo mahayaso vassani sattatimsam pi rajjam karesi khattiyo. | Asokassa chavisativasse Moggaliputtasavhayo sasanam jotayitvana nibbuto ayusamkhaye. | eatusattativassamhi thero Upalipandito saddhiviharikam theram Dasakam nama panditam vinayatthane thapetvana nibbuto so mahagani. | Dasako Sonakam theram saddhiviharilcani anuppadam katva vinayapamokkham catusatthimhi nibbuto. ] Sonako chalabhinnano Siggavam ariyatrajam vinayatthane thapetvana chasatthimhi parinibbuto. | 105 Siggavo nanasampanno Moggaliputtan ca darakam katva vinayapamokkham nibbuto so chasattati. | Tisso Moggaliputto so Mahindam saddhiviharikam katva vinayapamokkham asitivassamhi nibbuto. | bhanavaram pancamam nitthitam. VI. Dve satani ca vassani attharasa vassani ca sambuddhe parinibbute abhisitto Piyadassano. \ agata rajaiddhiyo abhisitte Piyadassane, pharati punnatejan ca uddham adho ca yojanam, Jambudipe maharajje balacakke pavattati. | vaso Anotatto daho Himavapabbatamuddhani, sabbosadhena sarnyutta solasam pi kumbhiyo tada devasikam niccam deva abhiharanti te. | 99. Kalasokass’ accayena? — vissuto AZ, vissnta BG2, vamsato X. — 107. chasiti N; asiti, the other MSS. VI, 2. maharajje A B G2, 0 jjaCGlR, "jjamMnF. — balacakkam? — 3. vasso Anotatto yo A, vasso Anodatto dayo G, vaso Anotatte dahe N, vahe Anodattadahe F, Anodattodakam yeva Z. In B these words are wanting, yo so An 0 daho? tassaAnotatte dahe? Samantapas. : „ devasikam eva tassa devata . . . aharanti." — solasamhi k° Al, °sam pi A2, “sain pi BG, 42 6 , 4 — 17 . nagalatadantakattham sugandham pabbateyyakam mudusiniddham madhuram rasavantain manoramam tada devasikani niccam devatabhiharanti te. | amalakam osadhan ca sugandham pabbateyyakam mudusiniddham rasavantain mahabhuteh' upatthitam 5 tada devasikam niccam devatabhiharanti te. | dibbapanam ambapakkan ca rasavantain sugandhakam tada devasikam niccam devatabhiharanti te. | Chandadahato va pancavannam papurananivasanam tada devasikam niccam devatabhiharanti te. | sisanhanagandhacunnam tatha canuvilepanam mudukain parupattaya sumanadussam asuttakam | maharaham ahjanan ca sabban tarn nagalokato tada devasikam niccani nagarajaharanti te. | ucchuyatthipugamattam pitakain hatthapunchanam 10 tada devasikam niccam devatabhiharanti te. | nava vahasahassani suvaharanti saliyo undurehi visodhita, makkhika madhukam karum, accha kutamhi kotayum, | sakuna suvaggajata karavika madhurassara Asokapunhatejena sada saventi manuse. | kappayuko mahanago catubuddhaparicarako suvannasamkhalikabaddho punnatejena agato, | pujesi rattamalehi Piyadassi mahayaso. vipako pindapatassa patiladdho sudassano. | Candaguttassayam natta Bindusarassa atrajo rajaputto tada asi Ujjenikaramolino, 15 anupubbena gacchanto Vedissanagaram gato. | tatrapi ca setthidhita Devi nama ’ti vissuta tassa samvasam anvaya ajayi puttam uttamam. | Mahindo Samgharaitta ca pabbajjam samarocayum, °sam ca Z, °sam pi ca N, °sa pi caca F. solasa ambukumbhiyo? sol 0 paniyakumbhiyo? Samantapas. : „ Anotattadahato ... solasa pani- yaghate . . . devata aharanti." 5. “hupatthite A, 0 hupatlhitani B, 0 hupatthitarp G, °su pattbitam Z, "hi pattbitaip N, °hi patitthitam F, mahabhupehi patthita m? — vv. 6 — 10 are wanting in all the Sinhalese MSS., vv. 6—9 in F also. — 7. Chaddantato pane 0 ? — parupanatthaya? Samantapas.: parupanatthaya asuttamayi- kam sumanapupphapatam. “ — 11. kutehi kottayum? — 15. [Ujjeni]- nagara[moli]no N, Ujjenikaramolino (°yo Z) Y, Uccenikaramolino F. — 16. tassa Y. — uttamo YF. 6, 17 — 30. 43 ubho pi pabbajitvana bhindimsu bhavabandhanam. | Asoko rajjam karesi Pataliputte puruttame, abhisitto tini vassani pasanno buddhasasane. | yada ca parinibbayi sambuddho Upavattane yada ca Mahindo jato Moriyakulasambhavo etthantare yam ganitam vassam bhavati kittakam? | dve vassasatani honti catuvassam pan’ uttari samantaramhi so jato Mahindo Asokatrajo. | 20 Mahindadasavassamhi pita bhate aghatayi, Jambudipam ’nusasento catuvassam atikkami, | hantva ekasate bhate vamsam katvana ekato Mahindacuddasame vasse Asokam abhisincayum. | Asokadhammo ’bhisitto patiladdha ca iddhiyo, mahatejo punnavanto dipe cakkapavattako. | paripunnavisavassamhi Piyadass’ abhisincayum. pasandam pariganhanto tini vassam atikkami. | dvasatthiditthigatika pasanda channavutika, sassataucchedamula sabbe dvihi patittbita, | 25 niganthacelaka c’ eva itara paribbajaka itara brahmana ’ti ca anne ca puthuladdhika. | niyantisassatucchede sammulhe hinaditthike itobahiddhapasancle titthiye nanaditthike sarasarani gavesanto puthuladdhi nimantayi. | titthigane nimantitva pavesetva nivesanam mahadanam padatvana panbarn puccbi anuttaram. | panham puttba na sakkonti vissajjetum saka bala, ambam puttham labujarn va byakarimsu apannaka. | anumattam pi sabbesam alan te puna desanam. bbinditva. sabbapasandam haritva putbuladdhike | 30 22. Mahindacuddasavasse Z, “dacuddasame vasso (°sse A) ABG, 0 dacuddasamavasse F, 0 de cuddasame vasse N. — 24. pasande A. Comp, v. 30. — 26. itara brahmana N; itara is wanting in the other MSS. — brahmanapi ca? — 27. niyatisass 0 ? n i ga n t h as as s 0 ? — 28. niman- tetva A. — nivesane YF. — 29 b . puttho AZ, °ttham BGN, suttham F. ambam puttho (puttha?) labujam va? — 30. The king, as is related in the Sainantapasadika, invited the ascetics to sit down on what seats they judged due to themselves. They placed themselves on different kinds of low seats, whereas Nigrodha took his seat on the royal throne. I there- fore propose to correct this line thus: anumattam pi sabbesam alan tesam nisidanaip. 44 6, 31 — 43. iti raja vincintesi: anne pi ke labhamase ye loke arahanto ca arahattamaggan ca passanti? | samvijjanti ime loke, na yimam lokam asunnatam, kadaham sappurisanam dassanam upasamkame? tassa subhasitam sutva rajjarn demi savijitam. | iti raja vicintento dakkhineyye na passati, niccam gavesati raja silavante supesale. | cankaman tamhi pasade pekkhamano bahu jane rathiya pindaya carantam Nigrodham samanam addasa. | pasadikam abhikkantam patikkantam vilokitain 35 ukkhittacakkhusampannam arahantam santamanasam | uttamadamathappattam dantam guttani surakkhitam kulagane asamsattham nabhe candam va nimmalam, | kesari va asantasam, aggikkhandbain va tejitam, garum duriisadani dhirarn santacittana samaliitam, | kbinasavam sabbaklesasodhitam purisuttamam caraviharasampannam sampassam sanianuttamam | sabbagunagatara Nigrodhain pubbasahayani vicintayi pubbe sucinnakusalam ariyamaggaphale thitam, | 40 rathiya pindaya carantam munim moneyyavussati. j jigimsamano sa dhiro cintayi: | buddho ca loke araha savako lokuttaramaggaphale thito mokkhah ca nibbanagato asamsayam annataro esa thero gurunam. | so pancapitipasadam patilabhi ularam pamojjamanappa- sadito, nidhim va laddha adhano pamodito iddho manoicchitam va Sakkopamo. | 32. apafiuakara N. sunnatam? Comp, the following stanza of the Uuddhavamsa : evam nirakulam asi sunnatam titthiyehi tarn, vicittam ara- hantehi vasibhutehi tadihi. — sajivitam A, savijitam Bti, yam jitam Z, savijitam N, samvajitam F. — 35. okkhittac 0 A. Comp. Mahavagga I, 23, 2. — 36. kulangane A. — 38. sampassam X, “ssa Gl, °ssi Y. — 39. pubb asamav am? — 40. pindaya is wanting in all the MSS., ex- cept in N. — 40. 41. sunimonavayitam jigimsamano viricintayi AG1, suni- monavassitam jigisamano sa viro cintayi F, munim moneyyavussati jigisamano sa dhiro cintayi N, passitvii so vicintayi Z. These words are wanting in B G2. munim moneyyavusitam ... jigimsamano sa dhiro vicintayi? — 42. buddho va? — sasavako A. — After „thito“ we ought to insert „muni“ or a similar expression. — 43. pamojjarp m an a p pas adito? amantayi annatarekamaccam : lianda bhikkhan tam tara- manarupo nayehi pasadikam santavuttim nago va yantam rathiya kumarakam | asantasam santagunadhivasitam. | raja pasadavipulam patilabhi udaggabattho manasabhicin- tayi : nissainsayam uttamadhammapatto aditthapubbo ayam puris- uttamo. | vimamsamano punad evam abravi: supanhattam asanam ... patthatam, nisidayi pabbajitattham asane, maya anunnatam tassabhi- patthitam. | adaya ranno vacanam padakkhinam . . . gahetva abhiruhi asane, nisidi pallankavare asantaso Sakko va devaraja Pandu- kambale. | vicintayi raja: ayam aggadarako niecalo asantayi .. atthi nu tam | disva raja tam tarunam kumarakam ariyavattapariharakam varam susikkhitam dhammavinayakovidam disva raja tarunam ku- marakam pasannacitto punad evam abravi: | desehi dhammam tava sikkhitam mama, tvam eva sattha, anusasitam taya karomi tuyham vacanam mahamuni, anusasa mam ... su- noma desanam. | sutvana ranno vacanam sutejitam navangasatthe patisam- bhidatthito 44. bhikkhantam Y, °nto GIN, °nte F. bhikkliun tam? — 45. na- yeha? — santagunavasitam (°kam F) YF, santagunadhivasitam N. santa- gunadhivasitam? — 46. pasadam v°? — uttamadamathapatto N. — - 47. nisidahi p ab b a j i t aggh a m asan e (Mabavamsa, p.25.1.6: „anurupc asane“) maya anunflatam t ay a b h i p a tth i t a m ? — 48. ca dakkbinam AB. sa dakkbinam karam (see Mahavamsa, p. 25, i. 8) gahetva? — 49. asantapiti (° piti B G2) tam ABG2, asantapi akatthinu tam Gl, asan- tapi (°yi N) atthi nu tam X, santapiti atthi Z. asantaso . . .? — 50. va- ram N, eari F, dhari Y. — The repetition of „ disva — kumarakam “ ought to be expunged. — 51. sutopadesanam (sun 0 Gl) ABG, which may be correct. In Z, v. 52 and the last Pada of v. 51 are wanting. 46 6 , 52 — 62 . vilolayi tepitakam maharaham, tain addasa appamadasu- desanam: | appamado amatapadam, pamado maccuno padam, appamatta na miyanti, ye pamatta yatha mata. | Nigrodbadhiram anumodayantam raja vijaniya tam agga- hetum, ye keci sabbanhubnddhadesita sabbesam dhammanam imassa mulaka. | ajj’ eva tumhe saranam upemi buddhan ca dhammam sara- nan ca samgham, 55 saputtadaro sahanatakajjano upasakattam pativedayami tam. J saputtadaro sarane patitthito Nigrcdhakalyanamittassa agama : pujemi caturo satasahassarupiyam atthatthakam niccabha- ttan ca therain. | tevijja iddhippatta ca cetopariyayakovida khinasava arahanto bahu buddhassa savakii. | therain avoca punad eva raja: icchami sanigliaratanassa dassanani, samr»gamam sannipatanti yavata abhivadayami sunami dham- main. | samagata satthisahassabbikkhu, duta ca ranno pativeda- yimsu : samgho mahasannipato sutnttho, gacchasi tvam icchasi sain- ghadassanani. | dhtassa vacanam sntva Asokadhainmo mahipati go ainantayi natisamghamittamacce ca bandhave: | dakkliinadanam dassama mahasanighasamagame, karoina veyyavatikam yathasattim yathabalam. | mandapam asanam udakam;upatthanam danabhojanam patiyadentu me khippam danaraham anuccbavam. | 54. vijaniya tam aggahetum A B G2, vijaniipsu tam aggahetum Z, vijani (°ni N) baliuni (“huni N) gahetum (ggahetum Gl) XG1. — “buildliena dcaita ABG2. — imassa mulaka XG1, imam mulakam ti (°kan ti A, °ka ti B) A B G2, imassa mulaka Z. im(am) assu mulakam? — 58. sanni- patanti ABG, santi patanti Z, sannipatantu X. — 59. sannipatimsu tuttha (sant 0 A; kuttha Z) Y, sannipata sututtha Gl, sannipato sututlho N, sanni- padiita suduttha F. — gaechalii Z. — icchami F. gacchahi tvam icchi- tam s° ? — 61. dakkhinadhammani ("dammarn N) XGl. dakkhinada- nam? — 62. p an a b h o j an am? — anucchaviip ABG2. 6, 63—74. 47 supeyyabhattakara ca suciyagususamkhata patiyadentu me khippam manunnam bhojanam sucim. | mahadanan ca dassami bhikkhusamghe ganuttame, nagaramhi bheriyo vajjantu, vithi sammajjantu te, vikirantu valukam setam pupphan ca pancavannakam, | malagghiyam toranan ca kadali punnaghatam subham utukkamaparam thupam thapayantu tahim-tahim. | 65 vattbehi ca dhajam katva bandhayantu tahim-tahim, maladamasamayutta sobhayantu imam puram. | khattiya brahmana vessa sudda annakulasu ca vattham abharanam puppham nanalamkarabhusita adaya dipan jalamanam gacchantu samghadassanam. | sabban ca talavacaram gandhabba nanakula sikkhita vajjantu vaggusavaniya sussara, gacchantu aggavaram sam- ghadassanam. | lamkarakamada c’ eva sotthiyanatanataka sabbe samgham upayantu hasayantu samagatam. | pupphan ca anekavidham punnakan ca anekadha vividham vannakah c’ eva karontu pujam anekarasiyo. | 70 nagarassa patiharam antare danam sabbam patiyantu patthitam. | pujam samadaya sabbam divasam ratthavasika rattin ca sabbam niyame asesato karontu samghadhikarassa arabhi. | tarn rattiya accayena bhattam sakanivesane panitarasasampannam pat.iyadetvana khattiyo | samacce saparivare anapesi mahayaso: 63. suciyagu susamkhata? — 64. vithiyam Z. vithiyo? — 65. utukkamaparam (°param ce F) XG1, upakkamma param ABG2, ussa- pitadhajam Z. — tupum Gl. — thapayantu N, pathayanta F, upayantu Gl, ussapentu ABG2, ussapetum Z. I prefer no to try any conjecture. — 67. “kulani BG2, 0 kulasu AZ, °kulesu XGl. aBuakulapi ca? — 68. va- dentu? — 69. lankarapamada ABG2. Comp. 21, 27. — 70. punnakam G 1 X, punnaghatam Z, cunnakam ABG2. — pufijarp? — 71. patiyantu N, °ntam FZ, °nta BGl, °tta AG2. — patthitam N, patthitam YF. — 72. samadaya N, °yi FG1M, °yi ARC, “yum BG2. — rattim ... arabhi tam is wanting in BG2Z. — niyame asesato F, niyumenasesato N, niyame aseto AG1. — samghadh 0 N, saipgha adh° AFG1. ... danam sabbam asesato patiyadentu patthitam. | pujam samadaya sabbam divasam ratthavasika rattin ca sabbam tiyamam karontu s am g h ab hi r a t a. | ?? 48 6 , 74 — 88 . gandhamalapupphakutam pupphachattadhajam bahum | diva dipan jalamanam abhiharantu mahajana. 75 yavata maya anatta tavata abhiharantu te. | imamki nagare sabbe negama ca catuddisa, sabbeva rajaparisa sayoggabalavahana sabbe mam anugacchantu bhikkhusamghassa dassanam. | mahata rajanubhavena niyasi rajakunjaro Sakko va Nandavanuyyanam evarn sobhi malnpati. | gatvana raja taramanarupo bhikkhusamghassa santike abhivadetvana sammodi vedajato katahjali. | arocayi bhikkhusamgham : mam’ attham anukampatu. yava bhikkhu anuppatte sabbe antonivesane, | samghassa pitaram theram pattam a, day a kbattiyo 80 pujamano bahupupphehi pavisi nagaram puram. | nivesanam pavesetva nisidapetvana asane yagum nanavidham khajjam bhojanan ca maharaham adasi payatapani yavadattham yadicchakam. | bhuttavi bhikkhusamghassa onitapattapanino ekamekassa bhikkhuno adasi yugasatakam. | padasambhafijanam telarn chattah capi upahanam sabbam samanaparikkharam adasi phanitam madhum. | parivaretvana nisidi Asokadhammo mahipati, nisajja raja pavaresi bhikkhusamghassa paccayam: | 85 yavata bhikkhu icchanti tava demi yadicchakam. | santappetva parikkharena sampavaretvana paccaye tato pucchimsu gambhiram dhammakkbandham sudesitam: atthi bhante paricchedo desit’ adiccabandhuna namam lingam vibhattin ca kotthasafi capi samkhatam ettakam ’va dhammakkbandham gananam atthi pavediya? atthi raja ganitvana desit’ adiccabandhuna suvibhattam supahnattam suniddittham sudesitam | 76. The words „ sabbeva rajaparisa" are wanting in the Sinhalese MSS. sabbe ca rajapurisa? — 77. N a n d an uyy an a m Z. — 78. The metre is correct if we expunge „raja“. — 79. The second hemistich seems to be out of its place here; we should insert it perhaps before v. 84. — yava bhikkhu anuppatta? — 83. padukam anjanam? Comp, the Apa- dana (Phayre MS., fol. he) : „paduke . . datva . . . osadham anjanam datva". — 84. pavaretvana? — 86. pucchi sugambhiram BCG2R. 6, 89 — 7 , 3. 49 sahetum atthasampannam khalitam n’ atthi subhasitam, satipatthanam sammappadhanam iddhipadan ca indriyam | balam bojjhangam maggangam suvibhattam sudesitam, evam sattappabhedan ca bodhipakkhiyam uttamam, | 90 lokuttaram dhammavaram navangam satthusasanam vittharitam suvibhattam desesi dipaduttamo; | caturasitisahassani dhammakkbandham anunakam pananam anukampaya desit’ adiccabandhuna. | amatuttamam varadhammam samsaraparimocanam sabbadukkhakkhayam maggam desesi amatosadham. | sutvana vacanam raja bhikkhusamghassa bhasitam pamojjahasabahulo devajato narasabho sarajikaparisaya imam vakyam udahari: | caturasitisahassani paripunnam anunakam desitam buddhasettbassa dhammakkhandham maharaham, | 95 caturasitisahassani aramam karayam’ aham ekekadhammakkhandhassa ekekaramam pujayam. | cliannavutikotidhanam vissajjetvana khattiyo tam eva divasam raja anapesi ca tavade. | tasmim samaye Jambudipe nagaraii caturasitiyo ekekanagaratthane paccekaramam karayi. | anto tini ca vassani viharam katvana khattiyo parinitthitamhi arame pujam sattaha karayi. | bbanavaran chattham. VII. Mahasamagamo hoti Jambudipasamantato, bhikkhu asiti kotiyo bbikkhuni channavuti sahassiyo, bhikkhu ca bhikkhuniyo ca chalabhinna bahutara. | bhikkhu iddhanubhavena samam katva mahitalam lokavivaranam katva dassesum pujiye mahe. | Asokarame thito raja Jambudipam avekkhati, bhikkhuiddhanubhavena Asoko sabbattha passati. ] 90. In Y the words „evam satt. ca“ are wanting. — 92. paninam? — 94. vedajato? — sarajikaya par 0 Z. — 97. ea tavade N, ca kovide ABG, mahajane Z. — 98. caturasiti sahassiyo? With regard to the metre comp. 7, 1. 4 50 7, 4—17. addasa vihararn sabbam sabbattha mahiyam katam dhajam ubhopiyam puppham toranan ca malaggliiyam j kadali punnaghatan c’ eva nanapupphasamohitam, 5 addasa dipamandalam vibhusan tarn catuddisam. | pamodito hatthamano pekkhanto vattate mahe samagate bhikkhusamghe bhikkhuni ca samagate | mahadanan ca pannattam diyamane vanibbake caturasitisahassani vihare disvana pujite | Asoko ’pi attamano bhikkhusamgham pavedayi: ahan ca bliante dayado satthu buddbassa sasane. | balm mayham pariccago sasane saravadino; | channavutikotiyo ca vissajjetva mahadhanam 10 caturasitisahassani arama karita maya | pujaya dhammakkbandhassa buddhasetthassa dosite; cattari satasahassani devasikam pavattayi, | ekan ca cetiyam pujam ekam Nigrodhasavhayain ekan ca dhammakathikanam ekam gilanapaccayam ; diyati devasikain niccam Mahaganga va odanam. | anno koci pariccago bhiyyo mayham na vijjati, saddlni mayham dajhatara, tasma dayado sasane. | sutvana vacanam raiino Asokadhammassa bhasitam pandito sutasampanno nipunatthavinicchayo | samghassa tesu vihararn anuggahatthaya sasanam 15 anagate ca addhane pavattim sutva vicakkhano j byakasi Moggaliputto Asokadhammapucchitam : paccayadayako nama sasane patibahiro, | yassa puttam va dhitaram va urasmin jatam anvayam pabbajesi cajetvana so ve dayado sasane. | VII, 4. sabbattha mahiya katam A, s° mahiyarn k" B, s° mahi[va]lam- gatam G (ya is crossed), s° mabilamkatam N, sabbatthapi mahitalam Z. — dbajam ussapitam? — 5. °samahitam A. — 6. ca samagata? — 9. saravadino ABG2, ravadino Gl, garav 0 Z, varav 0 N. garava dino (= dinno)? — 11. pavattayim. — 12. cetivapujam ABG2. — J 5. sam- ghassa thero suviharo A B G2, samghassa theram tasuviharam Gl, [samghassa] tesu [vihararn] N, samghassa tani vihararn Z. samghassa phasuviharam? As to the construction, comp. vv. 55. 57. — Instead of „sutva“ I should prefer „iiatva“, which looks very similar in Burmese characters. — 17. pabba- jeti Z. — dayadasasane N G 1 . — yo saputtam va ... pabbiijesi cajit- vana? As to the preterite tense „pabbajesi“, comp. Mahavamsa, p. 36, 1. 7, and the Thupavamsa: „ paccayadayako nama tvaqi maharaja, yo pana attano puttan ca dhitaraii ca pabbajesi ayam sasanassa dayado nama ’ti.“ 7, 18—33. 51 sutvana vacanam raja Asokadhammo mahipati Mahindakumaram puttam Samghamittafi ca dhitaram | ubho amantayi raja: dayado homi sasane. sutvana pituno vakyam ublio puttadhivasayum : | sutthu deva sampaticchama karoma vacanam tava, pabbajehi ca no khippam, dayado hohi sasane. | 20 paripunnavisativasso Mahindo Asokatrajo Samghamitta ca jatiya vassam attharasam bhave. | chavassamhi Asokassa ubho pabbajita paja, tath 1 eva upasampanno Mahindo dipajotako, | Samghamitta tada yeva sikkhayo ’va samadiyi. ahu Moggaliputto va theravado mahagani. | catupannasavassamlii Asokadhammo abhisitto, Asokassabhisittato chasatthi Moggalisavliayo, tato Mahindo pabbajito Moggaliputtassa santike. | pabbajesi Mahadevo, Majjhanto upasampade. ime te nayaka tini Mahindassanukampaka. | 25 Moggaliputto upajjhayo Mahindam dipajotakam vacesi pitakam sabbam attham dhammah ca kevalam. | Asokassa dasavassamhi Mahindo catuvassiko sabbam sutapariyattim ganipacariyo ahu. | sudesitam suvibhattam ubhosamgahasuttakam Mahindo theravadakam uggahetvana dharayi. | vinito Moggaliputto Mahindaxp Asokaatrajam tisso vijja chalabhiiina caturo patisambhida. | Tisso Moggaliputto ca Mahindam saddhiviharikam agamapitakam sabbam sikkhapesi nirantaram. | 30 tini vassamhi Nigrodho, catuvassamhi bhataro, chavassamhi pabbajito Mahindo Asokatrajo. | Kontiputta ubho thera Tisso capi Sumittako atthavassamhi ’sokassa parinibbimsu mahiddhika. | ime kumara pabbajita ubho thera ca nibbuta. | 20. paticchama Y. — 23. theravade B. — 24. Aso kab hi si tte chavasse satthi M° ? — 25. upasampado Z. — 27. sutapariyattim AG1, suttapariyattim Z, sutapariyatti B G2 N. — gaui 0 BG, gani 0 A, gani 0 CR, gani° M, ganhi N. gani acariyo? „pacariya“ does not mean „a pupil“, as Childers says, but „the teacher’s teacher 11 . — 28. chalabhiiina M2n; the other MSS. omit these words, chal abhinna. — catasso? — 32. Comp. Maliavamsa, p. 38. 4 * 52 7, 34 — 49. upasakattam desimsu khattiya brahmana bahu, mahalabho ca sakkaro uppajji buddhasasane, | pahinalabhasakkara titthiya puthuladdhika. 35 pandaranga jatila ca niganthacelakadika | atthamsu satta vassani, ahosi vagguposatho. ariya pesala lajji na pavisanti uposatham. | sampatte ca vassasate vassan cliattimsa satani ca satthi bhikkhusahassani Asokarame vasimsu to. | ajivaka annaladdhika nana dusenti sasanam, sabbe kasayavasana dusenti jinasasanam. | bliikkliusahassaparivuto chalabhinno inahiddliiko Moggaliputto ganaparaokkbo akasi dhammasamgabam. | Moggaliputto mahapanno paravadappamaddano 40 theravadam dalham katva samgaham tatiyam kato. | madditva nanavadani niharitva alajjino bahu sasanam jotayitvana kathavatthum pakasayi. | tassa Moggaliputtassa Mabindo saddhivihariko upajjhayassa sautike saddbammam pariyapuni. | nikaye panca vacesi satta c’ eva pakarane, ubbatovibbangam vinayam parivaran ca kbandbakam uggabi viro nipuno upajjhayassa santike ’ti. | Nikkbante dutiye vassasate vassani cbattimsati puna bhedo ajayatha tberavadanam uttamo. | Pataliputtanagaramhi rajjam ltaresi khattiyo 45 Dhammasoko maharaja pasanno buddhasasane. | mahadanam pavattesi samghe ganavaruttame, cattari satasahassani ekahen’ eva nissaji. | cetiyassa yaja ekam dhammassa savanassa ca gilananan ca paccayam ekam samghassa nissaji. | titthiya labham disvana sakkjirah ca maharaham satthi mattasahassani theyyasamvasaka ahu. | Asolairamaviharamhi patimokkho paricchiji, karapento patimokkham amacco ariyanam aghatayi. | 34. desayimsu Z. — 37. ca vassasate G1NZ, dve vassasate ABG2. — vassa N, vassam Y. — chattimsatani ABG2, ehattimsa satani G1NZ. — 43. dhiro N, viro Y. — 44. vassani ca cbattimsati? — 47. yaja ekam N, yajajakam Gl, ca ekam ABG2, ca ekassa Z. pujam ekam? — sava- nassa ca N, cassa ca Gl, ca tatheva ca AZ, ca tatbeva ka BG2. — 48. ahum N. — 49. paricchaji A, °ccaji BZ, 0 cchijji N, “cchiji Gl. 7, 50 — 8, 5. 53 titthiye niggahatthaya bahu buddhassa savaka satthimattasahassani jinaputta samagata. | 50 ekasmim sannipatamhi thero Moggaliatrajo satthukappo mahanago pathavya n’ atthi idiso. | ariyanam ghatitam kammam raja theram apucchatha, patihiram karitvana ranno kankham vinodayi. | therassa santike raja uggahetvana sasanam theyyasamvasabhikkhuno naseti lixiganasanam. | titthiya sakavadena pabbajitva anxxdara buddhavacanam bhindimsu visuddhakancanam iva. | sabbe pi te bhinnavada viloma theravadato, tesan ca niggahatthaya, sakavadavirocanam, | 55 desesi thero abhidhammam kathavatthuppakaranam. niggaho idiso n’ atthi paravadappamaddanam. | desetva thero abhidhammam kathavatthuppakaranam sakavadasodhanatthaya, sasanam dighakalikam, | arahantanam sahassam uccinitvana nayako varam varani gahetvana akasi dhammasamgaham. | Asokaramaviharamhi Dhammar.ajena karite navamasehi nitthasi tatiyo samgaho ayan ti. | saddhammasamgaham navamasam nitthitam. bhanavaram sattamam. VIII. Moggaliputto dighadassi sasanassa anagate paccantamhi patitthanam disva dibbena cakkbuna | Majjhantikadayo there pahesi attapancame: sasanassa patitthaya paccante sattabuddhiya | paccantakanam desanam anukampaya paninam pabhatuka balappatta desetha dhammam uttamam. | gantva Gandharavisayam Majjhantiko maha isi kupitam nagam pasadetva mocesi bandhana bahu. | gantvana rattham Mahisam Mahadevo mahiddhiko coditva nirayadukkhena mocesi bandhana bahu. | 5 51. etasmim ABG2. — 53. “bhikkhunam G2, °b hi kkh unam B. — nasesi ABG2. — 54. “kancanam riva N, °kancanam iva Y. VIII, 3. pabhataka N. sabhatuka? (comp. 15, 18). — 4. bahum AB. bahu? — 5. codetva? — baliuip ABG2. bahu? 54 8 , 6 — 9 , 5 . atbaparo pi Rakkhito vikubbanesu kovido vehasam abbhuggantvana desesi anamataggiyam. | Yonakadhamraarakkhitathero narna mahamati aggikkhandhopamasuttakathaya Aparantakam pasadayi. | Mahadhammarakkhitathero Maharattham pasadayi Naradakassapajatakakathaya ca mahiddhiko. | Maharakkhitathero pi Yonakalokam pasadayi kalakaramasuttantakathaya ca mahiddhiko. | Kassapagotto ca yo thero Majjhimo Durabhisaro io Sahadevo Mulakadevo Himavante yakkhaganam pasadayum, ! katliesum tattha suttantam dhammacakkappavattanam. | Suvannabhumim gantvana Sonuttara mahiddhiku niddhametva pisacagane mocesi bandhana balm, j Lankadipavaram gantva Mahindo attapahcamo sasanam thavaram katva mocesi bandhana balm. | bhanavaram atthamam. IX. Laiikadipo ayam ahu sihena Sihala iti. dipuppattim imam vamsam sunatha vacanam mama. Vangarajassayam dhita aranne vanagocaram sihasamvasam anvaya bhataro janayi duve. | Sihaba.hu ca Sivali kumara carudassana mata ca Susima nama pita ca Sihasavhayo. | atikkante solasavasse nikkhamitva guhantara mapesi nagaram tattha Sihapuram varuttamam. | Lalaratthe tahim raja Sihaputto maliabbalo 5 anusasi maharajjam Sihapuravaruttame. j 6. The country which was converted by Rakkhita, is not named; and even in a work so full of the greatest blunders, as the Dipavamsa, we should scarcely be justified in changing „athaparo“ into „Vanavase“. I rather conjecture: atha thero pi R°. — 10. Dundubhissaro ABG2, Durabhisaro Gl, Durabhiyaparo N, durasado Z. The Mahav. Tika has Dundhabhinna- ssarathero; the Sam. Pasadika, Dundubhissara (Paris MS.) and Duddabhiya (MS. of the British Museum) ; the Inscription given by Cunningham (the Bhilsa Topes, p. 310), Dadabhisara. — 12. mocesum A2. — 12. 13. bahuV IX, 1. Sihalam ABG2, Sihala GlZn. — dipuppattim N, dipuppatti Y, which may be the correct reading; comp, the note on „dhatu“ 1,1. — 2. siham s° N, which possibly is correct. — 4. raliantare Y, guhantara N. A, °omukka° BG2, °omuta° G1Z. 12 , 33—45. 65 avijjandhakaram bhinditva alokam dassayissami, jotayissarni kevalam Tambapannim jinasasanan ti. evam ussahito ca pana vasavindena devarajena evamvaeasimkena utthaya patisallana viriyaparamippatto apalokayi bhikkhusam- ghan ti. | gacchama mayam Tambapannim, nipuna Tambapannika, sabbadukkhakkhayam maggam na sunanti subhasitam. tesam santappayissama gacchama dipalanjakan ti. | Vedissagiriye ramme vasitva timsa rattiyo: kalan ca gamanam dani, gacchama dipam uttamam. | 35 palina Jambudipato hamsaraja va ambare, evam uppatita thera nipatimsu naguttame. | purato purasetthassa pabbate meghasannibhe patitthahimsu Missakakutamlii hamsa va nagamuddhani. | Mahindo nama namena samghatthero tada ahu, Itthiyo Uttiyo thero Bhaddasalo ca Sambalo | samanero ca Sumano Bhandnko ca upasako, sabbe mahiddhika ete Tambapannipasadaka. | tattha uppatito thero hamsaraja va ambare purato purasetthassa pabbate meghasannibhe | 40 patitthito Missakakutamlii hamsa va nagamuddhani. tasmin ca samaye raja Tambapannimhi issaro | Devanatnpiyatisso so Mutasivassa atrajo. Asoko abhisitto ca vassam atthixrasam ahu, | Tissassa ca abhisitte sattamase anunake Mahindo dvadasavasso Jambudipa idhagato. | gimhane pacchime mase jetthamase uposathe anuradha- jetthanakkhatte Mahindo ganapamokkho Missakagirim agato. | migavarn nikkhami raja, Missakagirim upagami. devo gokannarupena rajanam abhidassayi. | 45 33. jotayissarni is wanting in Y. — alokam dassayissami kevalam Tambapannim, jotayissarni jinasasanan t i ? — 0 vacayitena A, 0 vaca- yimtena BG2. evamvacakena? — 34. tesam p a k asay issam a? (comp, v. 24.) — 35. Cetiyagiviye AZ, Cetiye g° BG, Vedissagirh'e N. — Samantap.: kalo ca gamanassa ’ti. I believe that we ought to adopt this reading in the Dipavamsa also. — 36. patita AG2, patina B, patina G1 , palina N, Samantap.; idam vatva mahaviro uggamchi Z. palina? — 40. uppatita thera? — 41. patittliita? — 44. gimhanam GN, °na B, °ne AZ. — “girim agato ABG2, “girim uggato N, °giripabbato Gl, °giripabbate Z. 5 66 12, 46 — 59 . disvana raja gokannam tararupo ’va pakkami, pitthito anugacchanto pavisi pabbatantaram. | tatth’ eva antaradhayi yakkho therassa sammukha, nisinnam tlieram adakkbi, bhito raja ahu tada. | mamam yeva passatu raja eko ekam, na bhayati, samagate balakaye atho passatu bhikkhunam. | tatth’ addasam khattiyabhumipalam paduttharupam miga- van carantam, namena tam alapi khattiyassa: agaccha Tissa ’ti tada avoca. j ko ’yam kasavavasano mundo samghatiparuto 50 eko adutiyo vacam bliasati mam amanusim? | samano ’ti mam manussalokeyam khattiya pucchasi bhumi- pala. samana mayam maharaja dhammarajassa savaka tam eva anukampaya Jambudipa idhagata. | avudham nikkhipitvana ekamantam upavisi, nisajja raja sammodi bahum atthupasamhitam. | sutva therassa vacanam nikkhipitvana avudham tato therani upagantva sammoditva ca pavisi. | amaccabalakayo ca anupubbam sainagata parivaretvana atthamsu catt:\risa sahassiyo. | disva nisinnatheranam balakaye samagate: 55 anne atthi bahu bhikkhu sammasambuddhasavaka? | tevijja iddhipatta ca cetopariyakovida khinasava arahanto bahu buddhassa savaka. | ambopamena janitva pandit’ ayam arindamo desesi tattha suttantam hatthipadam anuttaram. | sutvana tam dhammavaram saddhajato va buddhima cattarisasahassani saranam te upagamum. | tato attamano raja tutthahattho pamodito amantayi bhikkhusamgham: gacchama nagaram puram. | 46. tararupo N, tadarupo Gl, tatbarupo Y. — 49. addasa A. — du- tthar 0 ABG, padutthar 0 Zn. — 51. The first line (samano — bhumipala) is given in AGIN only, the second (samana — savaka) in ABG2Z; in A in which both lines are given manu prima, the first is included in brackets. 1 believe, that both are written by the author of the Dipavamsa; see the Introduction, p. 6. — °lokiyam? — pucchasi N, passasi A, pacchasi Gl. — 53. sammoditvana Y, °tva ca N. — c’ upavisi! — 59. 60. Probably we ought to transpose these two verses. 12, 60 — 74. 67 Devtinavhayarajanam subbatam sabalavahanam panditam buddhisampannam khippam eva pasadayi. | go sutvana ranno vacanam Mahindo etad abravi: gacchasi tvam maharaja, vasissama mayam idba. | uyyojctvana rajanam Mahindo dipajotako amantayi bhikkhusamgham : pabbajessama Bhandukain. | therassa vacanam sutva sabbe turitamanasa gamasimam vicinitva pabbajetvana Bhandukam, upasampadan ca tatth’ eva arahattan ca papuni. | girimuddhani thito thero sarathim ajjhabhasatha: alam yanam na kappati patikkhittam tathagatam. | nyyojetvana sarathim thero vasi mahiddhiko gagane hamsaraja va pakkamimsn vehayasa, orohetvana gagana pathaviyam patitthita. | 65 nivasanam nivasente parupite ca civaram disvana sarathi tuttho rajanan ca pavedayi. | pesetva sarathim raja amacce ajjhabhasatha: mandapam patiyadetha antonivesane pure. | kumara kumariyo ca itthagaran ca deviyo dassanam abhikankhanta there passantu agate. | sutvana ranno vacanam amacca kulajatika antonivesanamajjhe akamsu dussamandapam. | vitanan chaditam vattham suddham setam sunimmalam dhajasankhaparivaram setavatthehi ’lamkatam, | 70 vikinnavaluka seta setapupphasusanthata alamkatamandapa seta himagabbhasamupama. | sabbasetehi vatthehi alamkaretvana maiidapani abbhantaram samam katva rajanam pativedayum: | parinitthitam maharaja mandapam sukatam subham, asanam deva janahi pabbajitanulomikam. | tamkhane sarathi ranno anuppatto paveditum: 60. DevaDavhayarajanam (°vharaj° M) Y, Devanampiyarajanam N. — 61. gacchahi? — 64. tathagate? With regard to the grammatical con- struction comp. 14, '22. 62. — 65. thera v° mahiddhika? — arohitvana Z, arohetvana ABG, orohetvana N. orohitvana? — 66. [parupijte N, parupitam Z, °pitam A, pharupitau B, pharupitau G. parupante? — 69. kulapubbaja Gl, kulapabbaja N. — antonivesane majjhe Y. — 71. alam- katamandapa seems to be corrupted; only one mandapa was constructed (see also Mahavamsa, p. 82, 1. 2). “mandapam setam “mam? — 72. abhutta- ram N, abbhuntara Gl. — 74. pavedayi (“yi A, yim B) ABG2. 5* 12, 74 — 86 . 68 yanam deva na kappati bhikkhusamghassa nisiditum. | ayam acchariyam deva sabbe thera mahiddhika 75 pathamam main uyyojetva, paccha hutva pur' agata. | uccasayanamahasayanam bhikkhunam na ca kappati, bhummattharanah janatha te thera agacchanti. | sarathissa vaco sutva rajapi tutthamanaso paccuggantvana theranam abhivadetva sammodayi. | pattam gahetva theranam salia therein khattiyo pujento gandhamalehi rajadvaram upagami. | ranno antopuram thero pavisetvana mandapam addasa santhatam bhumim asanam dussavaritam. | nisidimsu yathapannatte asane dussavarite, 80 nisinne udakam datva yagum datvana khajjakam | panitam bhojanam ranno sahattha sampavarayi. bhuttavibhojanam theram onitapattapaninam | amantayi Anuladevim salia antoghare jane: okasan janatha devi, k:'do te payirupasitum. | theranam abhivadetva pujetva yavadicchakani Anula nama mabesi kannapancasatavata | upasamkamitva theranam abhivadetva upavisi. tesam dhammam adesesi petavatthum bhayanakam | vimanam saccasamyuttam pakasesi mahagani. 85 sutvana tarn dhammavaram saddhajata vibuddhima | Anula mabesi sahakannapancasata tada sotapattiphale ’tthamsu, pathamablusamayo ahu. | bhanavaram dvadasamam. 74. °samghena N, °samghe Gl. — 75. aho acchariyam? — 76. aga- cchanti Y (agaccliante Gl), agacchante N. — 79. pavisitvana! — asanc dussacaruke ABG2, asanam (asana Gl) dussavaritam GIN, asanam dussa- lamkatam Z. as 0 dussa cch adi tarn? — 80. yathabuddliam santhate dussa- pithake A, yathapauuatte asane dussavarite (dussavirite Gl , dussasanthate BG2, dussapasarite Z) BGNZ. dussaccliadite? — 81. raja sahattlia? vv. 81. 82 give a fair specimen of the grammatical incorrectness which pre- vails through the whole Dipavamsa. I do not think that we ought to make any corrections, or that anything is wanting. The passage of the ancient Sinhalese Atthakatha of which this is a metrical paraphrase, has been ren- dered thus in the Samantap. : „raja there panitena khadaniyena bhojaniyena sahattha santappetva sampavaretva Annladevipamukhani panca itthisatani theranam abhivadanam pujasakkaran ca karontu ’ti pakkosapetva ekamantain nisidi." — 83. This stanza is wanting in B G2. — “vata AG1, ca ta Zn. — 84. tasam? — 85. vibuddhima N, bhibuddhima Y. saddhajato va bu- ddliima (comp. v. 58)? 13 , 1 — 14 . 69 XIII. Aditthapubba gana sabbe janakaya samagata rajanivesanadvare mahasadd’ anusavayum. | sutva raja mahasaddam upayuttamakampuram : kimatthaya puthu sabbe mahasena samagata? | ayarn deva mahasena samghadassanam agata, dassanam alabhamana mahasaddam akamsu te. | antepuram susambadham janakaya patitthitum, hatthisalam asambadbam, theram passantu te jana. | bhuttavi anumodetva utthahitvana asana rajaghara nikkhamitva hatthisalam upagami. | 5 hatthisalamhi pallankam pannapesum maharaham, nisidi pallankavare Mahindo dipajotako. | nisinna pallailkavare Mahindo ganapumgavo kathesi tattha suttantam devadutam varuttamam. | sutvana devadutan tam pubbakammam sudarunam bhita samvegam apadum nirayabhayatajjita. | natva bhayattite satte catusaccam pakasayi. pariyosane sahassanam dutiyabhisamayo ahu. [ hatthisalamha nikkhamma mahajanapurakkhato tosayanto bahh satte buddho llajagahe yatha. | 10 nagaramha dakkhinadvare nikkhamitva mahajana Mahanandavanam nama uyyanam dakkhina pure, \ rajuyyanamhi pallankam pannapesutn maharaham, tattha thero nisiditva kathesi dhammam uttamam. | kathesi tattha suttantam balapanditam uttamam, tattha panasahassanam dhammabhisamayo ahu. | mahasamagamo asi uyyane Nandane tada, kulagharani kumari ca kulasunha kulaputtiyo | XIII, 1. gana N, vana G2, te Y. — 2. upasamkarama tepitara A, upa- saipkamma tam janam Z, upasamkamma karitam B, upayamkamma karitam G2, upavuttam akampuram N, upayuttanakam mayam Gl. I refrain from offering any conjecture. — 7. nisinno AB. — 8. bhita samvegam apa- dum N, bhita samtemaparum Gl , bliitim satta (satte Z) papunimsu Y. — 10. “salaya Y, °salama Gl , °salamha N. — 11. dakkhinadvaro A1 , °ra A2BG2, °re GIZn. dakkhinadvara? comp. 14, 11. 55. — Mahananda- vanam BGN, 0 n a n d an a vanam AZ. — dakkhina pure N, dakkhine pure ABG2, dakkhiuam puram GlZ. dakkhina (°naip?) pura? 70 13, 15—29. samgharita tada hutva theram dassanam agata. 15 tehi saddhim sammodento sayanhasamayo ahu. | idh’ eva thera vasantu uyyane Mahanandane, atisayam gamiyanta ito dure giribbaje. | accasannan ca gamantam vippakinnamahajanam, rattim saddo maha hoti, Sakkasalupamam imam patisallanasaruppam alam gacchama pabbatam. | Mahameghavanam nama uyyanam vivittam mama gamaniigamanasampannajn natidure na santike, | atthikanam manussanam abhikkamanasukhagamam, appakinnam diva saddena, rattim saddo na jayati, | patisallanasaruppam pabbajitanulomikam 20 dassanachayasampannam pupphaphaladharam subham | vatiya suparikkhittam dvarattalasugopitam, rajadvaram suvibhattam uyyane me manorame, | suvibhatta pokkharani samchannam padumuppalam situdakam supatittham sadupupphabhigandhiyam. | evam rammam mam’ uyyanam sahasamghassa phasukam, avasatu tahim thero, mam’ attham anukampatu. | sutvana ranno vacanam Mabindo thero sahaof£ano amaccasamghaparibbujho agama Meghavanam tadii. | ayacito narindena Mahindathero mahagani Mahameghavanuyyanam pavisi yuttajatikam, 25 uyyane rajavatthumhi avasi thero mahagani. | dutiye puna divase raja theran' upiigami abhivadetva sirasa raja theranam abravi: | kacci te sukham sayittha, phasuvaso tuyham idha? vivittam utusampannam manussarahaseyyakani | patisallanasaruppam sappayan ca senasanam. tato attamano raja hattho samviggamanaso | anjalim paggahetvana idam vacanam abravi, sovannabhinkaram gahetva onojesi mahipati: | 15. samgharita N, samghariva (°riva M) Y. samghatita? — tahi saddhim sammodente? — 16. gamiyanta BG, gamavanta A, gamiyanta Zn. Samantap. : „akalo bhante idani tattha ganturn." I conjecture „aga- maniyam — 19. appakinnam B G. — 22. sadupupphabhigandhiyam N, sadusuppagandhiyam Gl , sadhu- (sadhuka- Z) suppagandhivam Y. sadu- p up ph ab h igand hi tam? — 23. avasatu N, asevatu BGZ, asavetu A. — 25. yuttajatikam (suttaj" Gl) Y, suddhajatikam N. — 26. kacci vo? — 29. We ought to transpose the two hemistichs. 13, 30—45. 71 im aharp bhante uyyanam Mahtimeghavanam subham catuddisassa samghassa dadami, patiganhatha. | narindavacanam sutva Mahindo dipajotako patiggahesi uyyanam samgharamassa karana. | dadantam patiganhantassa Mahameghavanam tada kampittba pathavi tattha nanagajjitakampanam. | patitthapesi samghassa narindo Tissasavhayo, Mahameghavanuyyanam Tissaramam akamsu tarn. | patitthapesi samghassa pathamam Devanampiyo Mahameghavanam nama aramam sasanaraham. | tatthapi pathavi kampi abbhutam lomahamsanam. lomahattha jana sabbe there pucchittha sarajika. | imam pathamam viharam Lankadipe varuttame, sasanaruhanataya pathamam pathavikampanam. | disva acchariyam sabbe abbhutam lomahamsanam celukkhepam pavattimsu, n’ attbi idisakam pure. | tato attamano raja, vedajato katanjali upanamesi bahum puppham Mahindam dipajotakam. | puppham thero gahetvcina ekokase pamuncayi, tatthapi pathavi kampi dutiyam pathavikampanam. | idam pi acchariyam disva rajasena saratthaka ukkutthisaddam pavattimsu dutiyam pathavikampanam. | bhiyyo cittam pasadetva rajapi tutthamanaso: mama kankham vitarehi dutiyam pathavikampanam. | samghakammam karissanti akuppam sasanaraham, idh’ okase maharaja malakan tarn bhavissati. | bhiyyo attamano raja puppham theram abhihari, thero puppham gahetvana aparoktise pamuncayi. tatthapi pathavi kampi tatiyam pathavikampanam. | kimatthaya mahavira tatiyam pathavikampanam? sabbe kankha viharehi akkhahi kusalo tuvam. | jantagharapokkharani idh’ okase bhavissati, bhikkhu jantagharam ettha paripurissanti sabbada. | 32. patiganhante (pat 0 A) ABG2. — 36. sasanaruhanataya N, sasanar 0 AG, sasanaruhataya B, sasanaruhanataya Z. sasanassarulhataya? — 40. pi is wanting in Y. — 41. viharehi ABG, vinodehi Z. — 44. AZ omit sabbe - tuvam. — vitarehi? — 45. paripurissanti N, paripurivavanti ABG, paripurayanti Z. 30 35 40 45 72 13, 46 — 59. ularam pitipamojjam janetva Devanampiyo upanamesi therassa jatipuppham suphullitam, | thero ca puppham adaya aparokase pamuncayi, tatthapi pathavi kampi catuttham pathavikampanam. | idam acchariyarn disva mahajana samagata anjalim paggahetvana namassanti mahiddhikam. | tato attamano raja tuttho pucchi anantaram: kimatthaya mahavira catuttham pathavikampanam? | Sakyaputto mahaviro assatthadumasantike sabbadhammam patibujjhi buddho asi anuttaro, 50 so dumo idham okase patitthissam diputtame. | sutva attamano raja tuttho samviggamanaso upanamesi therassa jatipuppham varuttamam. | thero ca puppham adaya bhutnibhage pamuncayi, tatthapi pathavi kampi pahcamam pathavikampanam. | tarn pi acchariyarn disva rajasena saratthaka ukkutthisaddam pavattimsu, celukkhepam pavattitha. | kimatthaya mahapanha pancamam pathavikampanam? etam attham pavakkhahi tava chandavasanugii. | anvaddhamasain pfitimokkham uddisissanti te tada, 55 uposathagharam nama idh' okase bhavissati. | aparam pi ca okase theram pupphavaram ada, thero ca puppham adaya tamokase pamuncayi. tatthapi pathavi kampi chattham pathavikampanam. | idam pi acchariyarn disva mahajana samagata annamannam pamodanti viharo hissati idha. | bhiyyo cittam pasadetva raja theranam abravi: kimatthaya mahapanna chattham pathavikampanam? | yavata samghika labham bhikkhusamgha samagata idh’ okase maharaja labhissanti anagate. | 50. patibujjhi N, paticchi Gl, pativijjhi Y. — idham okase patittbi- ssanti (“ssamti G2) uttamo ABG2, i° o° patittliissam diputtame GIN, idha hessati Z. i° o° p atit thissa ti diputtame (comp. Mah., p. 86, 1. 11)? — 53. rajasena! — °ukkhepe pavattitha ABG, [“ukkhepam pavajttitha N, "ukkhepa ("pam M) pavattayum Z. — 54. etam attham mam’ akkliahi? — “anugam ABG2, “anuga GIZn. — 57. aiifiamaune kamkhanti vihare- hirajeti idha ABG2, annamafiuam pamodanti viharo hissati (hirannati Gl) idha GIN; in Z the hemistich is wanting, annamannam pamodenti viharo hessati idha? — 59. labha? 13, 60 — 14, 10. 73 sutva therassa vacanam rajapi tutthamanaso upanamesi therassa raja puppham varuttamam, | 60 thero ca puppham adaya aparokase pamuncayi, tatthapi pathavi kampi sattamam pathavikampanam. | disva acchariyam sabbe rajasena saratthaka celukkhepam pavattimsu kampite dharanitale. | kimatthaya mahapanna sattamam pathavikampanam? byakarohi mahapanna, ganam kankha vitaratha. | yavata imasmim vihare avasanti supesala bhattaggam bhojanasalam idh’ okase bhavissati. | bhanavaram terasamam. XIV. Therassa vacanam sutva raja bhiyyo pasidati, aladdha campakam puppham therassa abhiharayi. | thero campakapupphani pamuncittha mahitale, tatthapi pathavi kampi atthamam pathavikampanam. | imam acchariyam disva rajasena saratthaka ukkutthisaddam pavattiinsu, celukkhepam pavattitha. | kimatthaya mahtivira atthamam pathavikampanam? byakarohi mahapanna, sunoma tava bhasato. | tathagatassa dhatuyo attha dona saririka, ekam donam maharaja aharitva mahiddhika | 5 idh’ okase niharitva thuparn kahanti sobhanam samvegajananatthanam bahujanapasadanam. | samagata jana sabbe rajasena saratthaka ukkutthisaddam pavattimsu mahapathavikampane. | Tissarame vasitvana vitivattaya rattiya nivasanam nivasetva parupetvana civaram | tato pattam gahetvana pavisi nagaram puram. pindacaram caramano rajadvaram upagami. | psivisi nivesanam ranno, nisiditvana asane 63. gaui B6, gani A, ganam N, jana 0 Z. — viharatha ABG, vita- ratha N, vinodatha Z. XIV, 3. In Y the second hemistich runs thus: celukkhepe pavattittha aggaramo bhavissati. — 6. niharitva B G, niharitva N, nidahitva AZ. — karenti Y. — vv. 7. 8 are wanting in Y. — 8. parupitvana? 74 14, 10 — 24. 10 bhojanam tattha bhunjitva pattam dhovitvana panina | bhuttavi anumodetva nikkhamitva nivesana nagaramha dakkhinadvara uyyane Nandane tada | kathesi tattha suttantam aggikkhandham varuttamarn. tattha panasahassanam dhammabbisamayo ahu. | desayitvana saddhammarp uddhantvana paninain utthaya asana thero Tissarame punavasi. | tattha rattim vasitvana vitivattaya rattiya nivasanam nivasetva parupitvana civaram | tato pattam gahetvana pavisi nagaram puram. 15 pindacaram caramano rajadvaram upagami. | pavisi nivesanam ranno, nisiditvana asane bhojanam tattha bhunjitva pattam dhovitvana panina | bhuttavi anumoditva nikkhami nagara pura. divaviharam karitva Nandanuyyanamuttame | kathesi tattha suttantam asivisupamam su’oham. pariyosane sahassanam pancamabhisamayo ahu. | desayitvana saddhammam bodhayitvana paninam asana vutthahitvana Tissaramam upagami. | bhiyyo raja pasanno ’si atthamam pathavikampane. 20 hattho udaggo sumano raja theranam abravi: | patitthito viharo ca samgharamam maharaham abhinnapadakam bhante mahapathavikampane. | na kho raja ettavata samgharamo patitthito. simasammannanam nama anunnatam tathagato. | samanasamvasakasimam avippavasam ticivaram atthahi simanimittehi kittayitva samantato | kammavacaya saventi samgha sabbe samagata, evam baddhani siinani ekavaso ’ti vuccati; viharam thavaram hoti aramo suppatitthito. | 17. anumodetva! — karitva N, katvana T. — 18. saccabbisamavo N. — 20. atthamam AGl, pathamam N, atthame BZ. atthahi path 0 ? atthapath 0 ? — 21. abhinnapadaka , as is seen from several passages of the Samantap. , is an epithet of the fourth jhana which an Arahat enters upon when desiring to produce a miracle, for instance an earth -quake. — 22. kho N, vo AGl, ve BG2Z. — anunnatam AGIN, afihatam Z, anu- iiiiato B, anuniiata G2. — tathagate Gl. See 12, 64. — - 24. kammava- caip A. kammavacayo? — Between v. 24 and 25 Z inserts the following words : idam vutte ca therena rajapi etad abravi. 14 , 25 — 35 . 75 mama putta ca dara ca samacca saparijjana sabbe upasaka tuyham panena saranam gata. | 25 yacami tarn mahavira, karohi vacanam mama, antosimamhi okase avasantu mahajana; | mettakarunaparetaya sadarakkho bhavissati. pariccagan ca janeti raja tuyham yadicchakam, | samgho katapariccago si mam sammannayissati. Mahapadumo Kunjaro ca ubho naga sumangala | sovannanaiigale yutta pathamani Kotthamalake, caturangini mahasena saha therehi khattiyo | suvannanangalasitam dassayanto arindamo, samalamkatam punnaghatam nanaragam dhajam subham | 30 nanapupphadhajakinnam toranan ca mahalamghiya, bahucandijalamala, suvannanangale kasi. | mahajanapasadaya saha therehi khattiyo nagaram padakkhinam katva naditiram upagami. | mahasimapariccaga sita suvannanangale yam yam pathaviyam yattha agama Kotthamalakam. | simam simena ghatite mahajanasamagame akampi pathavi tattha pathamam pathavikampanam. | disva acchariyam sabbe rajasena saratthaka annamannain painodimsu: simaramo bhavissati. | 35 27. °pareta Z. m e 1 1 a k aru na p ari 1 1 ay a ? - — • sadarakkho AGIN, °kkha BG2Z. — janesi C. — raja ABG2R2, raja G] Zn. — Maliinda asks the king to point out what direction the boundary line should take (see Mahavarnsa, p. 98, 1. 5). This does not imply an act of liberality (pari- ccaga) on the part of the king, for the ground included by the boundary line does not become locus scicer. Now we see that the MSS. have con- founded at vv. 33. 36 the words „pariccaga“ and „pariccheda“. I therefore believe that a similar confusion has taken place here also, and I propose to read: paricchedan ca j ana hi raja tuyham yadicchakam, samgho kate paricchede .. — 29. caturanginimahaseno? (see Mahav., p. 99, 11. 1. 2.) — 30. samalamkatam N, sumalamgha Gl, sumalagghi (°ggi MR) Y. — 31. mahalamghiya BGZn, mahagghiyam A. malagghiyam? — bahu- candijalamala BGZn, bahum ca dipamalasu A. bahum ca dipam jala- manam (comp. 6, 75)? — 32. mahajanam pasidaya N, mahajana pasadiya Gl, mahajanapasadaya Z. — 33. mahasimaparitoga ABG2, "pariccheda Z, “pariccago N, °pariccaga Gl. — sitam N, sita Gl. I propose to correct this stanza thus: mahasimaparicchedam sitam suvannanangale kasam pathaviyam tattha agama Kotthamalakam. — 34. simam simena (“me Gl) GIN, simaya simam Y. — mahajane (°nam Gl, °na Z) samagate Y, [mahajanasamagajmo N. 76 14, 36—51. yavata, simaparicchede nimittam bandhimsu malake pativedesi theranam Devanampiyaissaro. [ katva kattabbakiccani simassa malakassa ca viharam thavaratthaya bhikkhusamghassa phasukam | mainafi ca anukampaya thero simani bandhatu. sutvana ranno vacanam Mahindo dipajotako | amantayi bhikkhusamgham : simam bandhama bhikkbavo. nakkkatte uttarasalhe sabbe samgha saniagata, | patitthapetva malakam samanasamvasakam nama simairi ban- dhittha cakkhuma. 40 viharam thavaram katva Tissaramam varuttamam | Tissarame vasitva vitivattaya rattiya nivasanam nivasetva parupitvana civaram | tato pattam gahetvana pavisi nagaram puram. pindacaram caramano rajadvaram upagami. ) pavisitva nivesanam ranno nisiditvana asane bhojanam tattha bhunjitva pattam dhovitvana panina | bhuttavi anumoditva nikkhami nagara pura. divaviharam karitvana nyyane Nandane vane | kathesi tattha suttantam asivishpamam tada, 45 anamataggiyasuttam ca cariyapitakam anuttaram | gomayapindaovadam dhammacakkappavattanam Mahanandanamhi tatth' eva pakasesi punappunam. | imina ca snttantena sattahani pakasayi attha ca samghasahassani panca janghasatani ca | mocesi bandhana thero Mahindo dipajotako. unamasam vasitvana Tissarame sahaggano | asalhiya punnamase upakatthe ca vassake iimantayi nagare sabbe: vassakalo bhavissati. | Mahaviharapatiggalianam nitthitam. Senasanam samsametva Mahindo dipajotako 50 pattacivaram adaya Tissaramamha nikkhami. | nivasanam nivasetva parupitvana civaram 36. simapariccago GIN. — 37. simassa GIN, simaya Y. — 41. vasi- tva N, vasetva Gl, vasayitva ABG2Z. vasitvana? — 44. anumodetva BG. — 47. imani ca suttantani? — attha jamghas 0 N. — panca sam- ghasatani ca A. 14 , 51 — 65 . 77 tato pattam gahetvana pavisi nagaram puram. | pindacaram caramano rajadvaram upagami, ptivisi nivesanam ranno, nisidimsu yathasane. | bbojanam tattha bhunjitva pattam dhovitvana panina mahasainayasuttantam ovadatthaya desayi. | ovaditvana rajanam Mahindo dipajotako asana vutthahitvana anapuccha apakkami. | nagaramha pacinadvara nikkhamitva mahagani nivattetva jane sabbe agama yena pabbatam. | 55 rajanam pativedesnm amacca ubbiggamanasa : sabbe deva mabathera gata Missakapabbatam. | sntvana rajix ubbiggo sigbam yojetvana sandanam abhirubitva ratbam kbippani saba devibi kbattiyo. | gantvana pabbatapadam Mabindathero sabaggano, Nagaracatnkkam narna rahadani selanimmitam, tattha nabatva pivitvana thito pasanamuddhani. | sigbam vegena sediini nippabetvana kliattiyo durato addasa tberam pabbatamuddhani tbitam. | deviyo ca rathe thatva ratha ornyha kbattiyo upasamkamitva theranam vanditva idam abravi: | GO rammam rattbam jahetvana raaman c’ ohaya paiiino kimatthaya mahavira imam agami pabbatam? | idha vassam vasissama tini masatn anunakam purimam paccbimakam nama anunnatam tathagate. | karomi sabbakiccani bbikkbusamghassa phasukam, anukampam upadaya mam’ attbam anusasatn. | gamantam va arannam va bhikkhuvassfipanayiko senasane samvutadvare vasam buddhena anumatam. | anunnatam etam vacanam attbam sabbam sahetukam, 54. anapuccha ’va pakkami A. — 57. yojetva Y. — abhiruhi? — 5 8 b is wanting in B G2. — Nangacatakkam A, Nagaram catukkam 0.1 Rl, Nagaram catukkam G1MN. N agac a tukk am ? comp. Mahay., p. 103, 1. 2. — selanippitam AGl. s el an iss i ta m? — 59. pantitvana A, nanipatitvana BG2, nippahitvana Z, nibbahetvana N, nipphamhitvana Gl. nibbatte- tvana? — 60. The words „deviyo ca rathe thatva 11 are wanting in ABG2. — kovediye GlZ, deviyo N. — rathe thapetva? — • 61. jahitvana? — agami? — 62. tathagata A, 0 to B G2, °te GlZn. See 12,64. — 64. °na- viko GZn, °ka B, °ka A. bh i k k hit v assu p a n ay i k am (adj. construed with vasam)? — anumatam CRG1, anumatam Mn, anunnatam ABG2. — 65. anunnatam Zn, annatam ABG. Comp. 15, 5. 78 14 , 65 — 78 . 65 ajj’ evaham karissami avasam vasaphasukam. | gahatthasiddhim sodhetva oloketva mahayaso theranam patipadesi : vasantu anukampaka. | sadhu bhante imam lenam aramam patipajjatu, viharam thavaratthaya simam bandha mahamuni. | rafifio bhaginiya putto Maharittho ’ti vissuto paficapafifiasa kliatteca kulejata mahayasa | upasamkamitva rajanam abhivadetva idam abravum: sabbeva pabbajissama varapafifiassa santike, | brahmacariyafi carissama, tarn devo anumafifiatu. 70 sabbesam vacanam sutva rajapi tutthamanaso | theranam upasamkamma arocesi mahipati: Mahaaritthapamukha paficapannasa nayaka, pabbajehi anufifiatam mahavira tav’ antike. | sutvana rafifio vacanam Mahindo dipajotako amantayi bhikkhusamghani : si mam bandhama bhikkhavo. samanasamvasaka c’ eva avippavasa ticivaram viharam thavaratthaya simam bandhasimapana. | simam ca simantarikam ca thapetva Tumbamalake mahasimani kittesi Mahindo dipajotako. | bandhitva malakam sabbam simam bandhitvana cakkhuma 75 viharam thavaram katva dutiyam Tissapabbate | punnaya punnamasiya asalhamase uposathe nakkhatte uttarasalhe simam bandhitvana pabbate | pabbajesi Maharittham pathamam dutiyamalake, upasampadesi tatth’ eva Tambapannikulissaro, | paficapafifiasa tatth’ eva pabbajja upasampada. battimsa malaka honti pathamarame patitthita, | 65. v a s sa pli asu k a m ? — v. 66 is wanting in BG2Z. — "siddhi AGl, “saddhim N. — sadhetva? — 68. kliattiya ca A, khatiya ca B, khatte ca ZGn. tatth’ eva? comp. v. 78. — 71. pabbajehi N, °jeti AGl, “jetu BG2Z. — 73. samanasamvasakam BG2, °ka AGlZ, samanavasaka N. — avippavasa AB G2Z, "sa GIN. samanasamvasakam c’ eva avippava- sam ticivaram? Comp. v. 23. — bandhasimapana G, bandhasimam pana N, bandbasivapana A, bandhayimapana B, bandhama CR, bandhama bhi- kkhave M. simam bandhimsu malakam? — v. 74 and the first hem. of v. 75 are wanting in Z. — 74. Tambamalake BG2, Pattasamalakc Gl, Tumbamalake A, battimsa malake N. Comp. Mahav., p. 103, 1. 12. — mahasima ca kittesi ABG2. — Cetiyapabbate BG2. Cetiyapabbate? M i s sa k a p ab b at e? (see Mahav., p. 106, 1. 4.) — 77. “kulissaram B, °ra AG2, °ro GIZn. 14 , 79 — 15 , 10. 79 dutiyarame battimsa vihare Tissapabbate, avasesakhuddakarame paccek’ ekekamalake. | patitthapetva aramam viharam pabbatuttame dvasatthi arahanta sabbe pathamam vass’ upagata. | 80 Cetiyapabbatapatiggahanam nitthitam. bhanavaram cuddasamam. XV. Gimhane pathame mase punnamase uposathe agata Jambudipamha vasimha pabbatuttame. | pancamase na vutthamha Tissarame ca pabbate, gacchama Jambudipanam, anujana rathesabha. | tappema annapanena vatthasenasanena ca, saranam gato jano sabbo, kuto vo anabhirati? | abhivadanapaccupatthanam anjaligarudassanam ciram dittho maharaja sambuddham dipaduttamam. | annatam vat’ aliam bhante, karomi thupam uttamam, vijanatha bhumikammam, thupam kahami satthuno. | 5 ehi tvam Sumana naga Pataliputtapuram gantva Asokam dhammarajanam evarn ca arocayahi tvam: | sahayo te maharaja pasanno buddhasasane, delii dhatuvaram tassa, thupam kahasi satthuno. | bahussuto sutadharo subbaco vacanakkhamo iddhiya paramippatto acalo suppatitthito | pattacivaram adaya khane pakkami pabbata. Asokam d liammaraj anarn arocesi yathatatham: | upajjhayassa maharaja sunohi vacanain tuvam, sahayo te maharaja pasanno buddhasasane, dehi dhatuvaram tassa, thupam kahati satthuno. | io 79. Tissap 0 GIZn, Missakap 0 AB2G2, Missap 0 Bl. See v. 75. — avasese kh° BG1. “arama “malaka? XV, 2. vuttliimha B G2. — Jambudipanam ABGMnR, “pantam C, °pannam d’Alwis (Attanag., p. 134). J am b u dip a v h a m? — 4. "pacout- thanam A. — ciradittho A. — sambuddho “uttamo? — Comp. Ma- li av., p. 104, and Sam. Pas.: „eiradittho no malniraja sammasambuddho, abhi- vadanapaccuttbanaiijalikammasamicikammakaranaUhanam n’attbi.“ — 5. bliu- mikampam Y, bhumikammam N. b h u m ib h a ga in? Sam. Pas. : „karomi bliante thupam, bhumibhagam dani vicinatha . “ — karomi Y. — 7. kahati BG2. — 8. acale Z, d’Alwis. 80 15, 11 — 25 . sutvana vacanam raja tuttho samviggamanaso dhatu pattam apuresi: khippam gacchahi subbata. | tato dhatum gahetvana subbaco vacanakkhamo vehasam abbhuggantvana agama Kosiyasantike. | upasamkamitva subbaco Kosiyam etad abravi: upajjhayassa maharaja sunohi vacanam tuvam, | Devanampiyo raja so pasanno buddhasasane, dehi dhatuvaram tassa, karissati thupam uttamam. | sutvana vacanam tassa Kosiyo tuttbamanaso 15 dakkhinakkhakam padasi: khippam gacchahi subbata. | samanero ca Sumano gantva Kosiyasantike dakkhinakkhakam gahetvana patitthito pabhatuttamo. | sampannahirottappako garubhavo ca pandito pesito therarajena patitthito pabbatuttame. | sabhatuko maliaseno bhikkhusamghe varuttame paccuggami tada raja buddhasetthassa dhatuyo. [ catumasain komudiyam divasam punnarattiya agato ca mahaviro . . . 20 ... . gajakumbhe patitthito. | akasi so kuncanadam kamsathalaggiyahatam, akampi tattha pathavi paccante agate muni. | sankhapanavaninnado bherisaddo samahato, khattiyo parivaretva pujesi purisuttamani. | pacchamukho hatthinago pakkami pattisammukha, puratthimena dvarena nagaram pavisi tada. | sabbagandham ca malam ca pujenti naranariyo. dakkhinena ca dvarena nikkhamitva gajuttamo, | Kakusandhe ca satthari Konagamane ca Kassape 25 patitthite bhumibhage p or ana isayo pure | 11. dhatum Z, d’Ahvis. This may be correct. — 13. subbato ABG2, °te G1Z, °co N. — 16. Ivosiyasantikam AN, “santike BGZ, d’Alwis. “santika? — 18. bhikkhusaipghapurnkkhato, d’Alwis. — 19. catumasam ABG, cat 0 Zn. - — komudiyam A2. D’Alwis: catumase konnuliya divase punnarattiya. catu- masikomudiva divasam? — 19b. 20. These fragments do not form one hemistich, for „ patitthita “ does not refer to Sumana, but to the relic dish, see Mahav., p. 106, 1. 8. — 21. kamsapatim (°ti A) va a ha tain ABG2, kamsithalaggiyahatani G1 Z, kamsamalaggiyahatam N. D’Alwis: kamsata- lam viyahatam. — 22. purisuttame GIN. -- 25. porana ABG2Z, d’Alwis, poraua GlM2n. — “issaro ABG2Z; issare Gl, d’Alwis; isayo N. Comp, the Jataka quoted by Minayeff, Grammaire P., p. IX. 15 , 26 — 37. 81 upagantva hatthinago bhumisisam gajuttamo dhatuyo Sakyaputtassa patitthapesi narasabho. | saha patitthite dhatu deva tattha pamodita, akampi tattha pathavi abbhutam lomahamsanam. | sabhatuko pasadetva mahamacce saratthake thupitthakam ca karesi samanero Sumanavhayo. | paccekapujam akamsu khattiya thupam uttamam vararatanehi samchannam dhatudipam varuttamam. | sachattam paccekachattam dvethanavekachattam tatharupam alamkaram valavijani dassaniyam | so thupatthane catuddisa padipehi vibhataka sataramsi udente va upasobhanti samantato. | pattharilani dussani nanarangehi cittiyo akaso vigatabbho hi upari ca parisobhati, | ratanamayaparikkhittam aggiyaplialikani ca kahcanavitanam chattam sovannavalikavicittam. | ayam passati sambuddho Kakusandho vinayako cattalisasahassehi tadihi parivarito. | karunacodito buddho satte passati cakkhuma Ojadipe ’bhayapure dukkhappatte ca manuse | 35 Ojadipe bahu satte bodhaueyye mahajane buddharamsanubhavena adicco padumam yatha. | cattalisasahassehi bhikkhuhi parivarito abbhutthito suriyo va Ojadipe patitthito. | 26. hatthin;igo N, °namgo A, °nage BGZ. — gajuttame G1Z. — 28. dasa bhatuke N. — saratthake N, karamdake A, karattbake BG, va- ratthake Z, ca ratthake d’Alwis. — The words „samanero Sumanavhayo' * 1 seem to belong to another passage, perhaps to v. 19. — v. 30 is wanting in BG2. — sachattam AGN; setacchattam Z, comp. Mahav. , p. 104, 1. 11. — dvethanaveka- (°meka-A) chattam (°jattam A) AGZ, dvemanussa- devachattam N. vethanam an eka ch a tt akam? — val a vij ani ni ? — - dassaneyyam AGZ, dassaniyam N. — 31. „padipehi vibhataka “ is wanting in Y. — udantave A, udanteva BGZ. — 32. pattharilani N, pakatikani Y. — vigatabbho hi N, viya ahosi A, viya ahasi G, viya abhavi B, viva abbhasi Z. — uparupari sobhati AZ, upari ca paris 0 BG, upari ca paso- bhati N. — I do not pretend fully to restore this stanza, but I will try at least to correct some of the blunders. pattharitani dussani nanarangehi cittiya (cetiye? see Mah., p. 108, 1. 10 et seq.), akaso vigatabbho va uparupari sobhati, | 33. aggiphalikani ca A, aggiyathalikani ca (“phalikani ca M2) BGZ, [a]gghi- [yaphalikani ca] N. 6 82 15 , 38—52. Kakusandho Mabadevo Devakuto ca pabbato Ojadipe ’bkayapure Abhayo nama khattiyo. | nagaram Kadambakokase nadito asi mapitam suvibhattam dassaneyyam ramaniyam manoramam. | punnakanarako nama pajjaro asi kakkhalo, 4ojano samsayam apanno maccho va kuminamukhe. | buddhassa anubhavena pakkanto pajjaro tada. desite amate dhamme patittkite jinasasane | caturasitisahassanam dhammabhisamayo ahu. Patiyaramo tada asi dhammakarakacetiyam. | bhikkkusahassaparivuto Mabadevo mahiddhiko, pakkanto ’va jino tamha sayam ev’ aggapuggalo ’ti. | ayam passati sambuddho Konagamano mahamuni timsabhikkhusahassehi sambnddlio parivarito. | dasasahassebi sambuddho karuna pharati cakkkuma, 45 Varadipe mahaviro dukkhite passati manuse. | Varadipe bahu satte bodhaneyye mabajane buddharamsanubbavena adieco padumam yatha. | timsabhikkhusahassebi sambuddho parivarito abbkutthito suriyo va Varadipe patitthito. | Konagamano Mahasumano Sumauakuto ca pabbato, Varadipe Vaddhamane Samiddho nama khattiyo. | dubbuttbiyo tada asi dubbbikkbi asi yonaka, dubbhikkhadukkhite satte maccbe vappodake yatha | agate lokavidumki devo sammabbivassati, 50 kbemo asi janapado, assasesi bahu jane. | Tissatalakasamante nagare dakkbinamukbe viharo Uttararamo kayabandhanacetiyam. | caturasitisabassanani dhammabhisamayo ahu. 43. Mabadevo patitthito pakkanto ca jino? comp. w. 53. 64. — 443. sambuddho AGlnZ, tadihi B G2. — 45. dasasahassebi AGIN, dasa- sahassi ca B G2 Z. — karuna passati Y. karunaya pharati? comp, v. 56. — 49. dubbhikkliam (“kkha A) setatthikam A B G2 , dubbbikkhi asi yonaka GIN, dubbhikkhe bhayapilite Z. dubbutthika tada asi dubbhi- kkham asi chatakam? comp. Car i y a Pi t a ka : ^avutthiko janapado dub- bhikkho chatako maha“; Sam. Pas.: „Varadipe dubbutthika ahosi dubbhikkham dussassam, satta ch a t ak arogena anayavyasanam apajjanti." — maccho N. — appodake? comp. Suttanipata: „phandamanain pajarn disva macche appodake vatha." — 50. janussavo ABG2, °ve Z, “do Gl. — 51. nagaradakkh 0 GIN. 15 , 52 — G7. 83 desite amate dhamme suriyo udjto yatha | bhikkhusahassaparivuto Mahasumano patitthito pakkanto ca mahaviro sayam ev’ aggapuggalo ’ti. | ayam passati sambuddho Kassapo lokanayako visatibbikkhusahassebi sambuddho parivarito. | Kassapo ca lokavidu voloketi sadevakam visuddhabuddhacakkhuna bodhaneyye ca passati. | 55 Kassapo ca lokavidu ahutinam patiggaho pharanto mahakarunaya vivadam passati kuppitam | Mandadipe bahu satte bodhaneyye ca passati buddharamsanubhavena adicco padumam yatha. | gacchissami Mandadipam jotayissami sasanain patittbapemi sammabham andhakare va candima. | bhikkhuganehi parivuto akase pakkami jino, patitthito Mandadipe suriyo abbhutthito yatha. | Kassapo Sabbanando ca Subhakuto ca pabbato, Visalam nama nagaram, Jayanto nama khattiyo, | 60 Khematalakasamante nagare pacchime mukhe viharo Pacznaramo, cetiyam dakasatikain. | assasetvana sambuddho samagge katvana bhatuke desesi amatam dhammam patitthapesi sasanam. | desite amate dhamme patitthite jinasasane caturasitisahassanam dhammabbisamayo ahu. | bhikkhusahassaparivuto Sabbanando mahayaso patitthito Mandadipe, pakkanto lokanayako ’ti. | ayam hi loke sambuddho uppanno lokanayako: sattanam anukampaya tarayissami paninam. | C5 so ’vapassati sambuddho lokajettbo narasabho naganam samgamatthaya mahasena samagata. | dhumayanti pajjalanti verayanti caranti te 52. surij'e Y. — udite Y (except Gl). — 53. ca Y, va N. — 54. sam- buddho GlnZ, tadihi ABG2. — 58. patitthissami ABG2, patittbapemi GZ, [patitthape]si N. — samma A, sammiibha B, sammabham G2, sattaDam C’nnam G.l) GIN, yam dliatum Z. — 59. suriyo (°yo R) abbhuttliite yatlia Y (except Gl). - — Gl. pacchimamukhe? comp. v. 83: uttaramukho. — °satakam? Comp. 17,10. — 62. bh atuke A B G2 Z, bbasite Gl, tasike N. Comp. Mahav., p. 93, 1. 13. — 65. tarayanto (°nto ca BG2) paiiino A B G2, tarayissami paninam GIN, desesi dhammam uttamam Z. — 66. so va° ABG, so ca Z, te so N. — 67. dhupayanti? see Mahavagga, I, 15. — verayanti Z, verayanti ABG2, veranaxi ca GIN. 6 84 15 , 67 — 81. mahabhayan ti vipulam dipam nasenti pannaga. | agama ekibhuto ’va: gacchami dipam uttamam matulam bhagineyyam ca nibbapessami pannage. | aham Gotamasambuddho, pabbate Cetiyanamake, Anuradhapure ramme Tisso namasi khattiyo. | Kusinarayam bhagava Mallanam Upavattane 70 anuptidisesaya sambuddho nibbuto upadhikkhaye. | dve vassasata honti chattimsa ca vassa tatha, Mabindo nama namena jotayissati sasanam. | nagarassa dakkhinato bhumibhage manorame tiramo ca ramaniyo Thuparamo ’ti suyyare. | Tambapanniti sutvana dipo abbbuggato tada. saririkam mama dhatum patitthissam diputtame. | buddhe pasanna dhamme ca sanighe ca ujuditthika bhave cittam vinijeti Anula nama khattiya. | deviya vacanam sutva raja tkeram id’ abravi: 75 buddhe pasanna dhamme ca samghe ca ujuditthika | bhave cittam virajeti, pabbajehi Anulakam. akappiya maharaja itthipabbajja bhikkhuno, | agamissati me raja Samghamitta bhaginiya, Anulam pabbajetvana mocesi sabbabandhana. | Samghamitta mahapauna Uttarii ca vicakkhana Hema ca Masagalla ca Aggimitta mitavadii Tappa Pabbatachinna ca Malla ca Dhammadasiya, | ettaka ta bhikkhuniyo dhutaraga samahita odatamanasamkappa saddhammavinaye rata | khinasava vasi patta tevijja iddhikovida 80 uttamante thita tattha agamissanti ta idha. | mahamattaparivuto nisinno cintiye tada 67. mulnira bhayanti (bhay 0 A) ABG2. — vepullam Zn. pharanti te mababhayam ativipulam? — vv. 69 — 76 are wanting in BG2. — 69. ayam? — pabbato "namako? — 72. suyyate? — 73. patittbissa N, patittbassam CG, patittbissara AMR. saririka m° dhatu patitthi- ssanti? — vv. 74 — 77 are given in tbe MSS. with a number of omissions and transpositions which it is superfluous here to indicate. — 77. mocesi AGlZn, moceti BG2. — 78. Comp. 18, 11. 12. — Masa BGZ, Maya A,' Hema N. — Maragalla N. — Tappa Pabbatachinna ca N, Sabbata (subb 0 ABG2) Sinna va (ca M) Y. — Mala Y. — Dhammatasiya Y, Dhammada- piya N. — 80. uttamatthe AZ. This may be the correct reading. — 81. ni- sinne BG2Z. — cintiye GlZ, cintaye N, khattiye AB, khantiye G2. 15, 81 — &5. 85 mantitukamo nisiditva mattanam etad abravi. | Arittho nama khattiyo sutva devassa bbasitam | therassa vacanam sutva uggahetvana sasanam dayakam anusasetva pakkami uttaramukho. | nagarassa ekadesamhi gharam katvana khattiya dasa sile samadinna Anuladevipamukha | sabba pancasata kanna abhijata jutindhara Anulam parikkaronta sayampato balm jana. | 85 navatittham upagantva aropetva mahanavam sagaram samatikkanto tbale patva patittbito. | Vinjhatavim atikkanto mahamatto mahabbalo Pataliputtam anuppatto gato devassa santike. | putto deva mabaraja atrajo Piyadassano Mabindo nama so thero pesito tava santikam. | Devanampiyo so raja sahayo Piyadassano buddhe abhippasanno so pesito tava santike. | bhatuno vacanam tuyham amantesi maba isi. rajakanne Samghamitte Anula nama khattiya | 90 sabba tam apalokenti pabbajjaya purakkhaka. bhatuno sasanam sutva Samghamitta vicakkhana | turita upasamkamma rajanam idam abravi: anujana mabaraja, gacchami dipalanjakam. | bhatuno vacanam mayham amantesi maha isi. bhagineyyo ca Sumano putto ca jetthabhatu te | gata tava piyo mayham gamanam varenti dhituya. bharikam me maharaja bhatuno vacanam mama, | rajakanna maharaja Anula nama khattiya sabba mam apalokenti pabbajjaya purakkhaka. | 95 bhanavaram pannarasamam. 81. mantetukamo? — khattiyam Z, khattam ABG, mattanam N. (a)maccanam? mantinam? — 83. dasakam Z, day 0 ABG, dar° N. ayyakam abliivadetva? Comp. Mahav., p. 1 10, 1. 6. — 85. parikkha- ronta? — 86. aruhitva? — tliale patva N, thapetvana N. — 88. putto deva N, putto (°tte A) te ABG, putto te deva Z. — Piyadassana BG2. — 89. Piyadassana B. — vv. 90 and 91 a are wanting in BG2Z, 90 b also in AG1. — 90. bh° vacanam tassa amantesi maha isi? — rajakanna? comp. v. 95. — 91. purakkhaka Y, purakkhika N (the same at v. 95). pu- rekkhara? Comp. Sam. Pas.: „Anulapi khattiya itthisahassaparivuta pa- bbajjapurekkhara mam patimaneti. 11 — vv. 93 b and 94 a are wanting in B G2Z. — 93. jetthabhata te (i. e. Mabinda)? — gata tava piyo N, laddha ca pitaro (pitayo F) AFG. gata tava piye? — varesi AFG. — 95. pu- rekkhara? see v. 91. 86 16 , 1 — 15 . XVI. Caturanginim mahasenam sannayhitvana khattiyo tathagatassa sambodhim a day a pakkami tada. | tisu rajjesu atikkanto Vinjhatavisu khattiyo atikkauto braharannam anuppatto jalasagaram. | caturangini mahasena bbikklmnisamgbasavika mahasamuddam pakkanta adaya bodhim uttamam. | upari devanam turiyam hettbato ca manussakam catudisamauusaturiyam, pakkanto jalasagare. | muddhani avaloketva khattiyo Piyadassano 5 abhivadayitva tarn bodhim imam attham abbasatba: | babussuto iddhimanto silava susamahito dassane akappiyam maybam atappaneyyam mahajanam. | tattha kanditva roditva oloketvana dassanam khattiyo patiuivattetva agama sakanivesanam. | udake ca nimmita naga devatakase ca nimmita rukkhe ca nimmita devil naganivasanam pi ca | parivarayimsu te sabbe gacchantam bodliim uttamain. amanapa ca pisaca bbutakumbbandarakkhasa bodhim paccantam ayantam parivarimsu amanusa. | tavatimsa ca yama ca tusitapi ca devatii io nimmanaratino deva ye deva vasavattino | bodhim paccantam ayantam tutthahattha pamodita, tettimsa ca devaputta sabbe Indapurohita | bodhim paccantam ayantam appothenti hasanti ca. Kuvero Dhatarattho ca Virupakkho Virulhako | cattaro te maharaja samanta caturodisa parivarayimsu sambodhiin gacchantam dipalahjakam. | mahamukhapataharo divillatatadindima bodhim paccantam ayantam sadhu kilanti devata. | paricchattakapuppham ca dibbamandaravani ca XVI, 3. bh i kkhun isamgh a p am u kha? — 4. catuddisaraan 0 ABG. catu d disam an usa turiyam? — 5. apalokelva N, acaloketva F, avalo- ketva Y. — 6. I do not try to correct the second hemistich. — 7. pati- nivattitva A. — v. 8 is wanting in BG2. — naga (namga A) nivesanam pi ca AGZ, naga nivasanain pi ca F, nagadhivasana pi ca X. naganiva- sane pi ca? — 9°. parivarayimsu A. — v. 14 is wanting in BG2Z. — °pataha ca? 16, 15—30. 87 dibbacandanacunnam ca antalikkhe pavassati, bodhim paccantam ayantam pujayanti ca devata. | 15 campaka salla nimba nagapunnagaketaka jalasagare mahabodhim deva pujenti satthuno. | nagaraja nagakanna nagapota bahu jana bhavanato nikkhamitva pujenti bodhim uttamam. | nanaviragavasana nanaragavibhusita jalasagare mahabodhim naga kilanti sadhu no. | uppalapadumakumudanilani satapattakam kallaharam kuvalayam adhimuttamadhugandhikam | takkarikam kovilaram patalim bimbajalakam asokam salapuppham ca missakam ca piyangukam naga pujenti te bodhim sobhati jalasagare. | 20 amodita nagakanna nagaraja pamodita bodhim paccantam ayantam naga kilanti sadhu no. | tattha manimaya bhumi muttaphalikasanthata, aramapokkharaniyo nanapupphehi vicitta. | sattahakam vasitvana sadeva sahamanusa bhavanato nikkhamantam pujenti bodhim uttamam. | maladamakalapa ca nagakanna ca devata avijjhanti ca celani sambodhiparivarita. | bodhim paccantam ayantam sadhu kilanti devata. paricchattakapuppham ca dibbamandaravani ca dibbacandanacunnam ca antalikkhe pavassati. | 25 naga yakkha ca bhuta ca sadeva sahamanusa jalasagaram ayantam sambodhiparivarita | tattha naccanti gayanti vadayanti hasanti ca pothenti digunam bhujam te bodhiparivarita. | naga yakkha ca bhuta ca sadeva sahamanusa kittenti mangalam sotthim niyate bodhim uttamam. | naga dhajapaggahita nilobhasa manorama kittenti bodhim uttamam patitthitam dipalanjake. | Anuradhapura ramma nikkhamitva bahu jana 16 a . One syllable is wanting. We should probably for „salla“ read „salala“ or „sallaka“; comp. Apadana (Phayre MS., fol. ku') : „cam- paka salala nimba nana- (sic) punnagaketaka. “ — - 18. sadhu no Zn, sadhuyo AFG, sadhuso B. — 19. atimuttam m°? — 21. sadhu no N, sadhuso BG2, sadhuyo AFG1Z. — 22. tattha ABG2Z, tassa G1X. — 28. niyate AZ, niyatam B, niyate F2G, niyato FI, niyate N. niyantam? — °ut- tame F, 0 uttamam Yn. 88 16 , 30 — 17 , 1 . 30 sambodhim upasamkanta saha devehi khattiyo | parivarayimsu sambodhim saha puttehi khattiyo gandhamalam ca pujesuni gandhagandhanam uttamam. | vithiyo ca susammattha agghiya ca alamkata. saha patitthite bodhi kampittha pathavi tada ti. | diipesi raja atthattha khattiyesu pan’ atthasu sabbajettham bodhiguttam rakkbitum bodhim uttamam. | adasi sabbaparibaram sabbalamkaraphasukam, sojasa lamka mahalekha dharani bodhigarava. | tatba susincattharam capi mahalekhatthane thape. 35 so kulasahassakam katva ketuchaditta palanam, | suvannabheriya ratthaabbisekadimangale. ekafi janapadam datva Candaguttam tbapesi ca | Devaguttapasadam bhumi cekam yatharaham, kulanan tadannesam va gamabhoge pariccaji. | Raiino paiicasata kaiina aggajatti yasassini pabbajimsu ca ta sabba vitaraga samahita. | kumarika paiicasata Anulaparivarita pabbajimsu ca ta sabba vitaraga samahita. | Arittho liama khattiyo nikkhanto bhayaanduto paucasataparivaro pabbaji jinasasane. 40 sabbeva arahattappatta sampunna jinasasane. | hemante pathame mase supupphite dharaniruhe agato so inababodhi patittbito Tambapannike ti. | bhanavaram solasamam. XVII. Battimsa yojanam digham attharasahi vitthatam yojanasataavattam sagarena parikkhitam | 30. saha devihi? — 31. gandhaganilhanam N, gandho gandhanam (“ram F) AF, gaudlio gandhadim (“dam Gl) BG, gandhodakam Z. gan- dhagandhanam? — 33. bodhiguttim? — vv. 34 — 37 are wanting in BG2Z. — 34. sabbalamkarupagata N, sabbiilainkaram agatam F, sabbalam- karapasukam AG1. — lamka AGIN, samgha F. — mahalekham AFG. — dharani AF. solas’ aka mahalekha dharani (locative) bodhigarava? — 35. tathapi supihcattharapihcapi AG, tatha susiucalthaii capi N, tatba susancittharan capi F. tatha sucisantharan capi (comp. Mahav., p. 118, 1.4)? — kulayakam AG, kulasahassakam N, kusalassakam F. — ketum cliadittha (“tla G) AFG. I do not try any conjecture. — 36. "bherivo? — ratthu AG. — datva datva Cand° AG. — 37. Dev" ca bhumicca- gam? — dadaunesam va F, tarasamvasa AG. tadahhesah ca? — 40. bba- yancuto Y, bhayaanduto N, bhayaaiicuto F. 17, 2—15. 89 Lankadipavaram nama sabbattba ratanakaram upetam naditalakehi pabbatehi vanehi ca. | dipani puran ca raja ca upaddutan ca dhatuyo thupam dipan ca pabbatam uyyanam bodhi bhikkhuni | bhikkhu ca buddhasettho ca terasa bonti te tahim; ekadese caturonamam sunatha mama bhasato. | Ojadipam Varadipam Mandadipan ti vuccati Lankadipavarain nama Tambapanniti nayati. | 5 Abhayapuram Vaddhamanam Visalam Annradhapuram purassa caturonamam catubuddhana sasane. | Abbayo ca Samiddho ca Jayanto ca nartidhipo Devanampiyatisso ca rajano honti caturo. j rogadubbutthikan c eva vivadayakkhadhivasanam caturo upadduta ete catubuddhavinodita. | Kakusandhassa bhagavato dbatu dbammakarako abu, Konagamanassa buddbassa dhatu kayabandhanam abu, | Kassapassa sambuddhassa dhatu udakasatakam, Gotamassa sirimato donadhatu saririka. | 10 Abbayapure Patiyaramo, Vaddhamanassa Uttara, Visale Pacinaramo, Thuparamo ’nuradhassa dakkhine caturo thupa catubuddhana sasane. | Kadambakassa samanta nagaram Abhayapuram, Tissatalakasamanta nagaram Vaddhamanakam, | Khematalakasamanta Visalam nagaram . . Anuradhapuram, . . . . tatth’ eva caturodipavicaranam. | Devakuto Sumanakuto Subhakuto ’ti vuccati, Silakuto nama dani catupannatti pabbate. | Mahatittham nama uyyanam Mahanaman ca Sagaram Mahamegbavanam nama vasantam ariyapatham caturolokanatbanam pathamam senasanam ahu. | 15 XVII, 3. thupam dahan ca? — 4. ekadese caturo (cattaro BG2) nama ABFG, ekadesena vakkhami Z, ekadesam caturonamam N. — 8. catu- buddha vin° BGFZ; this may be the correct reading. — 11. Uttaro Al. — dakkhino ABG, °ne ZFn. — 13. After the words „Visalam na- garam“ N inserts „puram“, Z: „ahu“. Evidently some words are wanting. — tath’ eva ca t uro dis a vie aran am? — 14. Silakuto Z. — 15. Ma- hanomam K, Mahanopau F. (Comp. Mahav., pp. 92. 93.) — pasattham? — catunnam lok° ABG2. 90 17, 16—30. Kakusandhassa bhagavato sirisabodhim uttamam adaya dakkhinam sakham Rucananda mahiddhika Ojadipe Mahatitthe arame tattha ropita. | Konagamanassa bhagavato udumbarabodhim uttamam adaya dakkhinam sakham Kandananda mahiddhika | Varadipe Mahanomamhi arame tattha ropita. Kassapassa bhagavato nigrodhabodhim uttamam | adaya dakkhinam sakham Sudhamma narna mahiddhika Sagaramhi nama arame ropitam dumacetiyam. | Gotamassa bhagavato assatthabodhim uttamam 20 adaya dakkhinam sakham Samghamitta mahiddhika | Mahameghavane ramme ropita dipalanjake. Rucananda Kanakadatta Sudhamma ca mahiddhika | bahussuta Samghamitta chalabhinna vicakkhana catasso ta bhikkhuniyo sabba ca bodhim aharum. | sirisabodhi Mahatitthe, Mabaname udumbaro, Mahasagaramhi nigrodho, assattho Meghavane tada | acale caturarame catubodhi patitthita. acale senasanam rammam catubuddhana sasane. | Mahadevo cha|abhinno Sumano patisambhido inahiddhiko Sabbanando Mahindo ca bahussuto 25 ete therii mahapafma Tambapannipasadaka. | Kakusandho sabbalokaggo pahcacakkhuhi cakkhuma sabbalokam avekkhanto Ojadipavar’ addasa. | punnakanarako nama ahu pajjarako tada. tasmim samaye manussanam rogo pajjarako ahu. | rogena phuttha bahujana bhantamaccha va thalamhi thita socanti dummana | bhayattita na labhanti cittasukhasatam attano. disvana dukkhite satte rogabandhena diisite | cattalisasahassehi Kakusandho lokanayako 17. Kanakadatta A, Kandananda (°nta Gl) GIN, Kananda BFG2, Nanda nama Z. — 18. Mahanamamhi A, Majamganomamhi BG, Jano- mamhi Z, Mahanomamhi X. — 19. ropita? — 21. Kandananda X, Kanda- nanda Gl. — 22. sabba va F. — 23. Mahanome XG1. — 24. caturorame YF. — catubodhi? — 24 b . acalo Y, ajalo F. — sasanam GIN, °ne YF. — 28. bhantam 0 X, pantam 0 Gl, mattam 0 A, patta m° BG2Z. — thita N, utthita Y, utthito utthito F. — 29. rogabhayena A, rogabhantena BGZ, rogabandena F, rogabandhena N. 17, 30—45. 91 roganam bhindanatthaya Jambudipa idhagato. | cattalisasahassebi chalabhinna mahiddhikti parivarayimsu sambuddham nabhe candam va taraka. | Kakusandho lokapajjoto Devakutamhi pabbate obhasetvana devo va patitthasi sasavako. | Ojadipe Devakutamhi obhasetva patitthitam devo ’va mannanti sabbe na jananti tathagatam. j udentam arunuggamamhi punnamase uposathe ujjaletvana tam selam jalamanam sakananam | disvana selam jalamanam obhasentam catuddisam tutthahattha jana sabbe saraja Abhaye pure. | passantu mam jana sabbe Ojadipagata nara iti buddho adhitthasi Kakusandho lokanayako. ] isisammato Devakuto manusse abhipatthito. upaddave pajjarake manussabalavahana | nikkhamitva jana sabbe saraja nagara pura. tattha gantva namassanti Kakusandham naruttamam. | abhivadetvana sambuddham rajasena saratthaka deva ’ti tam mahnamana agata te mahajana. | anuppatta jana sabbe buddhasettham narasabham. adhivasetu me bhagava saddhim bhikkhugane saha | ajjatanaya bhattena, gacchama nagaram puram. adhivaseti sambuddho tunhi rajassa bhasitam. | adhivasanam viditvana rajasena saratthaka pujasakkarabahute tada puram upagamum. | maha ayam bhikkhusamgho, janakayo anappako. nagarake atisambadhe akatabhumi pure mama. | atthi mayham bahuyyanam Mahatittham manoramam asambadham adurattham pabbajitanulomikam J patisallanasaruppam patirupam tathagatam tatthaham buddhapamukham samgham dassami dakkhinam. | 30. bhindanatthaya N, bandhan 0 BG, bandan 0 F, mocanatthaya AZ. — 31. “sahassa hi B G2. °sahassani? — vv. 33 a — 35 a are wanting in A. — 33. devo va X, na (omitting devo) YF; devo ti (comp. v. 39)? — 34. udaya arun 0 N. — 37. mannsse abhipatitthito Y, m° abhipatthito F. manusseh’ abhipatthito? - — ■ npaddute N. — manussabalavahane N, "nara FG1Z, °na ABG2. — 39. devo ’ti? — 41. adliivasesi AZ. — 42. puja- sakkaram katvana te ABG2, °kkarabahnna te Z, “kkarabahute N, °kka bahu ca te (va te) FG1. puj asakkara b ahul a? — 44. bahuyyanam FGIZn, brahuyyanam ABG2. 30 35 40 45 92 17, 46—59. sabbo jano passeyya tam buddham samghan ca dassanam. cattalisasahassehi bhikkhusamghapurakkhato | Kakusandho lokavidu Mahatitthamhi papuni. patitthite Mahatitthamhi uyyane dipaduttame | akalapupphehi sanchanna yam kihci ca lata durna. sovannamayabhiiikaram samadaya mahipati | onojetvana Lamkattham jalam hatthe akarayi. im’ ahani bhante uyyanam dadami buddhapamukhe. samghassa phasuviharam rammam senasanam ahu. | patiggahesi uyyanam Kakusandho lokanayako, 50 pakampi dharani tattha pathamam senasanam tada. | pathaviacalam kampetam thito lokaggamiyako : aho nuna Rucananda bodhim haritva idhagata. | Kakusandhassa bhagavato cittam annaya bhikkhuni gantva sirisamahabodhimule thatva mahiddhika, | buddho ca icchati bodhi Ojadipamhi rohanam, manusa cintayam tattha bodhim aharitum gama. | anumatam buddhasetthena anukampaya panino mama iddhanubhavena dakkliinasakha pamuccatu. j Rucananda imam vakyani yacamana katanjali 55 muccitva dakkkinasakha patitthasi katahake. | jxahetvana Rucananda bodhim suvannakatiihake pancasatabhikkhunihi parivaresi mahiddhika. | tadapi pathavi kampi sasamuddam sapabbatam aloko Va maha asi abbhuto lomahamsano. | disva attamana sabbe rajasena saratthaka anjalim paggahetvana namassanti bodhim uttamam. | amodita maru sabbe devata hatthamanasa ukkutthisaddam pavattesum disva bodhivaruttamam. | 47. patitthe N, titthite A, saha patitthite BGZ, saha patitthe F. — 48. samchantara kimci ca A. — Instead of „yani kinci“ we should expect a preterite ending in -imsu. — 49. lamkattha R, laratattha C, laintattham M, lamkatara F. — akiri A. — rammam N, mam F, imam Y. — 50. ahu A (instead of tada). Perhaps we should transpose ahu (v. 49), and tada (v. 50). — 51. [pa]tha[vi]aja[lam] N, pathaviajalam F. — kampento ABG2. — 52. Y omits gantva. — 53. rohanam (sic) BG, ropauam AZ, ruhanam X. — manusa N, manasa F, manussa ABG, manussa Z. — cintavatp Zn, cintayan Gl, cintayum ABG2, cittayan F. — manusa cinti vam tattha bodhim aharitum gama? — 57. sasamudda Z. — aloko ca AGZ. — 59. maru ABG, maru Z, manu F, nara N. 17, 60 — 76. 93 cattaro ca maharaja lokapala yasassino arakkham sirisabodhissa akamsu devata tada. | tavatimsa ca ye deva ye deva vasavattino Yamo Sakko Suytxmo ca Santusito Sunimmito sabbe te parivarimsu sirisabodbim uttamam. | anjalim paggahetvana devasamgha pamodita Rucanandaya sab’ eva pujenti bodbim uttamam. | sirisabodbim adaya Rucananda mabiddbika bhikkhunisamghaparibbulha Ojadipavaram garni. | deva naccanti basanti potbenti digunam bhujam Ojadipavaram yantam sirisabodbim uttamam. | devasarngliaparibbidha Rucananda mabiddbika adaya sirisabodhim Kakusandbain upagami. | tambi kale mahaviro Kakusandho lokanayako Mahatittbambi uyyane bodbittbane patittbito. | Rucananda sayam bodbim obhasentam na ropayi, disva sayam Kakusandlio paggabi dakkbinam bbujam. | bodhiya dakkbinam sakbaxn Rucananda mabiddbika buddhassa dakkliinahatthe thapayitvabhivadayi. | paramasitva lokaggo Kakusandho narasabho adasi ranno ’bbayassa: imam tbanamhi ropaya. | yambi tbanamhi acikkbi Kakusandho lokanayako tambi tbanamhi ropesi Abhayo rattliavaddhano. | patitthite sirisabodbimhi bhumibhage manorame buddho dhammam adesayi catusaccam sanhakaranam. | pariyosane satasabassam cattiilisa sahassiyo abbisamayo manussanam, devanam timsa kotiyo. | sirisabodhi Kakusandhassa, Konagamanassa udumbaro, Kassapassapi nigrodho tayobodhivibarana. | Sakyaputtassa asamassa bodhi assattham uttamam aharitvana ropimsu Mahiimeghavane tada. | Mutasivassa atraja ath’ anne dasa bbataro Abbayo Tisso. Nago ca Utti Mattabbayo pi ca | Mitto Sivo Aselo ca Tisso Khiro ca bhataro, 71. °ccam sanhakaranam G1X, 0 ccappakasanam A, °ccam sattakara- nam B G2 , 0 ccappakasato Z. — 73. tavo bodhim idh’ aharum ( 0 ram B) ABG2Z, tayobodhivibarana (° raka N, °runa Gl) FG1N. tay o b o dh i v i c a- ranam? comp. v. 13. — 74. bodbim? — 76. Sivo AG. — Kiro ca? 60 65 70 75 94 17, 76—91. anudevi Anula ca Mutasivassa dhitaro. | tada ca bilayo aga Laiikadipavaruttamam yada abhisitto raja Mutasivassa atrajo etthantare yam ganitam vassam bhavati kittakam? | dve satani ca vassani chattimsa ca samvacchare satnbuddhe parinibbute abhisitto Devanampiyo. | agata rajaiddhiyo abhisitte Devanampiye, pbarati punnatejani Tambapannimhi issaro. | ratanakaram tada asi Lankadipam varuttamam, so Tissassa punnatejena uggata ratana bahu. | disvana ratanam raja hattho samviggamanaso pannakaram karitvana Asokadharumassa pahini. | disvana tarn pannakaram Asoko attamano ahu, abhisekam nanaratanam puna pabc-si Devanampiyassa. | valavijanim unhisam cbattam khaggan ca padukam vethanam sarapamangam bhinkaram nandivattakam | sivikain sankhavatamsam adhovimam vatthakotikam sovannapatikataccbuin mahaggbam hatthapuncbanani | Anotattodakam kajarn uttamam haricandanam 85 arunavannamattikam anjanam nagamabatam | haritakam amalakam mahagorham amatosadbam satthivabasatam salim sugandbam sukamabatam punnakammabhinibbattam pahesi Asokasavbayo. | Lankabhisekatisso ca Asokadbammassa pesito abhisitto dutiyabhisekena Tambapannimhi issaro. | dutiyabhisittam Tissanr atikkami timsa rattiyo Mahindo ganapamokldio Jambudipa idhagato. | karapesi viharam so Tissaramam varuttamam, patittbapesi mababodhirn Mahameghavane tada, | patittbapesi so thupam mabantam ramaneyyakam, 90 akasi Devanampiyo araman Cetiyapabbate, | Thuparamam akaresi viharam Tissaaramam, 76. anudevi GIN, adudevi F, ahudcvi BG2, ahud 0 Z, ahud 0 A. — Anuladevi Sivala ca (comp. 10, 7)? — 77. pilayo N. vada ca Yi- jayo aga (comp. 6, 19)? — yada cabhisitto? — 79. °tejena GlX. — 87. Lankiibhisekatissassa B G2. Lankabhiseke Tisso ca .. pesite? — 88. atikkami Y, atiggayha N, atikkavha F. atikkamma? — 91. Tissaarii- mani N, Tissaagamam F, Pissaaramam ABG2, Vissaar 0 Gl, Missakarfimam Z. The Tissarama having been mentioned in v. 89, I propose to read viha- ram Issarasamanam, comp. Mahav., p. 119, 1. 14; p. 123, 11. 3. 9. 17, 91 — 106. 95 Vessagirin ca karesi Colakatissanamakam, | tato yojaniko aramo Tissarajena karito. patitthapesi mahadanam mahapelavaruttamam. cattarisam pi vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo ’ti. j Mutasivassa atraja ath’ anne catubhataro, Uttiyo dasavassamhi rajjam karesi khattiyo. | atthavassabhisittassa nibbuto dipajotako. akasi sariranikkhepam Tissarame pnratthime. | paripunnadvadasavasso Mahindo ca idhagato, satthivasse paripumie nibbuto Cetiyapabbate. | 95 samalamkaritvana punnaghatam toranan ca malagghiyam padipa ca jalamana nibbuto dipajotako | raja kho Uttiyo nama kutagarani varuttainam dassaneyyam akaresi, pujesi dipajotakam. | ubho deva manussa ca naga gandhabbad&nava sabbeva dukkhita hutva pujesum dipajotakam. | sattaham pujam katvana Cetiye pabbatuttame ekacce evam ahamsu: gacchama nagaram puram. | ath’ ettha vattati saddo tumulo bheravo maha, idh’ eva jhapayissama Lankaya dipajotakam. | 100 raja sutvana vacanam janakayassa bhasato: mahathupam karissami Tissaramapuratthime. | adaya sakutagaram Mahindam dipajotakam nagaram puratthimadvaram pavisimsu sarajika. | majjhena nagaram gantva nikkhamitvana dakkhine Mahavihare sattaham mahapujam akamsu te. | katvana gandhacitakam ubho deva ca manusa thapayimsu rajuyyane: jhapayissama subbatam. | sakutagaram gahetvana Mahindam dipajotakam viharam padakkhinam katva vandapesum thupam uttamam. | 105 arama puratthimadvara nikkhamitva mahajana 92?yojanika arama .. karita? comp. Mahav., p. 120, 1. 2. — mahame'ghavaruttamam Y, mahapelavaruttamam N, mahapelagaruttamam F. Comp. Mahav., p. 225, 1. 15; on p. 202, 1. 13 we have the following remark in the Tika: „ mahapelabhattadi pathamam samghanavakanam dapayiti attho.“ — 93. dasavassapi N. dasa vassani? — 94. Tissaramapuratthime? comp. v. 101. — 96 b . va X, ca Y. — nibbute "jotake A2BG2. — 97. pujesi N, pujesum FZ, pujetumABG. — 101. Tissaramapuratthito XG1. Comp. v. 93; Mahavamsa, p. 125, 1. 5. — 103. dakkhina B, dakkhina A. — 105. kutagaram Y, kutakaram F. 96 17, 106 — 18, 10. akamsu sariranikkhepam bbumibbage samantato. | arulha citakam sabbe rodamami katanjali abbivadetvana sirasa citakam dipayimsu te. | sadhatum eva tathasesam jhayamano mahagani. akamsu thupavaram sabbe arame yojanike tada. | katam sariranikkbepam Mabindam dipajotakam Isibhumiti tarn namam samafma patliamam ahu. | bhanavaram sattarasamam. XVIII. Idani atthi anne pi tkera ca majjhima nava vibhajjavada vinaye sasane pavenipalaka, | bahussuta silasampanmi obluiseuti mahim imam, dhutangaearasampanna sobhanti dipalaujake. | Sakyaputta baliu c’ ettha saddhammavamsakovida. babimnam vata atthaya loke uppajji cakkbuma, andbakaram vidbametva :\lokam dassesi so jino. | yesam tatbagate saddba acala suppatitthita sabbaduggatiyo bitva sugatiin upapajjare. | ye ca bbaventi bojjbangam indriyaui balani ca 5 satisammappadbane ca iddbipade ca kevalam | ariyam attbangikam maggam dukkbupasamagaminam, cbetvana Maccuno senam te loke vijitavino ’ti. | Mayadevi ca kanittha sabajata ekamatuka bbagavantam thanam payesi mata va anukampika | kittita ag-ffanikkbitta cbalabbinua mabiddbika Mahapajapati nama Gotami iti vissuta. | Khema Uppalavanna ca ubbo ta aggasavika Patacara Dhammadinna Sobbita Isidasika | Visakba Sona Sabala ca Samgbadasi vicakkbana Nanda ca dhammapala ca vinaye ca visarada 10 eta Jambudipavbaye vinayannu maggakovida. | 107. dipayirnsu te Y, dipisu teja Gl, dtpimsu (dipisu F) te jana X. — 108. jhapayamana N, jhayyamano F, jhayamane Z. XVIII, 1. thera pi Y. — vibhajjavadi A. — vv. 3 — 44 are wanting in BG2. — 3. Sakyaputta N, Saky 0 YF. Sakv aputtiya? (or Sakyaputti? see schol. Kacc., p. 186, ed. Senart.) — 10. Sona X, Soka AG, Yoka Z. — Sapala ca YF. 18, 11—23. 97 tkerika Samghamitta ca Uttara ca vicakkhana Hema Pasadapala ca Aggimitta ca Dasika | Pheggu Pabbata Matta ca Malhi ca Dhammadasiya eta daharabbikkhuniyo Jambudipa idhagata. | vinayam vacayimsu pitakam Anuradhapuravhaye vinaye panca vacesum satta c’ eva pakarane. | Saddhammanandi Soma ca Giriddhi pi ca Dasiya Dhamma ca dhammapala ca vinaye ca visarada | dhutavada ca Mahila Sobhana ca Dhammatapasa Naramitta mahapanna vinaye ca visarada | 15 theriyovadakusala Sata Kali ca Uttara, eta tada bhikkhuniyo upasampanna dipalanjake. | abbinnata ca Sumana saddhammavarnsakovida, eta tada bhikkhuniyo dhutaraga samahita | sudhotamanasaxnkappa saddhammavinaye rata visatibhikkhunisahassehi Uttara sadhusammata sujata kulaputtena Abhayena yasassina. | vinayam tava vacesum pitakam Anuradhasavhaye nikaye panca vacesum satta c’ eva pakarane. | abhinnata ca Mahila saddhammavarnsakovida Samanta Kakavannassa eta rajassa dhitara | 20 purohitassa dhita ca Girikali bahussuta Dasi Kali tu dhuttassa dhitaro sabbapapika, | eta tada bhikkhuniyo sabbapali durasada odatamanasamkappa saddhammavinaye rata | visatibhikkhunisahassehi saha Rohanam agata, pujita naradevena Abhayena yasassina vinayam vacayimsu pitakam Anuradhapuravhaye. | 11. 12. Comp. 15, 77. 78. — 11. Hema AGZn, Soma F. Hema? — Pasadapala N, Pasadassala FY. — 12. Salla YF. — ekadasa bhikkhuniyo? Comp. Mahavamsa, p. 115, 1. 10. — 13. nikaye panca (comp. vv. 19. 33)? — 14. Saddhammanandi N, Sadhammanavantamga F, Saddhammacandabha (“ha A) Y. — Naramitta (Naram 0 F) mahapafma X, Nagamissama Y. — 18. Uttara sadhusammata X, Uttara samasammata Z, Uttara sasammata (sa- samatta Al) AG. We probably ought to read thus: visatibhikkhunisahassehi saha . . . agata. Comp. vv. 23. 25. 32. — pujita kulaputtena? (comp, vv. 23. 26. 37.) — 20. dhitaro? - — 21. Dasikalasaguttassa Y, Dasikali tu dhuttassa N, Dasikalahu bhuttassa F. — dhitaro sabbapalika? — 22. sabbapali? — 23. As the Bhikkhunis mentioned here lived in Anura- dhapura, I believe that we ought to read: Rohanamhfa] agata. Probably these Bhikkhunis came from Rohana to Anuradhapura at the time when 7 98 18, 24 — 38. Mahadevi ca Padurna Hemasa ca yasassini Unnala Anjali Suma | eta tada bhikkhuniyo chalabhinna mahiddhika 25 so]asabhikkbunisahassehi saha Samghamittagata, | pujita Tissarajena Devanampiyayasassina vinayam vacayimsu pitakam Anuradhapuravhaye. | Mahasona ca Datta ca Sivala ca vicakkhana Rupasobhini appamatta pujita Devamanusa | Naga ca Nagamitta ca Dhammagutta ca Dasiya cakkhubhuta Samudda ca saddhammavamsakovida | Sapatta Channa Upali ca Revata sadhusammata eta venayagginam agga Somanadevassa atraja | Mala Khema ca Tissa ca dhammakathikamuttama 30 vinayam tava vacayimsu pathamam apagate bhaye. | Sivala ca Maharuha saddhammavamsakovida pasadika Jambudipa sasanena baliu jana | visatibhikkhunisahassehi saha Jambudipagata yacita naradevena Abhayena yasassina. | vinayam vacayimsu pitakam Anuradhapuravhaye nikaye panca vacesum satta c’ eva pakarane. | sa-Samuddanava devi Sivala rajadhitaro visarada Nagapali Nagamitta ca pandita | Mahila bhikkhunipala ca vinaye ca visarada Naga ca Nagamitta ca saddhammavamsakovida, 35 eta tada bhikkhuniyo upasampauna dipalahjake | sabba ’va jatisampanna sasane vissuta tada solasannam bhikkhunisahassanam uttama dhurasammata | pujita Kutikannena Abhayena yasassina vinayam vacayimsu pitakam Anuradhapuravhaye. [ Culanaga ca Dlianna ca Sona ca sadhusammata abhinnata ca Sanha ca saddhammavamsakovida | Abhaya DutthagSmani , whose father Kakavanna had been king of Rohana, and whose sister was the chief of these Bhikkhunis, transferred his resi- dence to Anuradhapura, after the defeat of Elara. 24. Unala YF. — 25. saha Samghamitta idhagata N. This passage is hopelessy corrupted. The names both of Samghamitta and of Devanampiya (v. 26) seem to be out of place here. — 29. v en ay i kan am agga? — Chanda Y. — 30. apagato Y. — 31. pasadika CM. — pasadita Jambu- dipe sasanena bahu jane? — 34. "samuddanava Z. — 38. Dhanna ca N, Dhamma ca F ; these words are wanting in Y. 18, 39—54. 99 Gamikadhita mahapanna Mahatissa visarada Culasumana Mahasumana Mahakali ca pandita | sambhavita kule jata Lakkhadhamma mahayasa, Dipanaya mahapanna Rohane sadhusammata | 40 abhinnata ca Samudda saddhainmavamsakovida vibhajjavadi vinayadhara ubho ta samghasobhana, | eta c’ anna ca bhikkbuniyo upasampanna dipalanjake odatamanasamkappa saddhammavinaye rata | bahussuta sutadhara papabahiraka ca ta jalitva aggikkhandha va nibbuta ta mahayasa. | idani atthi ahnayo therika majjhima nava vibhajjavadi vinayadhara sasane pavenipalaka bahussuta silasampanna obhasenti mahim iman ti. | Sivo ca dasa vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo, patitthapesi aramara viharam Nagaranganam. | 45 Suratisso dasa vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo, karesi pancasataramam ularam puiinam anappakam. | Suratissam gahetvana Damila Senaguttaka duve dvadasa vassani rajjam dhaminena karayum. | atrajo Mutasivassa Aselo Senaguttake hantvana dasa vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo. | Eiaro nama namena Aselam hantvana khattiyo catutalisa vassani rajjam dhammena karayi. | chandagatim agantvana na dosabhayamohagatim tulabhuto va hutvana dhammena anusasi so. | 50 hemantam pi ca gimhanam vassanam pi na vassati, satatam megho vassati sattasattaham pi vassati. j tini adhikaranani asi . . vinicchi bhupati, rattim Va vassati megho diva pana na vassati. | Kakavannassa yo putto Abhayo nama khattiyo dasayodhaparivaro, varano Kandulo tahim, | hanitva battimsa rajanam vamsam katvana ekato, catuvisati vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo. | bhanavaram attharasamam. mahavaram nitthitam. 40. Rohane X, Rosamano Z, Rosiimane (“ne G) AG. — 41. vibhajja- vadi? — 44. vibhajjavadi Y, °daX. — obhasenta A, obhaseti GX, obha- senti Z. Comp. v. 2. — 45. Sivo BF, Sivo AGZn. — vv. 47. 48 are wanting in YF. — vv. 51 — 53 are wanting in BG2Z. — 5J. vutthahi X, vatthati (corrected into vassati) Gl, vassati A. — 52. ca AFG, va N. 7 * 100 19 , 1 - 10 . XIX. Pasadam mapayi raja ubbedham navabkumikam anagghikan catuiuukbam, pariccaga timsa kot.iyo. | sudhabhumi thulaselam mattikam itthakaya ca visuddhabhumika c’ eva ayojalam tato marumpam | isasakkharapasana atthaatthalika sila phalikarajatena dva- dasa, | etani bhumikammani karapetvana khattiyo bhikkhusamgham samodhanetva cetiyavattasammiti. | Indagutto Dhammaseno Piyadassi mahakathi 5 Buddho Dhammo ca Samgho ca Mittanno ca visarado | Anattano Mahadevo Dhammarakkhito bahussuto Uttaro Cittagutto ca Indagutto ca pandito [ Suriyagutto mahanago patibhanavisarado, ete kbo cuddasa sabbe Jambudipa idhagata. | Siddhattho Mangalo Sumano Padumo capi Sivali Candagutto Suriyagutto Indagutto ca Sagaro Mittaseno Jayaseno Acalena ca dvadasa, | Suppatitthito Brahma ca Nandisena Sumanadevi ca putto matu pitu c’ eva gihibhuta tayo jana. | karapesi Mahatliupam mahaviharam uttamam 10 anaggham visati datva pariccago . . . | XIX. vv. 2 — 4 are wanting in BG2. — 2. mattika A. — parup- pam G, parupapam ca Z, marumpam N, badumam F, pari A. We ought to read marumbam; comp. Mabavamsa, p. 169, 1.8 (with the correction, p. XXIV); Thupavamsa (MS. Burnout 142, fol. kho') : „tassopari ayojalam, tassopari khinasavasamanerehi Ilimavantato aliatam sugandhamarumbam. “ — 3. “pasana N, “pasana G. — atthaatthalika (attha -f- ali) sila? — 4. cetiyacattasamiti A, 0 avattasammuti Z, 0 avattasamiti G, 0 avatthasamiti F, 0 avattasammiti N. cetiyavatta[m] sammitam? comp. Mahav., p. 172, 1. 10; p. 173, 1. 1. — 5. Mittako (°ke Gl) Y, Mittano F, Ttunno (sic, in- stead of [Mijttunno?) N. Mahav. Tika: Mittanna. — 9. Nandiseno. — mata pita c’ eva? Comp. Mahav. Tika, fol. tarn: „patkavikampauadihi acchari- yehi vimhito raja attano samipe thitam parihbhamauadandakagahakam amacca- puttaui tvam konamo tata ’ti pucchi. aham Suppatitthitabrahma nama maha- raja ’ti alia, tava pita ko nama tata ’ti vatva mayham pita Nandiseno nama maharaja ’ti vutte, tava mata kanama ’ti pucchi. mama mata Sumanadevi nama maharaja ’ti aha. tenahu porana: Suppatitthitabrahma ca Nandiseno Sumauadeviya putto mata pita c’ eva gihibhuta tayo jana ’ti.“ — 10. The end of the verse may he written thus: pariccagain cattari ca; see Mahav., p. 195, 1. 8. 19, 11 — 20, 1. 101 gamikavattam sunitva bhikkhusamghassa bhasato adasi gamikabhesajjam phasuviharam . . . . | bhikkhuninam vaco sutva harikale subhasitam adasi c’ eva bhikkhuninam yadiccham rajaissaro. | silakathupam akaresi viharan Cetiyapabbate karesi asanasalam Jalakam nama uttamam. | Girinamaniganthassa vutthokase tahim kato Abhayagiriti pannatti voharo samajayatha. | Alavatto Sabhiyo ca Panayo Palaya-Dathika cuddasavassam satta masa panca rajano karayum. | 15 Saddhatissassayam putto Abhayo nama khattiyo Dathikam Damilam hantva rajjam karesi khattiyo. | Abhayagirim patitthapesi silathupam cetiyamantare. dvadasavassam panca masani rajjam karesi khattiyo. | satta yodha Abhayassa aramam panca karayum; Uttiyo ca Saliyo ca Miilo Tisso ca Pabbato Devo ca Uttaro c’ eva ete kho satta yodhino. | viharam Dakkbinam nama Uttiyo nama karayi, Saliyo Sal iy aramam, Mfdo ca Mulaasayam, | Pabbato Pabbataramam, Tisso Tissaramam kare, Devo ca Uttaro c’ eva Devagaram akamsu te. | 20 Kakavannassa atrajo Mahatisso maliipati dinne kathikam katvana salikkhette mahipati adasi Summatherassa santacittassa jhayino. | yantam kathikam katvana tini vassam anunakam mahadanam pavattesi bhikkhu kotisahassiyo. | katapunno mahapaiino Abhayo Dutthagamani kayassa bheda sappanno tusitam kayam upagami. | bhanavaram ekunavisatimam. XX. Kakavannassa yo putto Tisso nama ’ti vissuto karapesi mahathupam Tisso viharam uttamo. | 11. garaikavatthara Y, kamikavattani F, gamikavattakani N. — 12. hani- kale N, marikale F. I do not understand this word. — 13. silathupam A, comp. Mahav. , p. 202, 1. 1. — vihare A. — 14. vutthokase N, phuttho- kase F, putthokase BGZ, vutthokase A. Comp. Mahav., p. 203, 1. 6. - — • gato BFGZ, kato AN. — 15. The first two names ought to be Pul a- hattho and Bahiyo. — sattamasam? satta masani? — 17. Abhaya- giri YF. — 22. yante? — bhikkhu kot°? — 23. mahapuiino FY. 102 20, 2 — 15. viharam karapayati Kallakalena uttamam annan ca baku viharam Saddhatissena karitam. | caturasitisahassani dhammakkhandham maharaham, ekekadhammakkhandhassa pujam ekekam akarayi. | pasadan ca akarayi manunnam sattabhumikam, lohitthakena chadesi Saddhatisso mahayaso; | Lohapasadakam nama samanna pathamam ahu. 5 karapesi kharapindam, Mahathupe varuttame | hatthipakaram karesi parivaram manoramam, caturassan ca karesi talakam tavakalikam. | attharasani vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo. katva afinam bahu punnam datva danam anappakam kiiyassa bheda sappanho tusitam kayam upagami. | Saddhatissassa atrajo Thulathano ’ti vissuto k:\rapesi maharamam viharam Alakandaram. dasaham ekamasan ca rajjam karesi khattiyo. j Saddhatissassa atrajo Lanjatisso ’ti vissuto navavassam chamasam ca issariyam anusasi so. | karapesi tilancanam Mahathupe varuttame, io patitthapesi aramam Kumbhiladhimanoramam, | karapesi Dighathupam Thuparamapuratthito, silakancuke karesi Thupamaramamuttame. | Lajjitissamhi uparate kanittho tassa karayi rajjam chal eva vassani Khallatamigamimako. | kam Maharattako nama hantva Khallatakam camupati rajjam karesi dinekam paduttho akatannuko. | tassa ranho kanittho tu Vattagamaninamako duttham senapatim hantva pancamasam rajjam kari. | Pulahattho tu Damilo tini vassani karayi. XX, 2. Gallakalena ABG, Gallakalenain Z, Kallahalena N, Kallaka- lena F. K allakal en am? comp. Mahav., p. 200, 1. 10. — aimam GlX, afifie Y. — bahu A B, bahu GFZn. — viharam G1XZ, vibare ABG2. — 7. bahum ABG2. — 9. Laiicatisso FG1Z, Lafijatisso N, Lajjitisso, Lajji- tisso BG2 (comp. Mah., pp. 201. 202.) — 10. Kumbhiladim 0 Z, Kumbhi- ladim m° A, Kumbhiladhim 0 BGX. K u m b b i 1 a t i m an o r a main? See Mali., p. 201, 1. 6. — 12. Lafijatissamhi N, Lancatissamhi FG1, Lajjikat 0 ABG2, Lajjit 0 Z. — 13. Maharantako AB, Kammabarattako ZG1, Kammaharantako G2, Kammabarathako F, Kammaharattbako N. — Khallatabhupatim ABG2Z. tarn Maharattako nama hantva Khallatakam camupati? Comp. Mahav., p. 202, 1. 10; the excellent Mahavamsa MS. of the India Off. Library (no. 91) reads Maharattako. 20 , 15 — 31 . 103 duve vassani Bahiyo camupati rajjam kari. | hantva tam Panayamaro satta vassani karayi. tam hantva Palayamaro satta masani karayi. | tam hantva Dathiyo nama duve vassani karayi. ete panca Damilajata antarika ca bhupati satta masani cuddasa vassani karayum rajjam. | Vattagamani maharaja agantvana mahayaso Dathikam Damilam hantva sayam rajjam akarayi. | Vattagamani Abhayo so evam dvadasa vassani pancamasesu adito raja rajjam akarayi. | pitakattayapalin ca tassa atthakatham pi ca mukhapathena anesum pubbe bhikkhu mahamati. | hanim disvana sattanam tada bhikkhu samagata ciratthitattham dhammassa potthakesu likhapayum. | tass’ accaye Mahaculi Mahatisso akarayi rajjam cuddasa vassani dhammena ca samena ca. | saddhasampanno so raja katva punnani nekadha catuddasannam vassanam accayena divam aga. | Vattagamanino putto Coranago ’ti vissuto rajjam dvadasa vassani coro hutva akarayi. | Mahaculissa yo putto Tisso nama ’ti vissuto rajjam karesi dipamhi tini vassani khattiyo. | Sivo nama yo raja Anuladeviya samvasi, ekavassan ca dvemasam issariyam anusasi so. | Vatuko nama yo raja Damilo annadesiko ekavassan ca dvemasam issariyam anusasi so. | Tisso namasi so raja katthabhatiti vissuto, ekavass’ ekamasaii ca rajjam karesi tavade. j Niliyo nama namena Damilaraja ’ti vissuto karesi rajjam temasam issariyam anusasi so. | Anula nama sa itthi hanitvana naruttame catumasam Tambapannimhi issariyam anusasi sa. | Kutikannatisso nama Mahaculissa atrajo 17. antarika ca bh° ABGR, antanika va bh° F, anantarika ca bh° CMd. antarika camupati? — 19. “masesuFY, “masehi N. — 20. °ka- tham pi ca XG, °kathani ca M, “katani ca CR, “katha pi ca AB. bbi- kkhu mahamati! — 21. bhikkhu! — 26. Sivo AC. — S° ca (or: ’ti) nama? — so Y. — 27 a . so AZ. — 30 a . sa BFGZn, ya A and the stanza of the Porana, Introd., p. 6. 15 20 25 30 104 20, 31 — 21, 6. uposathaghcaram karesi vihare Cetiyapabbate, | gharassa purato karesi silathupam manoramam, ropesi bodhim tatth’ eva, mahavattbum akarayi. | bhikkhuninam dadatthaya jantagkaram akarayi, Padumassare ca uyyane pakaran ca akarayi, | nagarassa gopanattkaya parikham khanapesi so, pakaran ca akaresi sattahattbam anunakam. | Kbemam va Duggam ganbapesi talakam vatikalikam, Setuppaladi ganbapesi Vannakalam manoramam. 35 dvevisati ca vassani rajjam k:\resi kbattiyo. | bbanavaram visatimam. XXL Kutikannassa atrajo Abhayo nama kbattiyo Mahatbupavare ramme sayani dassanam agami. | kbinasava vasi pattii vimala suddhamanasa sajjhayanti dhatugabbbamhi pujanatthaya ganbati. | raja sutvana sajjbayam dbatugabbhe manorame thupam padakkbinam katva catudvaresu naddasa. | samantato namassitva narindo sajjbayam uttamam iti raja vicintesi: sajjhayam tattha ganhati? | catudvare na ganhati, bahiddhapi na ganhare, 5 anto pi dhatugabbhasmim sajjbayam gauhanti pesala. | aham pi dattkukamo mhi dbatugabbham varuttamam 33. atthaya A Z B2 G2, adatthaya I?1 G1 F, dadatthaya N. tad(a) atth- aya? — 35. setuppaladim AB. — vannamalam Z. — I conjecture: Kheniam ca Duggam khanapesi (or: ganbapesi? see 22, 64) talakam tavakalikam, Setupp alavap im khanapesi (ganhape6i?) Vannakalim ma- noramam. Comp. 21, 17; 20, 6; Mah., p. 210, 1. 10. XXI, 1. samgham dassanam agami? comp. v. 6; 13, 15. — 2. sajjhayam dhatug 0 ? — „ganhati“ is said here and at v. 4 metri causa instead of „ganhanti“. Comp. Therigatba (Phayre MS., fol. na): „ko nu te idam akkhasi ajanantassa ajanato?" Samy. Nikaya (Phayre MS. vol. I, fol. ku) : y , akkheyyasaiinino satta akkheyyasmim patitthita, akkheyyam aparinnava yogam ayanti maccnno, akkhevyam ca pariuuaya akkhataram na manna ti.“ — 4. tattha X, tassa Y. kattha? — 5 a . ganhanti? 21 , 6 — 21 . 105 sajjhayam pi sunissami bhikkhusamghan ca dassanam. | ranno samkappam afinaya Sakko devanam issaro paturahu dhatugabbhasmim there hi ajjhabhasatha: | raja bhante datthukamo dhatugabbhassa dassanam. saddhanurakkhanatthaya dhatugabbham nayimsu te. | disva dhatugharam raja vedajato katanjali akasi dhatusakkaram mahapuja ca sattaham. | madhubhandapujam karesi sattakkhattum varuttamam, akasi sabbapujaii ca sattakkhattum anagghikam, | 10 annam pujaii ca karesi sattakkhattum yatharaham, sattakkhattum ca karesi dipapujam punappunam, | pupphapujam akaresi sattakkhattum manoramam, puritajalapujam sattaham dakapujaii ca sattaham. | pavalamayajalaii ca karapesi anagghikam Mahathupe patimukka civaram iva parutam. | dalham katva dipadandam thupapadasamantato sappinalin ca puretva dipah jalapesi sattadha. | telanalim puretva thupapadasamantato teladipan jalapesi cuddasakkhattum punappunam. | 15 gandhodakena puretva kilanjam katvana matthake pattharetva uppalahatthe sattakkhattum akarayi. | thupassa pacchimokase talake Khemanamake yojetva yantakam tattha udakapujam akarayi. | samanta yojanam sabbam kusumanan ca ropayi, akasi pupphagumbah ca Mahathupe varuttame. | makulapupphitam puppham samanetvana khattiyo akaresi pupphagumbarn cuddasakkhattum punappunam. | nanapuppham samocitva salindam sahapakaram pupphathambham karetvana sattakkhattuxn punappunam. | 20 . . . addasa nanarupam vicitrakam 7. there hi X, there ti G, there AI), theranam Z. — 8. saddhanu- rakkhanatthaya C. te XGl, tam Y. — 9. mahapujan ca N, mahapu- jani Z. — 10 b . sabbapujam ABG2Z, gabbhapujam GlX. sappipujam? — 11. aujanapujam ca karesi? Comp. Mahav., p. 212, 1. 2. — 12. thupa- pujam GlX. — ekapujam Y, dakapujam X. — 13. patimukkam? — - pa- rutam N, paruto AFG1Z, parutaBG2. — 16. pattharitva AZ. — 17. Tissa- namake ABG2Z. — dakapujam N. — 18. kusumani (which may be the correct reading) ABG2, kusumanam FG1Z, kusumagam N. — akaresi N. — 19. makulap 0 GlX, vakulap 0 Y. — akasi FY. — 20. samocinitva Z. 106 21, 21—34. . . . akasi samanarupani khattiyo. | sudkakammam akaresi Makatkupe varuttame. abkisekam karitvana akasi sudkamangalam. | Sakyaputto makaviro assattkadumasantike sabbadkammapatividdko akarayi anuttaro. | tkito Meghavane ramme yo rukkho dipajotano tam bodhim pi abkisekam kkattiyo akasi sinanam. | vassam vuttka pavaresum bkikkkusamgkasukkavaka, 25 pavarananuggakaya pavaranadanam akasi so. ] adasi candanam danam bkikkkusamgke ganuttame, balabkerin ca adasi Makatkupe varuttame. | lankamadamada c’ eva settkakanatanataka sabbesam samkkaritvana Makatkupe adasi so. | visakhamase punnamayam sambuddko upapajjatka, tam masarn pujanattkaya attkavisati akarayi. | Makamegkavane ramme Tkuparame varuttame karesi uposatkagaram ubkovikaramautare. [ aka annam bakum pufinam danafi capi auappakam, so attkavisati vassani rajjam karesi kkattiyo. | Kutikannassa yo putto Naganamo : ti kkattiyo karesi ratanamayam ittkakadini varuttame, | dkammasauan ca sabbattka Ambattkalatkupamuttame. giribkandagakauam nama makapujam akarayi. | yavata Lankadipamki bkikkku attki supesala sabbesan civaram datva bhikkkusamghe ganuttame, dvadasani so vassam rajjam karesi kkattiyo. | Makadatkikassa putto Amandagamaui nama Abkayo iti vissuto 21. samanar 0 X, sammani r° GlZ, sabbani r° G2B, sammar" A. — 22. akaresi ABG2, ca karesi Z, karissanti XG1. — vv. 22 b — 28 are wanting in B. — subham 0 N, sudham 0 F, thupam 0 Z, mangalam AG. Comp. Mahav., p. 212, 1. 7. — 23. pakasesi Z. akarayi is corrupted; at 13, 50 we have instead of it: „buddho asi“. — 24. thite N, pitthito (°te M) AFGZ. — yo F, gho AGZn. — dipajotako AZ. — sinanam N, dhinnamanam (“tam A) AFG, bhupati Z. sinapanam? — 25. bhikkhusamgha su- khavaha? — pavarauad” C. — adasi Z. — 27. lamkamamada Y, 1am- karaamadasada F. Comp. 6, 69. V. 27 b seems to be a conglomeration of fragments of two ditferent verses, the first beginning (comp. 6, 69): „sabbe sam[gham] . . — 28. vesakhamase. — 3 1. itthakadim N, °di YF. — 32. girigauhigabanan F, giribhandikan B G2, giribhandikakan Z, giri- gandikakan Gl, girim bhandikam A. Comp. Mahav., p. 214, 1. 2. — 34. “Ba- mako Y. 21 , 34—48. 107 khanapesi udapanam Gamenditalakam pi ca, | Rajatalenam karesi, thupassa rajatamayam chattaticliattam karesi Thuparame varuttame, | 35 Mahavihare Thuparame ubhopasadamuttame bhandagaram akaresi bhandalenam ca sabbaso, | maghataii ca akaresi Tambapannitale pi ca. nava vass’ attha nmsani rajjam karesi khattiyo. | tass’ eva kanitthako raja Kanirajanu ’ti vissuto paripunnatmi vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo. | Amandagamaniputto Culabhayo ’ti vissuto patitthapesi so raja Gaggararamam uttamam. | rajjani karesi vass’ ekam Ciilabhayo mahipati. Sivali nama sa itthi Revati iti vissuta | 40 catumasam rajjam karesi rafino Amandadhitaro. Amandabhagineyyo tu Sivalim apaniya tarn | Uanago ’ti namena rajjam akarayi pure. Ilanago nama raja sunitva kapijatakam | Tissaduratalake ca khanapesi arindamo. chabi vassehi so rajjam karesi dipalanjake. | Sivo ’ti nama namena Candamukho ’ti vissuto akasi Manikaramam vihare Issaravhaye. | tassa ranno mahesi ca Damiladeviti vissuta tan neva game attano vattam adasi arame. satta mas’ attha vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo. | 45 Tisso ca nama so raja Yasalalo ’ti vissuto satta mas’ attha vassani raja rajjam akarayi. | dvarapalassa atrajo Subharaja ’ti vissuto karapesi Subharamam Villaviharam manoramam, | pariveniini karesi attanamena samakam. chamhi vassamln so raja issariyam anusasi so. j bhanavaram ekavisatimam. 34. pi ca ABG'2, ca karayi Z, iva Gl, idha X. — 36. bhaudagharam (instead of bhandalenam) X. — 38. tasseva kanitthako N, Tisso nama so (yo C) YF. — 41. I believe that dhitaro ought to be corrected into dhi- tika which looks very mucli like it in Burmese characters. — 44. Mani- karamam Mn, Manik 0 ABCGR, Sanik 0 F. Man ikar a gama nr? Comp. Mahav., p. 218, 1. 9. — 45 * ) . c is wanting in BG2. — tanneva game N, tanecagame F, tannekome AG1Z. — vattam F, vattam N, vannam A, van- nam GlZ. — 47. Mahav.: Valliviharakaip. — 48. samakam YF, samakam N. — chahi AZ, chamhi BGX. — vassehi C. chahi vassehi? comp. v. 43. 108 22 , 1—13. XXII. Vasabho nama so raja vihare Cetiyapabbate dasa thupani karesi kittiphalavaruttame. | Issariye nama arame viharam ca manoramam karesi uposathagharam dassaneyyam manoramam. j balabherin ca karesi Mucelam viharam uttamam. sampatte tini vassani chalani civaram ada. | sabbattha Lankadipasmim arame santi jinnake, karesi sabbattha avasam dhammikapujam maharaham. cetiyagharam karesi Thuparame varuttame. 5 karesi pujayi raja catucattalisa anunakam. | Mahavihare Thiiparame vihare Cetiyapabbate paccekani sahassani teladipan jalapayi. | Mayantim Rajuppalavapim Vaham Kolambanamakam Mahanikkhavattivapim Maharamettim eva ca | Kehalam Kalivapin ca Jambutih Cathamanganam Abhivaddhamanakan ca icc ekadasa vapiyo. | dvadasa matikan c’ eva subhikkhattham akarayi. punnam nanavidham katva pakaram parikham pure, | dvarattalam akarayi, mahavatthun ca karayi. 10 tahim tahim pokkharani khanapesi nagare pure, | ummaggena pavesayi udakam rajakunjaro. catucattalisa vassani rajjam karesi issaro 'ti. | Vasabhassa atrajo putto Tisso ’ti vissuto aramam Mangalanamakam karapesi mahipati. karesi rajjam dipasmim tini vassani tavade ’ti. j Tissassa atrajo putto Gajabahukagamani karapesi mahathupam Abhayarame manorame. | XXII, 1. kittipalo v° BG2, kittipalav 0 AG1. Possibly we should cor- rect: Cittalakute varuttame. Comp. Mahav., p. 221, 1.2. — 3. chalani ABFZ, chalani G, [chalajnam N. A chacivaram instead of the ticivara is men- tioned in the Mali., p. 229, 1. 6. — 4. santi Y, panti X. samkhari? — 5. pu- jayo? — 7. Mayenti A, Mayanti BG1, Yanti ZG2, Cavantim N, Yassanti F. — Kolambagainakam , Mahav. and Mahav. Tika. — Mahanikkavittivapim ca A, Mahanikavidhivapiin Mahav. — Maharamettim X, Mahamettiyam Y, Mahagamadvim Mahav. — 8. Kolivasam Mahav. — Jambudim F, Jambu- tim GIN, Jambuttini Z, Jambutthaip B, Jamhuvim A. Cambuddhim Ma- hav. — Vatamanganam Mahav. — 9. parikhapakaram pure Y, parinapaka- raip pure F. 22 , 14—28. 109 matattham Gamanintunam talakam karesi nayako, karapesi ca aramam Rammakam nama issaro. dvevisati vassani dipe rajjam akarayiti. | Mahallanago ’ti namena Tambapannimhi issaro Sajilakandakaramam, dakkhine Gotapabbatam, | 15 Dakapasanaaramam, viharam Salipabbatam karapesi Tanavelim, Rokane Nagapabbatam. | aramam Girisalikam karapesi vinayako. chavassam rajjam karetva gato so ayusamkhaye ’ti. | Mahallanagassa yo putto Bhatutisso ’ti vissuto Mabameghavanuyyanam karapanatthaya issaro | parikkhepesi parikkhepam pakaram dvarattalakam karapesi ca so raja aramam Varanamakam. | Gamanim nama talakam khanapetva vinayako padasi bhikkhusamghassa Bhatutisso vinayako. | 20 khanapesi talakain tam Randhakandakanamakam, kares’ uposathagaram Thuparame manorame. j mahadiinam pavattesi bhikkhusamghe vintiyako catuvisati vassani rajjam dipe akarayiti. | tassa kanittho namena Tisso iti suvissuto karesi uposathagaram Abhayarame manorame. | karesi dvadasatthanain Mahaviharamuttame, viharam karesi so thupam Dakkhinaramasavhaye, | tato annam bahu punnam kalyane buddhasasane. attharasani vassani issariyam akarayiti. | 25 Tissassa atrajo putto rajaraha dve bhatuka rajjam karesu dipamhi tini vassani nayaka. | Vafikanasikatisso tu Anuradhapure rajjam tini vassani karayi punnakammanurupava. | Yankanasikatissassa accaye karayi suto 14. matattham N, yatthava FGZ, yattha ca A B. Comp. Mahav., p. 223, 1.9. — 15. Sajilakandakaramam N, Pajilakandak 0 F, Sajilakandhak 0 BG. Mahav.: Pejalaka. — Gotapabbatam X, Golapabbatam G1 , Kotip 0 B G2. Mahav.; Golap" A, Ilolakapabbate Z. — 1G. Mahav.: Naceli. — -17. Giri- halikam F. Mahav.: Antogiririhalikam. — 18. Aliutisso Y. — Bhavaran 0 F. Gavaran 0 ? Comp. Mahav., p. 224, 1. 10. — 21. Rannakauandakanamakam F, Rannakaudakan 0 B, Rattakandakan 0 A, Rannakanandakan 0 G, Rannakanna- kan° Z. — 24. dvadasatthane A, comp. Mahav., p. 225, 1. 6. — 25. ba- hum A. — 26. atraja putta? — vv. 27 — 31 are wanting in N. 110 22 , 28—44. rajjam dvavisa vassani Gajabahukagamani. | Gajabahuss’ accayena pasuro tassa rajino rajjam Mahallakanago chabbassani akarayi. | Mahallanagass’ accayena putto Bhatikatissako 30 catuvisati vassani Lankarajjam akarayi. | Bhatikatissaccayena tassa kanittha-Tissako attharasa sama rajjam Lankadipe akarayi. | Kanitthatissaccayena tassa putto akarayi rajjam dve yeva vassani Khujjanago ’ti vissuto. | Khujjanagakanittho tain raja ghatiya bhatikam ekavassam Kunjanago rajjam Lankaya karayiti. | Sirinago laddhajayo Anuradhapure vare Lankarajjam akaresi vassan’ ekunavisati. | Sirinago nama namena Mahathupam varuttamam 35 pujesi ratanamalena, chattam thupe akarayi. | karesi posathagararn Lohapasadam uttamam, unavisati vassani rajjam karesi khattiyo ’ti. | Sirinagassa atrajo Abhayo nama mabipati adasi bhikkbusamghassa dvesatasahassarupiya. | pasanavedim akasi mahabodhivaruttame. dvavisa vassani raja issariyam anusasi so ’ti. | tassa kanittho raja tu Tissako isi vissuto Abhayarame Mahathupe karesi chattam uttamam, | Mahjimeghavane ramme Abhayarame manorame 40 akasi suvannathupam ubhoviharamuttame. | sutva gilanasuttantam Devatherassa bhasato adasi gilanabhesajjam pancavasam varuttamam. | rattim acchariyam disva aramam Dassamalinim, mahabodhimanorame diparupe patitthasi. [ tassa ranho tu vijite dipanti akappiyam bahum, vitandavade dipetva dusesum jinasasanam. | disvana raja papabhikkhu dusentam jinasasanam 28. dvavisati BGZ. — 29. pasuro Z, payuro F, sapasuro ABG. sa- suro? — 33. raja ABG2Z, raja Gl, rajam N, bliajam F. — Kuujauago GIZn, Kuncanago F, Khujjanamgo A, Kujjanago BG2. — 37. rupiyain A. — vv. 42. 43 are wanting in BG2Z. — 42. rattim acch 0 N, tattiniceh 0 F, varassa acch 0 AG. — Dipamalinim N, Dassamalini (°ni F) AFG. — dipa- rupe (“ruse F) X, disanipe AG. — patitthavi A, patitthasi GX. pati- tthapi? — 43. cipanti AG, dipanti X. dipenti? — 44. “bhikkhum Mn. °hliikkhu? — dusseute A, dusente BG2, dusentam GIZn, dusantam F. 22, 44—58. Ill Kapilamaccam adaya akasi papaniggaham. | vitandavadam madditva jotayitvana sasanam Hatthapanhihi pasanam ada Meghavanodanam. dvevisati tu vassani rajjam karesi issaro ’ti. | 45 Tissassa atrajo putto Sirinago ’ti vissuto rajjam karesi dipamhi dve vassani anunakam. | mahabodhissa samanta pakaran cata mandapam akarayi pasadikam Sirinagavhayo ayam. | Asaiigatisso ’ti namena Mahathupe varuttame sovannamayani chattani karesi thfipamattbake. | manimayam sikhathupam Mahathupe varuttame tassa kammassa nissande puja karesi tavade. | Andhakavindasuttantam Devatherassa bhasato catudvare dhuvayagum patthapesi arindamo. | 50 Vijayakumarako nama Sirinagassa atrajo pituno accaye rajjam ekavassam akarayi. | rajjam cattari vassani Samgkatisso akarayi, Mahathupamhi chattam so hemakamman ca karayi. | Samghabodhi nama namena raja asi susilava, dve vassan’ eva so raja rajjam karesi khattiyo. | ramme Meghavanuyyane dhuvayagum arindamo patthapesi salakaggam Mahaviharamuttame. | Abhayo nama namena Meghavanno ’ti vissuto karesi silamandapam Mahaviharamuttame. | 55 padhanabhumim karesi Mahaviharapacchato, karesi bodhiparivaram silavedim anuttamam, | silaparikhan ca karesi toranan ca maharaham, karesi silapallankam mahabodhigharuttame. | uposathagharam karesi Dakkhinaramamantare. adasi so mahadanarn bhikkhusamghaganuttame. | 45. vetullavadam Y (except Gl). This may be the correct reading (see Mahav., p. 227, 1. G). — Hatthapauhihi N, Hatlhapanihi F, Hatthipannihi (°ntihi M) Z, Hatthipannihi (“nnilii B) ABG. — • pasanam B, sahanam F, baliinam N. Hattha- (or: Satta-) p a u n i k a pasa d am? comp. Mahav., p. 226, 1. 11. — 47. catha? — I give this stanza according to N, the reading of which is confirmed by Mahav., p. 228, 11. 8. 9. YF (instead of the whole stanza): panakam (patakam Z ; F omit3 this word) p alia rani ca Samandapam akarayi pasadakam. — 48 a is wanting in N. — Asamgahnlisso B G. Read: Samghatisso. — 52 1 ’ is wanting in YF. — 57. mahabodlii- k varuttame ABG2Z, “garuttame Gl. 112 22, 59—73. katva rajagharain raja mahavatthum manoramam bhikkhusamghassa datvana paccha raja patiggahi. | vesakhapujam karesi raja Meghavane tada. 60 terasani hi vassani issariyam akasi so ’ti. | atrajo Meghavannassa Jetthatisso mahipati rajjam karesi dipamhi Tambapannimhi issaro. | manim mahaggham pujesi Mahathupe varuttame. katvana lohapasadam pujetva manim uttamam | Manipasado ’ti pannattim karapesi narasabho. karapetvana aramam Pacinatissapabbatam | padasi bhikkhusamghassa narindo Tissasavhayo. Alambagamatalakam ganhapetva mahipati | attha samvaccharam pujam karapesi narasabho. 65 rajjam karesi so raja dasa vassani Tambapannike. | Jetthatissaccaye tassa Mahaseno kanitthako sattavisati vassani raja rajjam akarayi. | tada so raja cintesi sasane dvisu bhikkhusu ke dhammavadino bhikkhu ke ca adhammavadino, ke lajji ke alajjino? | vieinetva imani attharn gavesanto lajjipuggale addasa papake bhikkhu assamane patirupake. | putikunapasadise vattam va nilamakkhike asante assamanake addasa patirupake | Dummittam Papasonam ca ahhe ca alajjipuggale; 70 upento papake bhikkhu attharn dhamman ca pucchi so. | Dummitto Papasono ca anne ca alajjipuggala rahogata mantayanti dusanatthaya subbate. | ubhosamaggabhavissam aminnatam Kumarakassape akappiyan ti dipesum dussila mohaparuta. | Chabbaggiyanam vatthusmim ananuhhatam dantavattakam 64. As to „ganhapetva“ (or „khanapetva?“) comp. 20, 34. 35. — 68. vicintetva ABG2, viriyetva F, vieinetva GlZn. vicinitva? — patiru- papake (sic) N, [pajuapatidusake [„pa“ is expunged] F, pake Gl , papake ABG2, papakamike Z. — 69. vattam va Y, vattava N, cattam ca F. — 72. ubhosamaggabhaviyain N, ubbosamaggam bhavissain F, ubhosamaggam vibbavissam Y. The way for correcting these words is shown by the Ma- hav. Tika, fol. nri : „Kumarakassapavatthumbi (Mahavagga, I, 75) annhhatam gabbhamasena paripunnavisativassupasampadam pi na vattatiti." I therefore conjecture: upasampadam gabbhavisam (or: “vise). — 73 a . anuiifia- tam Y. — dunnivatthakam (° ttakam B G) Y, dantavattakam X. The reading 22, 73 — 76 . 113 anunnatan ti dipesum alajji dantaganika. | imafi c’ annam bhikkhu attham anne balm akarane adhammo iti dipesum alajji labhahetukam. | asadhusamgamen’ eva yavajivam subhasubham katva gato yathakammam so Mabasenabbftpati. | 75 tasma asadhusamsaggam araka parivajjiya ahim vasivisani vasi kareyy’ atthahitam bbave ’ti. | Dipavamsam nittbitam. nibbanapaccayo hotu. of X is confirmed by the Mahav. Tika, 1. 1. : „Chabbaggiyanam bhikkhu- nam vattbumbi anunuatam (ananufmate?) dantamaye vijanimhi.“ As to the reading of Y, compare the following passage of the Cullavagga (Paris MS., fonds Pali 20, fol. nri') : „tena kho pana samayena Chabbaggiya bhikkhu dunnivattha dupparuta anakappasampanna bhattaggaiu gacchanti" etc. For further details, see my note on this passage in the Translation. 73. dantaganhika X. d an d h aga n i k a? — 74. bahu? — 76. vasi? Comp. Mahavamsa, p. 238, 1. 5. 8 TRANSLATION. 8 * 1, 1-7 117 Adoration to the venerable, holy, universal Sambuddha. I. 1. I will set forth the history of Buddha’s coming to the Island, of the arrival of the relic and of the Bo (branch), of the doctrine of the teachers who made the recensions (of Dhamma and Vinaya), of the propagation of the Faith in the Island, of the arrival of the chief of men (Vijaya); listen. 2. Listen attentively to (the history proclaimed by) me, which inspires joy and delight, which causes serenity and gladdens the mind, which comprises many various forms. 3. With elated minds, satisfied, de- lighted and joyful, attentively receive the faultless, auspi- cious discourse. 4. Listen all, giving your minds (to the subject); I will proclaim a history, handed down from ge- neration to generation, highly praised, adorned in many ways, joined together in this (work), just as flowers of various kinds (form a garland). 5. Attend to this incom- parable praise of the Island (Ceylon), which dwells upon the most excellent successions (of teachers and kings), which is new and unrivalled and well narrated, which has been handed down by Saints, which is praised by all good men and revered by the holy ones. 6. On the immovable, firm, unshaken throne, a place worthy of the eminent one, the highest of men sat down, establishing himself in the four branches (of fortitude). 7. Seated on this most excellent throne, at the foot of 118 1, 7 — 19. the king of trees, the chief of men, the highest among human beings, like a fearless lion , did not tremble, when he saw Mara with the hosts of his army. 8. Having over- come the dispute of M;ira and put him to flight together with his army, the Conqueror, full of joy, wise, tranquil, and steadfast, — 9. mastered the state of meditation which consists in spiritual insight, and the thorough perfection of attention, (and also the knowledge of) many various qualities, distinguished by manifold attributes. 10. Ma- stering the knowledge of former existences and the gift of supernatural vision, the enlightened great Sage spent three watches of the night. 11. Thereafter, in the last watch, he revolved (in his mind) the causes of existence ; the glorious One fixed the mind on them in direct and reverse order. 12. Having thoroughly understood the Dhamma, the highly wise One, who had reached emancipation by the destruction of human passions, taught (created beings) the abandonment (of temporal obstacles) and the attain- ment of the path (to sanctification). 13. The great Sage obtained ( n abhisambuddha l ‘ ( ) the most excellent knowledge of omniscience. Thus first arose the title „Buddha, Bud- dha“. 14. Having penetrated all qualities and uttered his proclamation (of triumph) 1 ), the light-giver then spent seven days on that most excellent throne. 15. He in w r hom all fear had ceased, who had performed his duties and was free from sin, delighted, glad, and joyful, thought many kind thoughts. 16. In one moment, in one instant a Buddha surveys the wdiole world; he unveiled his five- fold power of vision and looked down over many people. 17. The highest of men sent forth the irresistible power of his knowledge; the stainless teacher then saw the most excellent Lankadipa, — 18. an exquisite country, endowed with a beautiful climate, fertile, a mine of treasures, which had been visited by former Buddhas and had been inha- bited by multitudes of Saints. 19. Perceiving the most excellent island of Lanka, a fertile region, a dwelling-place 1) This proclamation of triumph is the famous stanza, Dhp., v. 153. 1, 19 — 32. 119 fit for Saints, the compassionate One who well under- stood the right and wrong time, thus thought: 20. „In the present time Yakkhas, Bhutas and Rakkhasas (inhabit) Lankadipa, who are all too low for (adopting the doctrine of) the Buddhas; their power I can outroot. 21. Having driven out the hosts of Yakkhas, the Pisacas and Ava- ruddhakas, I will establish peace in the island and cause it to be inhabited by men. 22. . . . Let those wicked beings fully live out their span of life; (afterwards) there, in the most excellent Lankadipa, an opportunity will arise for (the propagation of) the Faith. 23. Having removed (those) beings, having comforted many people and taught them the way, the road, the path of Saints, — 24. I shall reach complete Parinibbana like the setting sun. Four months after my Parinibbana the first convocation will be held ...; 25. a hundred and eighteen years later 1 ) the third convocation will take place, for the sake of the pro- pagation of the Faith. 26. Then there will be a rider over this Jambudipa, a highly virtuous, glorious monarch known as Dhammasoka. 27. This king Asoka will have a son, a clever man, Mahinda, the learned converter of Lankadipa." 28. Having foreseen these circumstances which were full of importance, (and understanding) the right and wrong time, the blessed Buddha placed a (di- vine) guard over this island. 29. 30. The Jina, having performed his various duties during the seven-times seven days (at the following places, that is) the throne, the Animisa (Cetiya) the cloister, the jewel-house, the Aja- pala and Muc.alinda trees, and seventhly near the Khira- pala grove, the hero went to Baranasi in order to esta- blish the kingdom of the Truth. 31. When he established the kingdom of the Truth and preached the most excel- lent Truth, the conversion of eighteen kotis of beings took place. 32. Kondanna, Bhaddiya, Vappa, Mahanama, and Assaji, these five great Theras attained emancipation when 1) A mention of the second convocation , which was held a hundred years after Buddha’s death, is wanting in the MSS.; the third is said to have been held 118 years after the second. 120 1 , 32 — 48 . he had preached the Anattalakkhana discourse. 33. Re- siding in Btiranasi, in Isipatana, the Jina released the four friends of'Yasa and, besides, the fifty youths. 34. Having spent the rainy season in Baranasi, the Tathagata released in the Kappasika grove the Bhaddavaggiyas. 35. Wan- dering thence from place to place, he caine to Uruvela; there the stainless Teacher saw Uruvelakassapa, an ascetic of the Jatila sect. 36. In the room where Kassapa kept his sacred fire, the highest of men concpiered a serpent. Witnessing this miracle they all invited the Tathagata: 37. „Reside here, o Gotama, during the four winter months; we will daily provide you with rice.“ 38. The Tathagata, the chief of men, residing during the winter in Uruvela, devoted himself to the conversion of the Jatilas together with their followers. 39. (Once, during that period,) both Angas and Magadhas prepared a great sacrifice. (Kassapa), seeing that great gains (could be obtained) at this sacri- fice, conceived the following ignoble thought: 40. 41. „The great Samana possesses high (magical) powers and great faculties; if he shall perform miracles or preach in the great assembly, the fee will escape me and go to Gotama. Well, the great Samana should not appear in the assem- bly. “ 42. The Tathagata Understands action and resolu- tion, intention and desire, the sixteen constituent parts of thought. 43. Having understood the thought of the Jatila, the Sage, who looks through the minds of other men, went by his high (magical) power to (Uttara-) Kurudipa collecting alms. 44. Near the Anotatta lake Buddha took his meal; there he gave himself up to meditation (jhana) and compassionate thoughts. 45. With his Buddha- eye, the highest in the world looked over the universe; the stainless Teacher (then) saw the most excellent Lankadipa. 46. At that time the ground of Lanka was covered with great forests and full of hor- rors; frightful, cruel, blood-thirsty Yakkhas of various kinds, — 47. and savage, furious, pernicious Pisiicas of various shapes and full of various (wicked) thoughts, all had as- sembled together. 48. „I shall go there, in their midst; 1 , 48 — 61 . 121 I shall dispel the Rakkhasas and put away the Pisacas; men shall be masters (of the island). “ 49. Having considered this matter full of compassion, the great hero rose into the air and came hither from Jambudipa. 50. In the midst of the assembly of Yakkhas, above their heads, he was seen, standing in the air, hold- ing his seat (in his hands). 51. The assembled hosts of Yakkhas saw the Sambuddha standing there, but they did not think that he was the Buddha; they supposed him to be another Yakkha. 52. On the bank of the river, near Mahiya Pokkhala, on the site of the Subhangana Thhpa, there the highest of men stood, and entered upon the highest ecstatic meditation. 53. The Sage, the awakener of quick attention, speedily entered upon that meditation (by revolving) in a moment by one thought (the whole system of qualities). Suddenly he thence rose; he who had reached (all) perfections by his virtuous resolutions, . . . finished his meditation. 54. There the hero stood, performing miracles by his (magical) power, lika a Yakkha of high (magical) power and great (supernatural) faculties ; gathering (?) thick clouds, containing thousands of rain drops, he sent rain, cold winds, and darkness. 55. (He then spoke to the Yakkhas:) „I will send you heat; give unto me a place where I may sit down. I possess such power over the fire as will dispel these dangers." 56. (The Yakkhas replied: „If thou art able to dispel them, sit down whereever thou likest; we all consent; show thy power over the fire." 57. (Buddha replied:) „You all ask me for warmth; I shall quickly produce the great heat which you are desiring, a fierce, burning fire." 58. As the sun shines in summer at noon, so fearful heat pene- trated the assembly of Yakkhas. 59. Like the heat spread by the four suns at the end of a Kappa, such and greater still was the glow sent forth by the seat of the Teacher. 60. As the rising sun cannot be restrained in the sky, thus (Buddha’s) carpet of skin cannot be restrained in the air. 61. The carpet diffused great heat, like the fire at the end of the Kappa, as the sun (scorches) the earth, 122 1 , 61 — 73 . or like a great flame of tire. 62. Diffusing heat like a heap of burning coals, the carpet appeared similar to a cloud, or to a glowing iron mountain. 63. It spread in- supportable heat over the islands. The Yakkhas quickly fled in all ten directions, to the east, the west, the south, the north, above, and beneath. 64. „ Whither shall we go for safety and refuge? How shall we be released from this fearful being? 65. If this powerful Yakkha assumes the form of the fiery element, and burns us, all of us Yakkhas will perish like a handful of chaff, like dust blown away by the wind.“ 66. And Buddha, the chief among Sages, the bringer of happiness, the compassionate, merci- ful great Sage, when he saw the afflicted, frightened Ya- kkhas, thought how to administer joy to the minds of these non-human beings. 67. (He) then (thought of) an- other island, similar to this, with low ground and high ground, with many various aspects, beautifully adorned by rivers, mountains, and lakes, the island of Giri, most similar to the country of Lanka. 68. (It was) free from danger, well protected, surrounded by the ocean, full of excellent food and rich grain, with a well tempered cli- mate, a green, grassy land, the beautiful island of Giri, superior to this (island). 69. It was charming and de- lightful, green and cool, adorned by gardens and forests, exquisite; there were trees, full of blossoms and fruits; it was empty and solitary, subject to no master. 70. (It w'as situated) in the great sea, in the midst of the ocean and of the deep waters, where the waves incessantly break; around it there was a chain of mountains, towering, diffi- cult to pass; to enter it against the wish (of the inhabi- tants) was difficult. 71. Full of desire and anger towards other beings, backbiting, pitiless, given to injuring other beings, cruel and furious, violent, merciless, ... 72. (Bud- dha thus spoke:) „Ye Rakkhasas and ye wicked hosts of Yakkhas, 1 give unto you this island which is not far from Lanka, the whole old island of Giri; may they all inhabit it and multiply undisturbed. 73. This country of Lanka is a residence inhabited by men since remote Kappas; 1 , 73 — 81 . 123 ma) T many men dwell in the country of Lanka, as they did in former times in the Oja, Vara, and Manda island. 74. Adorned with these and other good qualities, a resi- dence tit for men, auspicious in many ways, it will shine among the islands, when the Doctrine will have been brought there, like the full moon in the sky at the time of UposathaA 75. Weighing the prosperity and the high happiness of the two, the Sage who knew all worlds, in- terchanged the two islands and the two (kinds of beings), men and Rakkhasas, (as a peasant) easily (interchanges) his pairs of bullocks. 76. Gotama by his (magical) power drew the island towards himself, like the headstalls of bullocks which are drawn (towards the driver) with a strong rope. The Sage drew together one island towards the other, like two ships which are surrounded by stout ropes. 77. Having joined the beautiful island to the other, the Tathagata transported (?) the Rakkhasas, (say- ing:) „May all Rakkhasas dwell in Giridipa . . 78. The eager Yakkhas ran to Giridipa, like thirsty people in sum- mer to a river; they all entered it never to return; the Sage (then) restored the island to its former place. 79. The highly satisfied Yakkhas and the highly pleased Rakkha- sas, having received this excellent island which they de- sired, all began to laugh with great joy, and all went to celebrate the festival called Nakkhattamaha. 80. When Buddha saw that joy had been restored to these non- huinan beings, he the Jina, having exerted his benevolence towards them, pronounced the spell of protection. Having walked three times round the island , for the sake of its ever-lasting protection and the expulsion of the Yakkha hosts, — 81. having comforted the Pisacas and (other) non-human beings, having established a guard and restored a lasting peace, having put dowrn all distress in the island, the Tathagata returned to Uruvela. Here ends (Buddha’s) subjection of the Yakkhas. 124 2 , 1 — 12 . II. I. Again, the holy, glorious Sambuddha (once) dwelt near the most excellent capital of Kosala, in the garden of Sudatta (Anathapindika). 2. In this Jetavaua garden Buddha, the light-giving king of the Truth, looking all over the world, saw beautiful Tambapanni. 3. When five years had elapsed (after he had attained Buddhahood), he went to the country of Tambapanni. By dispelling the Avaruddhaka (demons) he (once) himself had made the island empty. 4. (But) now the mountain serpents and the sea serpents fought a battle in the island, having arranged their arrays on both sides, an awful struggle. 5. All those Nagas possessed great (magical) powers, all were frightfully venomous, all were wicked and violent, furious and filled with desire. 6. The Serpents were quick and excessively powerful, corrupt, cruel, and harsh, hasty, given to anger, longing for destruction (?). 7. Powerful Mahodara and resplendent Culodara, both were valiant, both had an exceedingly brilliant appearance. 8. No one saw a way how peaceably to compose that struggle (?). Mahodara whose fierceness was furiously excited by pride, was destroying the island with its mountains and its fo- rests: „I will kill all hostile serpents." 9. Culodara, filled with pride, roared: „May thousand kotis of Nagas ap- proach; I will slay all them who dare to enter the battle ; I will change the island, all its hundred yojanas, into one desert." 10. The Serpents whose venomous fury could not be restrained, who possessed high (magical) powers, raged and sent forth flames (sent forth smoke and flames?); the Serpent kings, infatuated with anger, incited them to destroy the foes (who opposed them) in the battle. II. Buddha, the blessed wanderer through the world, when he perceived the anger of the Serpent kings, (and saw) that the island was being destroyed, thought, in or- der to prevent this, many kind thoughts, for the sake of the highest bliss of (men) and gods. 12. (He thus re- flected:) „If I do not go (to Lanka), the Serpents will not 2 , 12 — 25 . 125 become happy; the island will be destroyed, and there will be no welfare in future time. 13. Out of compassion for the Nagas, for the sake of happiness (of men) I shall go there; may the happiness of the island prosper (?). 14. I perceive the excellent qualities of Laiikadipa; the Serpents shall not destroy the island from which I for- merly have driven out the Yakkhas, and to which I have done good." 15. Speaking thus the Sambuddba rose from his seat; he who possessed the gift of (supernatural) vi- sion, left the Gandhakuti, and stood in the door (of the Jetavana garden). 16. All the gods who resided in the trees of the Jetavana garden, offered their services to him: „Let us go (with thee, o Sage who art) possessed of (supernatural) vision." 17. (Buddha replied :) „ Nay, re- main ye all, Samiddhi alone may go (with me)." (Sam- iddhi) went, taking up the tree (where his residence was,) and holding it from behind (over Buddha’s head). 18. Samiddhi, when he heard what Buddha had said, was delighted ; he took up the tree, roots and all, and followed the Tathagata. 19. The highly powerful king of gods gave shade to the Sambuddba, the highest among men, and held (the tree) from behind over the most excellent Buddha. 20. The highest of men went to the place where the Nagas fought their battle; the merciful Teacher (there) stood in the middle of both noble Nagas. 21. Going through the air over the heads of both Nagas, the Sam- buddha, the chief of the world, produced a deep, terri- fying darkness. 22. There arose a thick darkness, caused by the great (magical) power of the lion (among men); he was covered and veiled (?) by the darkness, and the tree too (?). 23. The frightened, terrifyed Nagas did not see each other, nor did they see the Jina (?), (or) to what side they should direct their attacks. 24. They all forsook the battle, threw down their weapons, and stood all with clasped hands, paying reverence to the Sam- buddha. 25. When (Buddha) perceived that they were struck with horror, when he saw that the Nagas were terrifyed, he sent forth his thoughts of kindness towards 126 2 , 25 — 89 . them, and emitted a warm ray of light. 26. A great sight it was, astonishing and terrifying; they all saw the Sain- buddha like the bright moon in the sky. 27. Standing there, resplendent with all the six colours, shining in the air, illuminating the ten regions (of the world), he thus addressed the Nagas: 28. „From what cause, o great king, did this contention among the Nagas arise? Out of com- passion towards yourself I have come speedily hither.* 29. (They replied:) „This Naga Culodara and that N:iga Mahodara, the maternal uncle and the nephew, are quarrel- ling with each other, desirous of treasure." 30. The Sam- buddha addressed a speech full of compassion to the savage Nagas: „ Anger which arises in the mind of the fool, begins small, and grows great. 31. For what reason do you un- dergo, all these many Nagas, great suffering? Destroy that small throne, but do not destroy each other. Destroying one the other you are going to cause an unheard of de- struction of life." 32. Then he who possessed the gift of (supernatural) vision, agitated the Nagas by (the description of) the sufferings in hell; he unfolded to them the (laws of) birth in the worlds of men and devas, and the nature of Nibbana. 33. As the Sambuddha, the highest of men, thus preachud the true doctrine, all the Nagas, casting themselves down, propitiated the Tathagata. 34. All the Nagas (then) came together, the Serpents reconciled them- selves to each other, and all took their refuge (in Bud- dha), eighty kotis of living beings. 35. (Thus they spoke:) „We might perish, all we Nagas, on account of this throne." 36. The two Naga (kings), for the sake of re- storing peace, took that most excellent throne (and thus spoke to Buddha:) „ Accept this throne out of compas- sion, (o Sage wdio art) gifted with (supernatural) vision." 37. The Sambuddha who possessed the gift of (superna- tural) vision, accepted it by remaining silent. When they understood that he had accepted it, the two great Ser- pents were delighted. 38. (They thus addressed Buddha:) „May the blessed One sit down on this splendid, noble Veluriya throne which the Nagas were longing for." 39. The 2 , 39 — 51 . 127 Nagas placed that throne in the midst of the two islands. There, on that throne, the light-giving king of the Truth sat down. 40. When those eighty kotis of Nagas had propitiated the Sambnddha, the Nagas there served to him a meal, food and drink. 41. When he had removed his hands from the bowl, the eighty kotis of Nagas, surroun- ding him, sat down near the supreme Buddha. 42. At the mouth of the Kalyani river there lived a Naa;a together with his children and with a great retinue of Nagas; his name was Maniakkhika. 43. (He was) full of faith, and had taken his refuge (in Buddha), a true and righteous believer. When he came to that assembly of Nagas, his faith still increased. 44. When this Naga perceived the Buddha’s power, his compassion, and the fear of the Serpents (?), he bowed to him, sat down, and thus entreated the Tathagata: 45. „Out of compassion to this island thou hast first dispelled the Yakkhas; this kindness towards the Nagas is thy second act of compassion to- wards the Island. 46. May the holy, great Sage show his compassion still another time; I shall attend and do ser- vice to thee.“ 47. Having heard what the Naga said, Buddha, full of compassion for created beings, the blessed One, accepted (his invitation,) for showing kindness to Lankadipa. 48. Having sat on the throne, the light-giver arose; the Sage then rested during the midday time in the interior of the island. 49. In the interior of the island the supreme light spent the day; he who possessed the gift of (supernatural) vision, entered upon the Bralnna- vihara meditation. 50. At evening time the Jina thus spoke to the Nagas: „Let the throne remain here; may the Khirapala tree 1 ) station itself here. Worship, o Na- gas, all of you this tree and the throne . “ 51. Having spoken thus, and preached to the Serpents, and given them that sacred object used by (himself), the Sambuddlm returned to the Jetavana. Here ends the conquering of the Nagas. 1) This is the tree which the god Samiddhi had taken to the island; see v. 17 et seq. J28 2 , 52 — 63 . 52. Again , in the eighth year (after Buddha had reached Sambodhi), the Naga king Maniakkhika invited the great hero together with five hundred Bhikkhus. 53. (These Bhikkhus) whose senses were subdued, who possessed the high (magical) powers, surrounded the Sambuddha; the Sage rose up into the air in the Jetavana, and proceeding through the air, he came to Lanka, to the mouth of the Kalyani river. 54. All the Serpents constructed a pavi- lion of precious stones on the ground, and covered it with garments of different colours, with divine clothes. 55. (There were) ornaments of various precious stones, various blossoms of many descriptions, many flags of va- rious colours; the pavilion was adorned in many ways. 5G. They spread (cloth over the) entire (floor) and pre- pared seats; (then) they introduced the Fraternity with Buddha at its head, and invited them to sit down. 57. Sit- ting down together with five hundred Bhikkhus, the Sam- buddha entered upon ecstatic meditations; he diffused (the rays of) his kindness to all quarters (of the horizon). 58. Seven times Buddha together with his pupils attained mystical trance; at that place (subsequently) the Maha- thixpa was built, the most excellent Cetiya. 59. The Naga king Maniakkhika distributed a great donation (to the Bhikkhus). Having accepted the donation of that Naga, having taken food, and gladdened (the Nagas by prea- ching to them,) the Sambuddha together with his pupils rose up into the air. 60. At the place of the Dighavapi Cetiya, Buddha, he who was full of compassion to the world, descended from the air and again entered upon mystical meditation. 61. Having arisen from the trance at that place, the light-giving king of the Truth together with his pupils, wandering through the air, then procee- ded to the place where the Bo tree was to be stationed in the Mahameghavana garden. 62. The Bo trees of three former Buddhas (there also) had been established on the ground; to that place he went, and there he entered upon meditation. 63. (He thus prophesied:) „Three Bo trees (have stood) at this place at (the time of) the teaching of 2 , 63 — 3 , 9 . 129 three Buddhas; my Bo tree also will stand on this very spot in future time. 44 64. The highest being, the chief of men, having arisen from that meditation together with his pupils, went to the delightful Meghavana garden. 65. There also he plunged himself in meditation together with his pupils. Having arisen from that meditation, the light-giver proclaimed: 66. „This place first Kakusandha, the chief of the world, has accepted, sitting down on this spot where a throne has been erected. 67. This place secondly Konagamana, the chief of men, has .... 68. This place thirdly Kassapa, the chief of the world, has . . . 69. My- self, Sambuddha Gotama, the descendant of the Sakya tribe, the chief of men, have attained (trance), seated on this spot, where a throne is to be erected. 14 III. 1. Setting aside the kings who reigned in the past kappa, to whatever forms of existence they may have passed, I shall completely enumerate the kings of the pre- sent kappa. 2. Their descent, their name and tribe, their age and (the length of) their reign, all that I will pro- claim, listen to it according to the truth. 3. The first inaugurated king, a ruler of the earth, full of brilliancy, prince Mahasammata by name, reigned over his kingdom. 4. His son was called Roja by name; (then followed) the prince called Vararoja, Kalyana and Varakalyana, Uposatha, the lord of the earth; — 5. the seventh of them was Mandhata who reigned over the four Dipas. (Then followed) Cara, king Upacara, and Cetiya, the lord of the earth; — 6. Mucala, Mahamucala, Muca- linda, and also Sagara, Sagaradeva, and Bharata, the prince called Bhagirasa, — 7. Ruci, and he who was called Maha- ruci, Patapa, and also Mahapatapa, Panada, and Maha- panada, the king called Sudassana, — 8. he who was called Mahasudassana, two Nerus, and Accima. These were twenty -eight kings by number; their age extended to an Asamkheyya (of years). 9. In Kusavati, in Rajagaha, in Mi- 9 130 3 , 9 — 23 . thila, best of towns, these kings reigned; their age ex- tended to an Asamkheyya (of years). 10. Ten times ten is one hundred; ten times a hun- dred is one thousand; ten times a thousand is ten thou- sand; ten times ten thousand is a hundred thousand; — 11. ten times a hundred thousand is one koti; (the following numerals are) pakoti, kotippakoti, nahuta, and ninnakuta, abbuda, and nirabbuda, — 12. ababa, and also atata, akaha, and kumuda, sogandhika, uppala, pundarika, paduma. 13. All these numbers are numerable and calcu- lable by the means of calculation; the stage (of numbers) beyond these is called asamkheyya (not calculable). 14. One hundred kings, sons of Accima, governed their great kingdom in the town called Pakula (?). 15. The last of these kings was the prince called Arindama; his sons and grandsons, fifty-six princes, governed their great kingdom in the town of Ayujjhanagara. 16. The last of these kings was Duppasaha, the lord of the earth ; his sons and grandsons, sixty rulers of the earth, reigned over their great kingdom in Baranasi, best of towns. 17. The last of these kings was the prince called Ajitajana; his sons and grandsons, eighty -four thousand by number, reigned over their great kingdom in the town of Kapilanagara. 18. The last of these kings was Brakmadatta, the lord of the earth; his sons and grandsons, thirty- six princes, reigned over their great kingdom in Hattkipura, best of towns. 19. The last of these kings was Kambalavasabha ; his sons and grandsons, thirty-two princes, reigned there in the town of Ekacakkhu. 20. The last of these kings was Purindada, honoured by the surname Deva; his sons and grandsons, twenty -eight princes, reigned over their great kingdom in Vajira, best of towns. 21. The last of th ese kings was the prince called Sadhina. His sons and grandsons, twenty -two royal princes, reigned over their great kingdom in Mad'kura, best of towns. 22. The last of these kings was valiant Dhammagutta; his sons and grandsons, eighteen princes, reigned there in the town of Aritthapura. 23. The last of these kings was the chief 3 , 23 — 36 . 131 of men called Sitthi ; his sons and grandsons, seventeen princes, reigned there in the town of Indapatta. 24. The last of these kings was Bralimadeva, the lord of the earth; his sons and grandsons, fifteen princes, reigned there in the town of Ekacakkhu. 25. The last of these kings was Baladatta, the lord of the earth; his sons and grandsons, fourteen royal princes, governed their great kingdom in the town of Kosambi. 26. The last of them was the king known as Bhaddadeva; his sons and grandsons, nine royal princes, reigned there in the town of Kannagoccha. 27. The last of them was the king renowned by the name of Naradeva; his sons and grandsons, seven royal princes, governed their great kingdom in the town of Rojanana- gara. 28. The last of these kings was the prince called Mahinda; his sons and grandsons, twelve royal princes, governed their great kingdom in the town of Campa- nagara. 29. The last of these kings was Nagadeva, the lord of the earth; his sons and grandsons, twenty-five princes, governed their great kingdom in the town of Mithila- nagara. 30. The last of these kings was valiant Buddha- datta; his sons and grandsons, twenty-five princes, go- verned their great kingdom in Rajagaha, best of towns. 31. The last of these kings was the prince called Dipam- kara; his sons and grandsons, twelve royal princes, go- verned their great kingdom in Takkasila, best of towns. 32. The last of these kings was the prince called Talissara; his sons and grandsons, twelve royal princes, reigned over their great kingdom in Kusinara, best of towns. 33. The last of these kings was the prince called Purinda; his sons and grandsons, nine royal princes, reigned over their great kingdom in the town of Malitthiya (Tamalitti?). 34. The last of these kings was Sagaradeva, the lord of the earth; his son Makhadeva was a great, liberal giver. 35. His sons and grandsons, eighty -four thousand by number, reigned over their great kingdom in the town of Mithilanagara. 36. The last of these kings was Nemiya, honoured by the surname Deva, a universal monarch, a lord of the whole earth which the ocean surrounds. 9 132 3, 37—50. 37. Nemiya’s son was Kalarajanaka; his son was Samam- kura; (then followed) king Asoka, an inaugurated prince. 38. His sons and grandsons, eighty-four thousand by num- ber, reigned over their great kingdom in Baranasi, best of towns. 39. The last of these kings was the lord of the earth called Vijaya; his son was high-born, brilliant Vijitasena; — 40. (then followed) Dhammasena, Nagasena, the (king) called Samatha, Disampati, Renu, Kusa, Maha- kusa, Navaratha, and also Dasaratha, — 41. Rama, the (king) called Bilaratha, Cittadassi, Atthadassi, Sujata, and Okkaka, Okkamukha, and Nipura, — 42. Candima, and Candamukha, king Sivi, Sanjaya, Vessantara, the ruler of men, Jali, and Sihavahana, prince Sihassara, the wise pre- server of royal succession. 43. His sons and grandsons, eighty -two thousand kings, reigned in the town called Kapila(vattliu). 44. The last of these kings was Jayasena, the lord of the earth; his son was high-born, brilliant Sihahanu. 45. The sons of that (?) Sihalianu were five brothers, Suddhodana, and Dhota (Dhotodana), prince Sa- kkodana, — 46. king Sukkodana, and king Amitodana; all these five kings had names containing the word odana. 47. He the son of Suddhodana, Siddhattha, the chief of the world, begot Rahulabhadda, and then left his home in order to strive for Buddhaship. 48. The total number of these highly powerful . . . kings is four Nahutas, one hundred thousand, and three hundred more. 49. So many lords of the earth are men- tioned who originated from the family of the Bodhisatta in this first (?) kappa, preservers of royal succession, ru- lers of men *). — 50. Perishable, alas! is whatever exists, subject to origin and decay; it appears and perishes; its extinction is bliss. End of the great lineage of kings. 1) The last words, which 1 think belong to this place, form, in the HISS., the second part of v. 53. 3 , 51 — 4 , 2 . 133 51. The king called Suddhodana reigned in the town called Kapila(vatthu), he the royal son of Sihahanu. 52. Amid the five mountains, in Rajagaha, best of towns, reigned the prince who was called king Bodhisa (Bha- tiya! 1 ). 53. Suddhodana and Bhatiya were friends of each other. When (Bimbisara) was eight years old, five wishes arose (in his mind): 54. „May my royal father instruct me in the duties of royalty; may he the Buddha, the highest of men , arise in my kingdom ; — 55. may the Tathagata show himself first to me (before going to other kings); may he preach to me the eternal Truth; may I penetrate that most excellent Truth. “ 56. These were the five wishes which arose in Bimbisara’s mind. When he was fifteen years old, he received the royal coronation after his father’s death; — 57. he (Buddha) the chief of the world arose in his beautiful kingdom; the Tathagata showed himself to him first; when he preached his eternal Truth, the lord of the earth apprehended it. 58. The great hero then was full thirty-five years old; Bimbisara, the lord of the earth, was thirty years old. Gotama w'as five years older than Bimbisara. 59. Fifty -two years this prince reigned; thirty -seven years he reigned after having for- med that connection with the Buddha. 60. Prince Ajata- sattu reigned thirty-two years. Eight years after his co- ronation the Sambuddha reached Parinibbana. 61. After the Parinibbana of the Sambuddha, the highest One in the world, the chief of men, that prince reigned (still) twenty-four years. IV. 1. The congregation of Bhikkhus, seven hundred thou- sand (in number), assembled, holy men who having sub- dued their passions and having become pure, had all at- tained the summit of perfection. 2. They all, having made enquiry and determined which were the most worthy, elected by vote of the congregation five hundred Theras. 1) The father of Bimbisara. 134 4 , 3 — 14 . 3. Kassapa was the chief propounder of the Dhutaiiga pre- cepts according to the doctrine of the Jina; Ananda was the first of those learned (in the Suttas), wise Upali was chief in the Vinaya, — 4. Anuruddha in the (supernatu- ral) visions, Vangisa in promptly comprehending, Punna among the preachers of the Dhamma, Kumarakassapa among the students of various tales, — 5. Kaccana in establishing distinctions, Kotthita in analytical knowledge. There were, besides, many other great Theras who were original depositaries (of Buddha’s doctrine). 6. By these and other saintly Theras who had fulfilled their duties, to the number of five hundred, was the collection of the Dhamma and of the Yinaya made; because it was col- lected by the Theras, it is called the doctrine of the Theras ( theravada ). 7. The Bhikkhus composed the collection of Dhamma and Vinaya by consulting Upali about the Vi- naya, and by asking the (Thera) called Ananda regarding the Dhamma. 8. Thera Mahakassapa and the great tea- cher Anuruddha, Thera Upali of powerful memory, and the learned Ananda, — 9. as well as many other distin- guished disciples, who had been praised by the master, who possessed analytical knowledge, firmness, the six (supernatural) faculties and the great (magical) powers, who had attained the mystic trance proceeding from self- concentration, who had completely mastered the true faith, — 10. all these five hundred Theras bore in their minds the nine-fold doctrine of the Jina, having acquired it from the best of Buddhas. 11. They who had heard and re- ceived from Bhagavat himself the whole Dhamma and Vinaya taught by the Buddha, — 12. they who knew the Dhamma, who knew the Vinaya, who all were acquainted with the Agamas, who were unconquerable, immovable, similar to their master, ever worshipful, — 13. they who had received the perfect doctrine, first (among religions), from the first (among teachers), who were Theras and original depositaries (of the Faith), made this first col- lection. Hence this whole doctrine of the Theras is also called the first (or primitive) doctrine. 14. Assembled in 4 , 14 — 26 . 135 the beautiful Sattapanna cave, the five hundred Theras, the teachers, arranged the nine -fold doctrine of the Tea- cher. 15. The nine-fold doctrine of the Teacher (compri- ses) Sutta, Geyya, Veyyakarana, Gatha, Udana, Itivuttaka, •Jataka, Abbhuta, Vedalla. 16. The Theras who arranged this true imperishable doctrine, according to Vaggas, Pa- naasakas, Sarny uttas, and Nipatas 1 ), composed the col- lection of the Agamas which is known by the name of the Suttas. 17. As long as the true doctrines remain, as long as the collection does not perish, so long — a long time — will the teaching of the Master last. 18. The immovable, firm, insubvertible earth quaked on the appear- ance of the Collection of the Vinaya and of the Dhamma, which is worthy of the Faith. 19. Nobody, may a Sa- mana come or a Brahmana of great learning, skilled in disputation and hair-splitting, can subvert it; firm it stands like Sineru. 20. Neither a deity nor Mara nor Brahma nor any earthly beings can find in it even the smallest ill- spoken sentence. 21. Thus the collection of the Dhamma and of the Vinaya is complete in every part, well arran- ged and well protected by the omniscience of the Teacher. 22. 23. And those five hundred Theras, chief among whom was Mahakassapa, as they knew the doubts of the people, composed the imperishable collection of the Vinaya and of the Dhamma, which is an incarnation of the Faith like the highest Buddha, the collection of the Dhamma. 24. The doctrine of the Theras, which is founded on true reasons, which is free from heresies, full of true meaning, and supports the true faith, will exist as long as the Faith. 25. As long as holy disciples of Buddha’s faith exist, all of them will recognize the first Council of the Dhamma. 26. The five hundred pre-eminent Theras, noble by birth (?), laid the first firm, original, fundamental base (of the Faith). Here ends the Council of Mahakassapa. 1) These are the sections into which the Digha-, Majjhima-, Sam- yuttaka-, and Ahguttara-Nikaya respectively are divided. 136 4 , 27 — 41 . 27. Sixteen years had elapsed after the protector of the world had entered Nibbana; it was the twenty-fourth year of Ajatasattu’s (reign), and the sixteenth of'Vijaya’s; — 28. learned Upali had just completed sixty years, (then) Dasaka received the Upasampada ordination from Thera Upali. 29. The entire sacred Dhamrna texts which the most excellent Buddha had set forth, the whole of the nine-fold speeches of the Jina, Upali recited. 30. Upali received from Buddha and (afterwards) recited the entire, complete, and whole nine -fold doctrine contained in the Suttas. 31. Buddha spoke regarding the learned Upali in the assembly (of the Bhikkhus): „Upali is the first chief of the Yinaya in my church." 32. The great teacher, being thus installed in the midst of the Assembly, recited the three Pitakas to a thousand (pupils), chief among whom was Dasaka. 33. Upali taught five hundred The- ras whose passions had been extinguished, who were pure, holy, and speakers of truth, the (texts of the) faith. 34. After the Sambuddha had attained Parinibbana, the great teacher Thera Upali taught then the Vinaya full thirty years. 35. Upali taught the clever Dasaka the whole nine-fold doctrine of the Teacher, eighty-four thousand (divisions). 36. Dasaka, having learned all the Pitakas from Thera Upali, taught it just as his teacher in the Faith (had done). 37. The great teacher (Upali) entered Nibbana, after having appointed his pupil, the clever Thera Dasaka, (to be chief) of the Vinaya. 38. Prince Udaya reigned sixteen years; when Udayabhadda had completed six (years), Thera Upali attained Nibbana. 39. Sonaka, a respectable merchant who came from Kasi, received the first ordination according to the doc- trine of the Teacher at Giribbaja (Rajagaha) in the Velu- vana (monastery). 40. Dasaka, the leader of the school, dwelt at Giribbaja in the Magadha country, and in his seven and thirtieth year gave Sonaka the first ordination. 41. (When) clever Dasaka had completed forty-five years, and Nagadasa had reigned ten years, and king Pandu- (vasa) twenty, then Sonaka received the Upasampada ordi- 4 , 41 — 52 . 137 nation from Thera Dasaka. 42. Thera Dasaka taught So- naka also the nine -fold (doctrine); he having learned it from his teacher, (again) taught it (to others). 43. Dasaka in his turn, having made his pupil Thera Sonaka chief of the Vinaya, attained Nibbana in his sixty-fourth year. 44. The Thera called Sonaka had just completed forty years; Kalasoka had then reigned ten years and half a month in addition; — 45. Pakundaka was a robber during seventeen years; (of this period) eleven years and six months more had passed, — 46. when Thera Sonaka, the chief of the school, admitted Siggava and Candavajji to the Upasampada ordination. 47. At that time, when Bhagavat had been dead a hundred years, the Vajjiputtas of Vesali proclaimed at Vesali the ten indulgences: the practice of (keeping) salt in a horn is permissible ; the two inch alternative is per- missible; the practice of (taking food after the regular meal when going to) the village is permissible; the prac- tice of (holding Uposatha in different) residences (within the same boundary) is permissible; the practice of (ob- taining) the consent (of the Fraternity not before, but after an act) is permissible ; the practice of (acting accor- ding to) example is permissible; the practice of (drinking) milk-whey is permissible; the practice of (drinking) toddy is permissible; sitting (on seats covered with clothes) with- out fringes is permissible; (the possession of) gold and silver is permissible. 48. When Sambuddha had entered Parinibbana ten times ten years, the Vajjiputtas proclaimed at Vesali these ten indulgences. 49. They proclaimed (the allowableness of) impermissible practices which all had been forbidden by the Tathagata. Sabbakami, and Salha, and Revata, (and) Khujjasobhita, — 50. and Yasa, Sambhuta of Sana, these Theras who had formerly seen the Tathagata, the pupils of Thera Ananda; — 51. Sumana and Vasabha- gami, who had formerly seen the Tathagata, these two most excellent pupils of Anuruddha; — 52. these (and other) Bhikkhus, seven hundred in number, came to Vesali 138 4, 52 — 5, 9. and expressed their assent to the discipline as it had been established in the doctrine of the Buddha. 53. All these who had obtained a (supernatural) insight, who were expert in reaching meditation, who were quit of their load, and saved, assembled together. Here ends the history of the second Council. V. 1. At the time of the Parinibbana (which Buddha at- tained) at Kusinara, best of towns, seven hundred thou- sand (spiritual) sons of the Jina assembled. 2. In this assembly Thera Kassapa was chief, he who resembled the Teacher, a great leader; on earth is not his equal. 3. Kassapa, after having selected five hundred amongst the Arahats, taking always the most worthy ones, compo- sed the collection of the Dhamma. 4. Out of compassion for created beings, in order to establish the Faith for a long time, he made, after the lapse of three months, when the fourth month and the second beginning of the Vassa 1 ) had arrived, the collection of the Dhamma. 5. At the entrance of the Sattapanna cave, in the Magadha town Giribbaja (Rajagaha), this first council was finished after seven months. 6. At this council many Bhikkhus (were present), the original depositaries (of the Faith), and who had all reached perfection in the doctrine of the protector of the world. 7. Kassapa was the chief propounder of the Dhutavada precepts according to the doctrine of the Jina; Ananda was the first of those learned (in the Sut- tas), (the Thera) called Upali was chief in the Vinaya, — 8. Anuruddha in the supernatural visions, Vangisa in promptly comprehending, Punna among the preachers of the Dhamma, Kumarakassapa among the students of various tales, — 9. Kaccana in establishing distinctions, Kotthita in analytical knowledge. There were, besides, many other 1) See Mahavagga, 3, 2. 5 , 9 — 21 . 139 great Theras who were original depositaries (of the Faith). 10. By these and other saintly Theras who had fulfilled their duties, to the number of five hundred, was the col- lection of the Dhamma and of the Vinaya made; because it was collected by the Theras, it is called the doctrine of the Theras ( theravada ). 11. They composed the col- lection of the Dhamma and of the whole Vinaya by con- sulting Upali about the Vinaya and learned Ananda about the Dhamma. 12. 13. Both these, Thera Upali and Ananda who had obtained perfection in the true Doctrine, had learned the Dhamma and Vinaya from the Jina; and, cle- ver in the Suttas, they proclaimed what had been taught in long expositions and also without exposition, the natural meaning as well as the recondite meaning. 14. Having received the perfect word (of Buddha), the first (among doctrines), from the first (among teachers), these Theras and original depositaries (of the Faith) made the first col- lection. Hence this doctrine of the Theras is also called the first (or primitive) doctrine. 15. The most excellent Theravada remained pure and faultless for a long time, for ten times ten years. 16. When the first hundred years had been comple- ted and the second century had begun, a great schism happened, a most violent one, in the doctrine of the The- ras. 17. 18. Twelve thousand Vajjiputtas of Vesali assem- bled and proclaimed at Vesali, best of towns, the ten in- dulgences in the doctrine of Buddha, vi z.: the indulgence of (keeping) salt in a horn, of the two inches, of the village and the monastery, of residences, of (obtaining) consent, of example, of milk -whey, of toddy, of silver, of seats without fringes. 19. They proclaimed (a doctrine) which was against the Faith, against the discipline, and repugnant to the doctrine of the Teacher; splitting the (true) meaning and the Faith, they proclaimed what was contrary to it. 20. In order to subdue them, many pupils of Buddha, twelve hundred thousand (spiritual) sons of the Jina, assembled. 21. In this congregation the eight chief Bhikkhus, resembling the Master, great leaders, diffi- 140 5 , 21 — 35 . cult to conquer, great teachers, were — 22. Sabbakami and Salha, Revata, Khujjasobhita, Vasabhagami and Su- mana, Sambhuta who resided at Sana, — 23. Yasa, the son of Kakandaka, a sage praised by the Jina. In order to subdue those wicked men (the Vajjiputtas), they came to Vesali. 24. Vasabhagami and Sumana were pupils of Anuruddha, the other Theras (pupils) of Ananda; they had all formerly seen Tathagata. 25. At that time Asoka, the son of Susunaga, was king; that prince ruled in the town of Pataliputta. 26. The eight Theras of great (supernatu- ral) power gained one party for themselves, and destroy- ing (the doctrine of) the ten indulgences they annihilated those wicked ones. 27. 28. After having annihilated the wicked Bhikkhus and after having crushed the sinful doc- trine, those eight Theras ot great (supernatural) power, those Bhikkhus selected seven hundred Arahats, choosing the best ones, in order to purify their own doctrine, and held a council. 29. This second council was finished in eight months at Vesali, best of towns, in the hall called Kutagara. 30. 31. The wicked Bhikkhus, the Vajjiputtakas who had been excommunicated by the Theras, gained another party; and many people, holding the wrong doctrine, ten thousand, assembled and (also) held a council. Therefore this Dhamma council is called the Great Council ( malid - samgiti). 32. The Bhikkhus of the Great Council settled a doc- trine contrary (to the true Faith). Altering the original redaction they made another redaction. 33. They trans- posed Suttas which belonged to one place (of the col- lection), to another place; they destroyed the (true) meaning and the Faith, in the Vinaya and in the five Collections (of Suttas). 34. 35. Those Bhikkhus, who understood neither what had been taught in long expositions nor without exposition, neither the natural meaning nor the recondite meaning, settled a false meaning in connection with spurious speeches of Buddha; these Bhikkhus de- stroyed a great deal of (true) meaning under the colour 5, 35 — 50 . 141 of the letter. 36. Rejecting single passages of the Suttas and of the profound Vinaya, they composed other Suttas and another Vinaya which had (only) the appearance (of the genuine ones). 37. Rejecting the following texts, viz.: the Parivara which is an abstract of the contents (of the Vinaya), the six sections of the Abhidhamma, the Pati- sambhida, the Niddesa, and some portions of the Jataka, they composed new ones. 38. Forsaking the original rules regarding nouns, genders, composition, and the embellish- ments of style, they changed all that. 39. Those who held the Great Council were the first schismatics; in imitation of them many heretics arose. 40. Afterwards a schism occurred in that (new school); the Gokulika and Ekabyohara Bhikkhus formed two divi- sions. 41. Afterwards two schisms took place amongst the Gokulikas : the Bahussutaka and the Pannatti Bhikkhus formed two divisions. 42 . 43. And opposing these were the Cetiyas, (another) division of the Mahasamgitikas. All these five sects, originating from the Mahasamgitikas, split the (true) meaning and the Doctrine and some por- tions of the Collection; setting aside some portions of dif- ficult passages, they altered them. 44. Forsaking the ori- ginal rules regarding nouns, genders, composition, and the embellishments of style, they changed all that. 45. In the orthodox school of the Theras again a schism occurred: the Mahimsasaka and Vajjiputtaka Bhi- kkhus formed two sections. 46. In the school of the Vajji- puttakas four sections arose, viz.: the Dhammuttarikas, Bhaddayanikas, Channagarikas, and Sammitis. 47. In later times two divisions arose among the Mahimsasakas : the Sabbatthivada and Dhammagutta Bhikkhus formed two divisions. 48. The Sabbatthivadas and Kassapikas, the Kassapikas and Samkantikas, and subsequently another section, the Suttavadas, separated themselves in their turn. 49. These eleven schools which separated themselves from the Theravada, split the (true) meaning and the Doctrine and some portions of the Collection; setting aside some portions of difficult passages, they altered them. 50. Fox’- 142 5, 50—61. saking the original rules regarding nouns, genders, com- position, and the embellishments of style, they changed all that. 51. Seventeen are the heretical sects, and there is one orthodox sect; together with the orthodox sect they are eighteen at all. 52. The most excellent Theravada which resembles a large banyan tree, is the complete doc- trine of the Jina, free from omissions or additions. The other schools arose as thorns grow on the tree. 53. In the first century there were no schisms; in the second cen- tury arose the seventeen heretical schools in the religion of the Jina. 54. The Hemavatikas, Rajagirikas, Siddha- tthas, Pubba- and Aparaselikas, and sixthly the Apara- Rajagirikas arose one after the other. Here ends the description of the schools of the teachers. (At the time of the second Council the Theras fore- saw the following events 1 ): 55. „In the future time, after a hundred and eighteen years, a certain Bhikkhu will arise, a Samana able (to suppress the schisms of that time). 56. Descending from Brahma’s world he will be born in the human race, ori- ginating from a Brahmana tribe, an accomplished master of all Mantras (Vedas). 57. His name will be Tissa, his surname Moggaliputta; Siggava and Candavajji will confer on the youth the Pabbajja ordination. 58. Then, having received the Pabbajja ordination and attained the know T - ledge of the sacred texts, Tissa will destroy the Titthiya doctrines and establish the (true) faith. 59. A royal chief called Asoka will govern at that time in Pataliputta, a righteous prince, an increaser of the empire. “ 60. All the seven hundred Bhikkhus, the Theras, having taught the (true) doctrine and destroyed (the heresy of) the ten indulgences, had attained Parinibbana. 61. Descend- 1) Here follows an account of the birth and conversion of Tissa Moggali- putta who presided at the third Council. See Mahavamsa, pp. 28 — 33. 5 , 61 — 71 . 143 ing from Brahma’s world he was born in the human race; at the age of sixteen he had mastered the whole Veda. 62. (Once young Tissa thus addressed the Thera Si- ggava, who had come to his father’s house:) „I ask the Samana a question, answer these questions (concerning) the Rigveda, the Yajurveda, the Samaveda and also the Ni- ghantu, and fifthly the Itihasa"; — 63. and the Thera ha- ving given his permission, he asked an exceedingly difficult question. Siggava then spoke to the youth possessed of mature knowledge : 64. „I also will ask you, young man, a question set forth by the Buddha; if you are clever, answer my question truly . “ 65. When the question had been pronounced, (Tissa said:) „That I have neither seen nor heard; I will learn this Mantra, I desire to receive the Pabbajja ordination. “ 66. Leaving the narrow way of the life of a layman, the youth went forth into the houseless state and to the condition of calm, according to the Jina’s faith. 67. The disciple, desirous of learning and full of reverence, was taught the nine-fold doctrine of the Tea- cher by learned Candavajji. 68. Siggava who had van- quished the young man, conferred on him the Pabbajja ordination; learned Candavajji taught the well trained (disciple), versed in the Vedas, the nine-fold (doctrine); (having done so,) these Theras attained Parinibbana. 69. 1 ) Two years of Candagutta, fifty -eight of king Pakundaka having elapsed, Siggava having just completed his sixty-fourth year, Moggaliputta received from Thera Siggava the Upasampada ordination. 70. Tissa Moggali- putta, having learned the Vinaya from Candavajji, reached emancipation by the destruction of the substrata (of exi- stence). 71. Siggava and Candavajji taught the glorious Moggaliputta all the Pitakas which are filled with col- lections referring to both (Bhikkhus and Bhikkhunis) (or: 1) In the following acconnt, some of the numbers mentioned are evi- dently wrong; I have preferred, however, not to correct them, since the cause of these errors may be attributed as well to the author as to copyists. 144 5 , 71 — 84 . the Sutta collection, as it had been settled at the two convocations?). 72. Siggava, possessed of (true) know- ledge, made the glorious Moggaliputta chief of the Vinaya, and attained Nibbana after having completed seventy-six years. 73. Candagutta ruled twenty-four years; when he had completed fourteen years, Siggava attained Parini- bbana. 74. (Siggava was) a dweller in the forest, keeping the Dhutanga precepts, of limited desires, attached to forest life, full of goodwill, of subdued passions, and perfect in the true Doctrine. 75. In a remote, delightful abode, in the depth of a great forest, this hero (lived) alone without a companion, like a valiant lion in his mountain cave. 76. Sixteen years had elapsed after the protector of the world had attained Nibbana, learned Upali had com- pleted sixty years; — 77. it was the twenty-fourth year of Ajatasattu's (reign) and the sixteenth of Vijaya’s, (when) Dasaka received the Upasampada ordination from Thera Upali. 78. The learned (Thera) called Dasaka had com- pleted foi’ty years; ten years of Nagadasa’s (reign) and twenty of Pakundaka’s (Panduvasa’s!) had elapsed, — 79. (when) Thera Sonaka received the Upasampada from Dasaka. The wise Thera called Sonaka had completed forty years; — 80. ten years of Kalasoka’s (reign) had elapsed ; it was in the eleventh year of the interregnum in Tambapanni, (when) Siggava received the Upasampada ordination from Thera Sonaka. 81. Two years of Canda- gutta’s (reign) had elapsed; Siggava had completed sixty- four, and king Pakundaka fifty-eight years, (when) Moggali- putta received the Upasampada ordination from Thera Siggava. 82. Six years of Asokadhamma’s (reign), sixty- six of Moggaliputta, forty -eight (years) of king Mutasiva had elapsed, (when) Mahinda received the Upasampada ordination from Moggaliputta. 83. Upali received the Vinaya from Buddha, Dasaka received the whole Vinaya from Thera Upali and taught it just as his teacher in the Faith (had done). 84. Thera Dasaka taught Sonaka also the Vinaya; (Sonaka) taught it, 5, 84 — 99 . 145 after having learnt it from his teacher. 85. Wise Sonaka who well knew the Dhamma and the Vinaya, in his turn taught Siggava the whole Vinaya. 86. The pupils of So- naka were Siggava and Candavajji; the Thera taught both these pupils the Vinaya. 87. Tissa Moggaliputta, having learnt the Vinaya from Candavajji, reached emancipa- tion by the destruction of the substrata (of existence). 88. Teacher Moggaliputta taught his pupil Mahinda the whole Vinaya, the complete doctrine of the Theras. 89. After the Sambuddha had attained Parinibbana, resplendent Thera Upali taught the Vinaya full thirty years. 90. This great Sage, after having made his pupil, the learned Thera called Dasaka, chief of the Vinaya, attained Nibbana. 91. Dasaka in his turn made his pupil Thera Sonaka chief of the Vinaya, and attained Nibbana sixty- four years (after his Upasampada). 92. Sonaka who pos- sessed the six supernatural faculties, after having made Siggava, the descendant of an Arya family, chief of the Vinaya, attained Nibbana sixty -six years (after his Upa- sampada). 93. Wise Siggava made young Moggaliputta chief of the Vinaya and attained Nibbana seventy-six years (after his Upasampada). 94. Tissa Moggaliputta made his pupil Mahinda chief of the Vinaya and attained Nibbana eighty-six years (after his Upasampada). 95. Seventy-four years of Upali, sixty-four of Dasaka, sixty-six of Thera Sonaka, seventy-six of Siggava, eighty of Moggaliputta: this is the Upasampada of them all (i. e. the number of years which elapsed between their Upa- sampada and their death). 96. Learned Upali was the whole time chief of the Vinaya, Thera Dasaka fifty years, Sonaka fourty-four years, Siggava fifty-five years, the (Thera) called Moggaliputta sixty-eight years. 97. Prince Udaya reigned sixteen years; when six years of Udayabhadda’s reign had elapsed, Thera Upali attained Nibbana. 98. The ruler Susunaga reigned ten years; after eight years of Susunaga’s reign Dasaka at- tained Parinibbana. 99. After Susunaga’s (Kalasoka’s !) 10 146 5 , 99 — 6 , 3 . death the ten brothers succeeded; they reigned all jointly twenty-two years. In the sixth year of their reign Sonaka attained Parinibbana. 100. Candagutta reigned twenty- four years; after fourteen years of his reign Siggava at- tained Parinibbana. 101. The son of Bindusara, illustrious prince Asokadhamma, reigned thirty-seven years. 102. When twenty-six years of Asoka’s reign had elapsed, the (Thera) called Moggaliputta , after having exalted the splendour of the Religion, attained the end of his life and reached Nibbana. 103. Learned Thera Upali, a great teacher, attained Nibbana seventy-four years (after his Upasampada), after having made his pupil, the learned Thera Dasaka, chief of the Vinaya. 104. Dasaka attained Nibbana sixty-four years (after his Upasampada), after having in his turn made his pupil, Thera Sonaka, chief of the Vinaya. 105. So- naka who possessed the six (supernatural) faculties, at- tained Parinibbana sixty-six years (after his Upasampada), after having made Siggava, the descendant of an Arya family, chief of the Vinaya. 106. Wise Siggava attained Nibbana seventy -six years (after his Upasampada), after having made young Moggaliputta chief of the Vinaya. 107. Tissa Moggaliputta attained Nibbana eighty years (after his Upasampada), after having made his pupil Mah- inda chief of the Vinaya. VI. 1. Two hundred and eighteen years after the Parini- bbana of the Sambuddha Piyadassana was anointed king. 2. When Piyadassana was installed, the miraculous facul- ties of royal majesty entered into him; he diffused the splendour which he had obtained in consequence of his merits, one yojana above and one beneath (the earth); the wheel of his power rolled through the great empire of Jambudipa. 3. The Devas constantly brought to him (?) every day sixteen jars of water (?), filled with medical herbs of every description, from the Anotatta lake at the 6 , 3 — 18 . 147 top of the Himavat mountains. 4. The Devas then con- stantly brought every day fragrant teeth - cleansers made of the betel vine, which were grown in the mountains, soft, smooth, sweet, endowed with flavour, and delightful. 5. The Devas then constantly brought every day fragrant myrobalans, which were grown in the mountains, soft and smooth, endowed with flavour, desirable to great kings (?). 6. The Devas then constantly brought every day divine drinks and ripe mangos endowed with flavour and fra- grance. 7. The Devas then constantly brought every day from the Chaddanta lake upper and under garments dyed with the five colours. 8. 9. The Naga kings then con- stantly brought every day fragrant powder for washing the head, and also unguents, and fine seamless clothes to put on of the colour of jessamine, and precious collyrium; all these things (they brought) from the Naga world. 10. The Devas then constantly brought every day sugar cane, quantities of Areca-nuts, yellow towels. 11. The parrots brought nine thousand loads of hill paddy which was picked out by rats; the bees made honey; the bears forged with sledge-hammers. 12. Heaven-born birds, sweet- voiced cuckoos constantly sang to men, (attracted) by the splendour of Asoka’s merit. 13. The great Naga whose age endures through a Kappa, the attendant of four Bud- dhas , wearing a golden chain , came , (attracted) by the splendour of (Asoka’s) merit. 14. The glorious Piyadassi honoured him with garlands of jewels. Splendid rewards were received for alms (given to religious mendicants). 15. This grandson of Candagutta, the son of Bindu- sara, (king Asoka), whilst a mere prince, was subking of Ujjeni, charged with collecting the revenue (of that pro- vince). During his progress he came to the town of Ve- dissa. 16. There the daughter of a Setthi, known by the name of Devi, having cohabited with him, gave birth to a most noble son. 17. Mahinda and Samghamitta chose to receive the Pabbajja ordination; having obtained Pabbajja, they both destroyed the fetter of (individual) existence. 18. Asoka ruled in Pataliputta, best of towns; three 10 * 148 6 , 18 — 30 . years after his coronation he was converted to Bud- dha’s faith. 19. How great is the number of years between the time when the Sambuddha attained Parinibbana in the Upavattana (at Kusinara), and when Mahinda, the issue of the Moriya family, was born? 20. Two hundred years and four years more had elapsed: just at that time Mah- inda, the son of Asoka, was born. 21. When Mahinda was ten years old, his father put his brothers to death ; then he passed four years reigning over Jambudipa. 22. Having killed his hundred brothers, alone continuing his race, Asoka was anointed king in Mahinda’s fourteenth year. 23. Asokadhamma, after his coronation, obtained the (above-mentioned) miraculous fa- culties; exceedingly splendid and rich in meritorious works (he was), universal monarch of (Jam'ou)dipa. 24. They crowned Piyadassi after full twenty years (?); he passed three years doing honour to Pasanda infidels. 25. (There were) adherents of the sixty-two false doctrines, ninety- six kinds of Pasandas who proceeded from the Sassata and Uccheda doctrines, all of them established on these two principles; — 26. Niganthas and Acelakas and other ascetics and other Brahmans and sectarians. 27. Search- ing where truth and where falsehood was, he invited the infatuated, infidel Niganthas (?) and sectarians of the Sassata and Uccheda doctrines, and Pasanda and Titthiya infidels of different creeds outside the Faith, sectarian people. 28. After having invited the numbers of Titthiyas and having introduced them into his palace and having bestowed on them great gifts, he asked them an exceed- ingly difficult question. 29. Being asked this question, they could not answer it by their own power; the ignorant people answered like a man who being asked about the mango tree, replies concerning the Lakucha tree. 30. They all were content with low seats (?) (in the royal hall) *). 1) The king invited all the ascetics of different creeds to take the seats of which they deemed themselves worthy. All were content with lower seats, except Nigrodha, a Buddhist novice, wdio took his seat on the royal throne. i 6 , 30 — 42 . 149 After having annihilated all the Pasandas and defeated the sectarians, — 31. the king thought: „ Which other men may we find who are Arahats in this world or see the path towards Arahatship? 32. (Surely) they are to be found in the world; this world cannot be void of them (?). How may I obtain the sight of such worthy men? If I hear his (i. e. such a man’s) well spoken words, I will give up to him my paternal realm and my conquests. “ 33. The king, thinking thus, found nobody worthy of his presents; unceasingly the king searched after virtuous, clever men. 34. Walking about in his palace and looking at many people, he saw the Samana Nigrodha who went along the road for alms. 35 — 41. When he saw Nigrodha whose walking, turning back and looking was graceful, who turned his eyes to the ground, who was adorned (by decent deportment), an Arahat, whose mind was peaceful, who had reached perfect self-control, who had subdued himself and protected and well defended himself (against human passions), who did not mix with noble people, who was stainless like the moon amidst clouds, fearless like a lion, brilliant like a fire-brand, venerable, unconquerable, firm, of a peaceful disposition, steadfast, who had destroyed his passions, had cleansed himself of all sins, who was the most excellent of men, who led a wandering life, the most excellent Samana, who was endowed with all vir- tues, the thought occurred to him, that he had been his companion during a former life (?) *). (Seeing) that asce- tic who led a life worthy of a Muni, who was happy in consequence of his meritorious deeds in former existences, who had reached the fruition which is obtained by the path of Arahats, walking along the road in search of alms, that wise man thought, full of longing: 42. „Indeed this Thera is one of the venerable ones; like Buddha, the holy One in this world, and like his disciples, he has reached the fruition which is obtained by the transcen- dent path, and has reached liberation and salvation. w 1) See the story in the Mahavamsa, p. 24. 150 G, 43—54. 43. (Asoka) obtained the enjoyment of the five -fold delight, high bliss; delighted, he who was comparable to Sakka rejoiced like a poor man who has found a trea- sure, like one who has gained the desire of his heart (?). 44. 45. He spoke to one of his ministers: „Well, quickly conduct hither that Bhikkhu, that handsome young man of tranquil appearance, who walks along the road like an elephant, fearless and endowed with the ornament of tran- quillity. “ 46. The king felt great content; highly delighted he thought in his mind: „ Without doubt this excel- lent person whom I have never seen before, has reached the highest perfection. “ 47. Thinking thus, he again spoke thus: „Well prepared seats are spread; sit down on the seat which is worthy of an ascetic; I grant thee which- soever thou desirest.“ 48. After hearing the speech of the king, he took (the king’s) right hand (?) and mounted the throne. Fearlessly he sat down on the most excellent seat, just as Sakka, king of the gods, seats himself on the Pandukambala. 49. The king thought: „This most excellent boy is certainly immovable and fearless ; him . . . 50. The king, recognizing that excellent tender boy who observed the customs of the Saints, (to be) well in- structed and expert in Dhamma and Vinaya, again spoke thus, full of delight: 51. „Teach me the Faith which thou hast learnt; thou alone shalt be my teacher; I will obey the words which thou teachest me, o great Sage. In- struct me, I listen to thy preaching. “ 52. Having heard this exceedingly acute speech of the king, he who was well versed in the analytical distinctions of the nine -fold doctrine, thought over the precious Tipitaka and found the excellent sermon on Earnestness: 53. *) ^Earnestness is the way to immortality, indifference is the way to death; the earnest do not die, the indifferent are like the dead.“ 54. When wise Nigrodha had pronounced this gladden- ing sentence, the king understood that highest motive 1) Dhammapada, v. 21. 6 , 54 — 65 . 151 (viz. earnestness): „This is the foundation of all doctrines whatsoever that have been preached by the omniscient Buddha. 55. To-day I choose as my refuge thee and Buddha with the Dhamma and the Samgha; together with my children and wives, with the number of my relatives I announce to thee my having become a lay -disciple. 56. Abiding together with children and wives in the refuge (of the Faith), in consequence of the arrival of Nigrodha, my spiritual guide, I offer four lacs of silver and eight (daily) portions of rice to the Thera. “ 57. (The king having asked, whether there are many ascetics like Nigrodha, he replied:) „There are many dis- ciples of Buddha, versed in the three -fold science, pos- sessed of (magical) power, well acquainted with the expo- sition of the qualities of mind, who have subdued their passions and reached Arahatship.“ 58. The king again spoke to the Thera: „I desire to meet with that precious Assembly; I will pay my respect to all (Bhikkhus) who come to the Assembly; I will listen to the Dhamma. “ 59. Sixty thousand ascetics assembled, and the messen- gers announced to the king: „A large congregation which is full of great joy, has assembled; go thou to see the con- gregation, as thou desiredst (to do).“ 60. Asokadhamma, the ruler of the earth, having heard what the messenger said, thus addressed the circle of his relations, his friends and counsellors and his kinsmen: 61. „We will offer pre- sents on the occasion of the assembling of the great Samgha; we will show them attention as much as we can, as much as we are able. 62. Let them quickly make ready for me a hall, seats, water, attendants, gifts, and food, such as are worthy of being offered, and suitable. 63. Let the makers of curry and rice quickly make ready for me well cooked rice -milk, sweet, pure dishes. 64. I will bestow a great donation on the congregation of the Bhikkhus, the most excellent community. Let them beat the drums in the city, let them sweep the roads, let them scatter white sand and flowers of the five colours ; — 65. let them place here and there garlands and trium- 152 6 , 65 — 78 . phal arches, plantain trees, auspicious brimming jars, and let them place here and there . . ., — 66. and let them make flags of cloth and fasten them here and there; let the people, adorned with flower garlands, make this city resplendent. 67. Khattiyas, Brahmans, and Vessas, Suddas, and people of different extraction, adorned with various ornaments, shall take clothes, ornaments, flowers, burn- ing torches, and shall proceed to meet the Congregation. 68. All kinds of bands of music, -well trained musicians of various schools who are pleasant to hear and sweet- voiced, shall play (various melodies) . . . and proceed to meet the Congregation, (a) most meritorious (act). 69. . . . dancers and acrobats in auspicious attitudes (?), all shall go to meet the Congregation and shall amuse them, when they have assembled. 70. And let them wor- ship (the Assembly) with large heaps of flowers of differ- ent kinds, (aromatic) powder of various descriptions, and unguents. 71. Let them prepare in the city every kind of pomp (?) and desirable gifts. 72. The inhabitants of the kingdom, devoted (?) to the Fraternity, shall under- take to do homage (to the Saxngha), aud shall do so du- ring the whole day and during all the three watches (?) of the night. “ 73 — 75. That night having elapsed, the illustrious prince, causing food of excellent flavour to be prepared in his own residence, gave the following orders to his counsellors and his attendants: „Let all people procure heaps of perfumed garlands aud flowers, many flowers, parasols, flags, lamps burning in the day-time; let them procure as much as I have ordered. 76. Let all (people dwelling) in this city, the merchants from the four quar- ters of the horizon, and all the royal officers, with their oxen, troops, and vehicles, follow 7 me to meet the congre- gation of Bhikkhus.“ 77. The best of kings proceeded with great pomp; the ruler of the earth shone like Sakka (when he goes) to the Nandana garden. 78. The king in whose mind wisdom had arisen, proceeding in great haste towards the Bhikkhu congregation, saluted them, raising 6 , 78 — 91 . 153 his joined hands, and received greetings in return. 79. He spoke to the Bhikkhu congregation: „May (the Samgha) have compassion on me.“ 80. Taking the alms -bowl of the Thera, the Samgha’s (spiritual) father, and paying re- verence to him by (offering) various flowers, he entered the city. 81. Inviting them to enter his residence and to be seated, he offered to them with outstretched hands rice-milk and various highly precious food, hard and soft, as much as they wanted and desired. 82. When the con- gregation of Bhikkhus had finished their meal and re- moved their hands from the bowls, he offered to each Bhi- kkhu a suit of robes. 83. He distributed slippers (?), collyrium, oil, parasols, and also shoes, all the requisites of an ascetic, molasses and honey. 79 b . 84. Introducing all the Bhikkhus, as many had assembled, into his inte- rior appartments, Asokadhamma, the ruler of the earth, sat down. Sitting down the king invited the congregation of Bhikkhus (to accept) their gifts, (saying): 85. „I give as much as the Bhikkhus desire, whatever they choose. “ 86. After having gratified them with (a present of priestly) requisites and offered to them what was required (for their use), he asked them about the very profound, well pro- pounded divisions of the Dhamma: 87. „Are there, vene- rable Sirs, sections taught by the kinsman of the Sun, by the indication of a certain number of divisions of the Dhamma, (according to) nouns, gender, and inflections, and also according to sections and to the composition?" - — 88. „It has been taught, o king, and has been numbered by the kinsman of the Sun; it is well divided, well pro- mulgated, well explained, well taught, — 89. accompanied by reasons and replete with sense, well spoken without a fault: fixed attention, right exertion, the (magical) powers, the (five) organs (of spiritual life), — 90. the (ten) powers, the requisites for attaining supreme knowledge, and those leading to the supreme path, all of these are well divided and well taught: these are the seven divisions of the most excellent elements of supreme knowledge. 91. The doc- trine preached by the Teacher, the highest among men, 154 6 , 91 — 7 , 3 . the supreme, transcendent Truth which has been expanded and well divided, consists of nine Angas 1 ). 92. Full eighty -four thousand sections of the Doctrine have been taught by the kinsman of the Sun out of compassion for created beings. 93. He has preached the highest Truth, the most excellent ambrosia, which frees from transmigra- tion, which is the path leading to the extinction of all suffering and an ambrosia-like medicine. “ 94. After hear- ing the speech pronounced by the Congregation of the Bhikkhus, the king, the chief of men, filled with joy and mirth, wisdom having arisen in his mind, pronounced these words to his royal court: 95. „Full and complete eighty -four thousand most precious sections of the Truth have been taught by the most excellent Buddha; — 96. I will build eighty-four thousand monasteries, honouring each single section of the Truth by one monastery." 97. The prince expending ninety-six kotis of treasure, he the king, gave immediately on that same day the order (for the erection of the buildings). 98. At that time there were in Jambudipa eighty -four (thousand) towns; near each town he built one monastery. 99. And having completed the monasteries in three years’ time, (the construction of) the Aramas being finished, the prince held during seven days a festival of offerings. VII. 1; There was a great assemblage from all parts of Jambudipa, eighty kotis of Bhikkhus, ninety-six thousand Bhikkhunis, the greater part of the Bhikkhus and Bhi- kkhunis possessing the six (supernatural) faculties. 2. The Bhikkhus, by the greatness of their magical powder level- ling the surface of the earth, producing (the miracle called) the world -show, made visible the (84000 consecration-) festivals, worthy of veneration. 3. The king standing on 1) The Angas of Buddha’s doctrine are the well-known nine divisions, viz. Sutta, Geyya, Veyyakarana, Gatha, Udana, Itivuttaka, Jataka, Ab- bhuta, Vedalla. 7 , 3 — 18 . 155 the Asokarama, looked over (the whole of) Jambudipa; by the Bhikkhus’ magical power Asoka saw everything. 4. He saw all the Viharas built all over the earth, the raised (?) flags, the flowers and arches and garlands, — 5. the plantains, the filled jars adorned with various flowers; he saw the whole extent of the great continent, the pomp all over the four quarters. 6. 7. Delighted, glad, looking at the festivals which were being celebra- ted, at the assembled fraternities of Bhikkhus and the assembled Bhikkhunis and the beggars receiving rich alms which were prepared for them, seeing all the eighty-four thousand Viharas, which were honoured (by festivals of consecration), — 8. Asoka joyfully made known to the fraternity of Bhikkhus: „I am, venerable Sirs, a relative of the religion of the teacher Buddha. 9. Great liberality has been shown by me out of reverence (?) for the Fra- ternity. 10. 11. By expending ninety -six kotis, a great treasure, eighty-four thousand monasteries have been erected by me in honour of the (84000) sections of the Truth taught by the most excellent Buddha. I have daily made offerings of four lacs: — 12. one Cetiya offering, one to the (Bhikkhu) called Nigrodha, one to the preachers of the Religion, one for the requirements of the sick; boiled rice is distributed constantly every day, just as the Maha- ganga (gives her water). 13. I cannot find any other greater act of liberality. My faith is most firm; I am, therefore, a relation of the Faith . “ 14 — 16. After having heard the word spoken by king Asokadhamma, learned Moggaliputta who was well versed in the Scriptures, a clever decider of cases, answered the question of Asoka- dhamma, in order to secure a comfortable existence to the Fraternity, for the sake of the propagation of the Doc- trine, and because he the wise one had learnt the future destiny (of the Faith): „The donor of the requisites (for the Bhikkhus) remains a stranger to the Faith, — 17. but that man who gives up his son or daughter, the issue of his body, and causes them to receive the Pabbajja ordina- tion, becomes really a relation of the Faith." 18. 19. King 156 7, 18—30. Asokadhamma, the ruler of the earth, having heard this speech, addressed both prince Mahinda, his son, and his daughter Samghamitta: „I presently shall be a relation of the Faith. “ Both children hearing what their father had said, agreed, (saying:) — 20. „Well, Sire, we agree, we will do what you have said; make us quickly receive the Pabbajja ordination, become a relative of the Faitli.“ 21. Mahinda, Asoka’s son, bad completed twenty years, and Samghamitta might be eighteen years of age. 22. When Asoka had completed six years, both bis children received the Pabbajja ordination, and Mahinda, the enlightener of the Island, received at once the Upasampada ordina- tion; — 23. at the same time Samghamitta began to exer- cise herself in the Sikkha precepts. He (Mahinda) was like Moggaliputta a great teacher of the doctrine of the Theras. 24. Fifty-four years (after Moggaliputta’s Upasampada) Asokadhamma was crowned; (six years?) after Asoka’s coronation, when Moggaliputta had completed sixty (?) years, Mahinda received the Pabbajja ordination from Mo- ggaliputta. 25. Mahadeva conferred the Pabbajja ordina- tion on him and Majjhanta the Upasampada *); these were the chiefs who acted compassionately towards Mahinda in (those) three ways. 26. Moggaliputta, his Upajjhaya, taught Mahinda, the enlightener of the Island, all the Pi- takas, their whole meaning, and the Doctrine. 27. Ten years after Asoka’s coronation Mahinda had completed four years (after his Upasampada), and had become a tea- cher of the whole scripture as handed down, and he had many pupils. 28. Mahinda studied and retained in his mind the well propounded, well divided Sutta (collection) as it had been settled at the two convocations, the doc- trine of the Theras. 29. Moggaliputta instructed Mahinda, the son of Asoka, in the three sciences, (the doctrine re- garding) the six (supernatural) faculties, the four analyti- cal doctrines. 30. And Tissa Moggaliputta continuously taught Mahinda, his pupil, the whole Pitaka of the Aga- 1) See Mahavamsa, p. 37, 1. 2. 7 , 30 — 43 . 157 mas ( i . e. the Sutta-Pitaka). 31. When (Asoka) had com- pleted three years, (the story of) Nigrodha (happened), after the fourth year (he put his) brothers (to death), after his sixth year Mahinda, the son of Asoka, received the Pabbajja ordination. 32. Both sons of Konti, the Theras Tissa and Sumitta, who possessed the great (magical) faculties, attained Parinibbana after Asoka’ s eighth year. 33. Those royal children received the Pabbajja ordination, and both Theras attained Nibbana. 34. Many Khattiyas and Brahmans declared their in- tention of becoming lay disciples, and great gain and honour accrued to the faith of Buddha; — 35. the schis- matics and heretics lost both gain and honour. Panda- rangas and Jatilas, Niganthas, Acelakas, and others — 36. resided (in the Buddhist Viharas) during seven years; the Uposatha ceremonies were performed by incomplete congregations; saintly, clever, and modest men did not appear at the Uposatha ceremonies. 37. When a hundred years and (another) hundred and thirty -six had elapsed (after the Parinibbana of the Buddha), sixty thousand Bhi- kklius dwelt in the Asokarama. 38. Ajivakas and secta- rians of different descriptions ruined the Doctrine; all of them wearing the yellow robe injured the doctrine of the Jina. 39. Surrounded by one thousand Bhikkhus, Mo- ggaliputta, the chief of the school, who possessed the six (supernatural) powers and the great (magical) faculties, convened a Council. 40. Wise Moggaliputta, the destroyer of the schismatic doctrines, firmly established the Thera- vada and held the third Council. 41. Having destroyed the different (heretical) doctrines and subdued many shame- less people and restored splendour to the (true) faith, he proclaimed (the treatise called) Kathavatthu. 42. From that Moggaliputta Mahinda, who was the pupil of that teacher, learnt the true religion. 43. (Moggaliputta) taught him the five Nikayas and the seven sections (of the Abhi- dhamma); he the hero, the clever one learnt from his teacher the two Vibhaiigas of the Vinaya, the Parivara, and the Khandhaka. 158 7 , 44 — 58 . 44. When the second century and thirty- six years more had elapsed (since the Buddha’s death), again a most dreadful schism arose in the Theravada. 45. In the city of Pataliputta ruled prince Dhammasoka, a great king, who was a believer in the faith of Buddha. 46. He be- stowed great gifts on the Samgha, the best and most ex- cellent of congregations; in one day he expended four lacs. 47. One he gave in honour of the Cetiyas, another for the preaching of the Dhamma, one for the require- ments of the sick, one to the Samgha. 48. Infidels, sixty thousand in number, seeing this gain and these great honours, furtively attached themselves (to the Samgha). 49. The Patimokkha ceremonies in the monastery of the Asokarama were interrupted; a minister who ordered the Patimokkha ceremonies to be performed, killed (some) of the Saints. 50. In order to destroy the infidels, many dis- ciples of Buddha, sixty thousand sons of the Jina assem- bled. 51. At that convocation the son of Moggali was the president, a great chief, similar to the Teacher; he had not his like on earth. 52. The king asked the Thera about the case of the slaughter of the Saints; having per- formed a miracle, he satisfied the desire of the king. 53. Having received the Doctrine from the Thera, the king destroyed the Bhikkhu emblems of those who had furtively attached themselves (to the Samgha). 54. The reckless infidels, performing the Pabbajja rite according to their own doctrine, injured the faith of the Buddha just as (men mix) pure gold (with baser metals). 55. They all were sectarian, opposed to the Theravada; and in order to annihilate them and to make his own doctrine resplen- dent, — 56. the Thera set forth the treatise belonging to the Abhidhamma, which is called Kathavatthu. A similar punishment, a similar destruction of an opposite doctrine never occurred. 57. 58. After having promulgated the treatise called Kathavatthu which belongs to the Abhi- dhamma, the presiding Thera, in order to purify his own doctrine and (to establish) the Faith for a long time, se- lected one thousand Arahats, choosing the best ones, and 7 , 58 — 8 , 12 . 159 held a Council. 59. In the monastery of the Asokarama which had been built by king Dhammasoka, this third convocation was finished in the space of nine months. Here ends the Council of the true Faith which lasted nine months. VIII. 1. Far-seeing Moggaliputta who perceived by his su- pernatural vision the propagation of the Faith in the future in the neighbouring countries, — 2. sent Majjhantika and other Theras, each with four companions, for the sake of establishing the Faith in foreign countries (and) for the enlightenment of men. 3. „Preach ye together with your brethren (?) powerfully the most excellent religion to the foreign countries, out of compassion for created beings. “ 4. The great sage Majjhantika went to the country of the Gaudharas; there he appeased an enraged Naga and released many people from the fetters (of sin). 5. Maha- deva wdio possessed the great (magical) powers, went to the realm ofMaliisa; urging (the people) by (the descrip- tion of) the suffering in hell, he released many people from their fetters. 6. Then another (Thera), Rakkhita, skilled in magical transformations, rising into the air, preached the Anamataggiya discourse *). 7. The wise Thera called Yonakadhammarakkhita converted the Aparantaka country by preaching the Aggikkhandhopama Sutta. 8. The Thera Mahadhammarakkhita who possessed the great (ma- gical) powers, converted Maharattha by preaching the Naradakassapajataka. 9. The Thera Maharakkhita who possessed the great magical powers, converted the Yavana region by preaching the Kalakarama Suttanta. 10. The Thera who originated from the Kassapa tribe, Majjhima, Durabhisara, Sahadeva, Mulakadeva, converted the multi- tude ofYakkhas in the Himavat. 11. They preached there the Suttanta called Dhammacakkappavattana. 12. Sona and 1) The country converted by this Thera is called by Buddhaghosa Vanavasa. 160 8 , 12 — 9 , 13 . Uttara who possessed the great magical powers, went to Suvannabhumi ; there they conquered the multitudes of Pisacas and released many people from their fetters. 13. Mahinda, going with four companions to the most ex- cellent island of Lanka, firmly established (there) the Faith and released many people from their fetters. IX. 1. The island of Lanka was called Sihala after the Lion (siha); listen ye to the narration of the origin of the island which I (am going to) tell. 2. The daughter of the Vanga king cohabited in the forest with a lion dwelling in the wilderness, and in con- sequence gave birth to two children. 3. Sihabiihu and Sivali were beautiful youths; the name of their mother was Susima, and their father was called the Lion. 4. When their sixteenth year had elapsed, (Sihabahu) departed from his cave, and then built a most excellent town called Sihapura. 5. The son of the Lion, a powerful king, ruled over a great kingdom, in Lalarattha, in the most excel- lent town of Sihapura. 6. Thirty -two brothers were the sons of Sihabahu; Vijaya and Sumitta were the eldest among them, beautiful princes. 7. Prince Vijaya was dar- ing and uneducated ; he committed most wicked and fear- ful deeds, plundering the people. 8. The people from the country and the merchants assembled; they went to the king and complained against the bad conduct of Vijaya. 9. The king, having heard their speech, full of anger, gave this order to the ministers: ^Remove ye that boy. 10. Let them remove from the country all those attendants, his wives, children, relations, maid-servants, man-servants, and hired workmen." 11. He was then removed, and his rela- tions were separated from him; so they went on board ship, and (the ship) sailed away on the sea. 12. „May they drift whereever they like; they shall not show their faces again nor shall they ever come back to dwell in our king- dom and country." 13. The ship in which the children had 9 , 13 — 28 . 161 embarked was helplessly driven to an island, the name of which was then called Naggadipa. 14. The ship in which the wives had embarked was helplessly driven to an island, the name of which was then called Mahilarattha. 15. The ship in which the men had embarked went, sailing on the sea, losing her way and her bearings, to the port of Suppara. 16. The people of Suppara then invited those seven hundred men to disembark, and offered them lavish hospitality and honours. 17. During this hospitable re- ception Vijaya and all his followers unnoticed (?) commit- ted barbarous deeds. 18. They, made themselves guilty of drinking, theft, adultery, falsehood, and slander, of an immoral, most dreadful, bad conduct. 19. (The people) indignant at such cruel, savage, terrible and most dread- ful deeds being committed against themselves, consulted together: „Let us quickly kill those rascals." 20. There is an island (formerly) called Ojadipa, Vara- dipa, or Mandadipa, the (recent) name of which is Lafika- dipa, and which is (besides) known by the name of Tamba- panni. 21. 22. At the time, when Sambuddha, highest of men, attained Parinibbana, that son of Sihaba.hu, the prince called Vijaya, having left the land called Jambudipa, landed on Lankadipa. It had been foretold by the most excellent Buddha, that that prince one day would be (its) king. 23. The Teacher at that time had addressed Sakka, the chief of gods: „Do not neglect, Kosiya, the care of Lankadipa." 24. Sujampati the king of gods, having heard the Sambuddha’s command, committed to Uppalavanna the business of guarding the island. 25. Having heard the command of Sakka that powerful Devaputta with his at- tendant demons kept guard over the island. 26. Vijaya, having stopped three months at Bharu- ltaccha and exasperated the inhabitants, went again on board his ship. 27. That crowd of men having gone on board their ship, sailing over the sea, were driven away by the violence of the wind, and lost their bearings. 28. They came to Lankadipa, where they disembarked and went on shore. Standing on dry ground, being ex- it 162 9 , 28 — 41 . hausted by great hunger, thirst and fatigue, they were unable (?) to walk on foot. 29. They crawled about on the ground with both hands and knees; afterwards, when they rose and stood upright, they saw that their hands were resplendent (copper-coloured). 30. The red-coloured dust of the ground covered their arms and hands; hence the name of that place was called Tambapanni (copper- palmed). 31. Tambapanni was the first town in the most excellent Laiikadipa; there Yijaya resided and governed his kingdom. 32. Vijaya and Vijita together with Anura- dhanakkhatta, Accutagami, and Upatissa are those who came first to this country. 33. Many people, crowds of men and women, came together; (hence each) prince founded a town in the different parts. 34. The town of Tambapanni surrounded by suburbs was built by Vijaya in the south on the most lovely bank of the river. 35. Vijita founded Vijita(pura), the same founded Uruvela. The minister who was called after the asterism (Anuradha) founded Anuradhapura. 36. He who was called Accuta- gami then founded Ujjeni, Upatissa founded Upatissanagara which had well arranged markets, which was prosper- ous, opulent, large, charming, and lovely. 37. The king called Vijaya by name was the first ruler who reigned in Tambapanni over the delightful island of Lanka. 38. When seven years (of his reign) had passed, the land was crowded with people. That prince reigned thirty- eight years. 39. In the ninth month after (Gotama) had become Buddha, the host of Yakkhas was destroyed; in the fifth year after his attaining Buddhaship the Jina conquered the Nagas; in the eighth year after his attaining Buddha- ship he completed the Samapatti meditations (in Lanka). 40. On these three occasions the Tathagata came hither. In the last year of the Buddha Vijaya came hither. 41. The Sambuddha, the most excellent of men, made (the island fit for) the residence of men; the Sambuddha (afterwards) reached complete Nibbana by the entire annihilation of the substrata of existence. 9 , 42 — 10 , 9 . 163 42. Prince (Vijaya) reigned thirty- eight years after the Parinibbana of the Sambuddha, the light -giving king of Truth. 43. He despatched a messenger to Sihapura to the (prince) called Sumitta, (with this message): „Come one (of you) quickly to us, to the most excellent island of Lanka ; — 44. there is nobody to govern this kingdom after my death. I hand over to you this island which I have acquired by my exertions." x.>) 1. The daughter of the Sakka prince Pandu, the prin- cess called Kaccana, came over hither from Jambudipa in order to preserve the dynasty. 2. She was crowned as the queen-consort of Panduvasa; from this marriage eleven children were born: 3. Abhaya, Tissa, and Utti, Tissa, and Asela the fifth, Vibhata, Rama, and Siva, Matta to- gether with Mattakala. 4. The youngest of them was a daughter known by the name of Citta; because she fasci- nated the hearts of the men who saw her, she was called Ummadacitta (fascinating Citta). 5. (Panduvasa) arrived in Upatissagama in the same year in which he was crowned. This king reigned full thii'ty years. 6. There were seven Sakiya princes, the grand-child- ren of Amitodana, born in the family of the Lord of the world: Rama, Tissa, and Anuradha, Mahali, Dighavu, Rohana, Gamani the seventh of them. 7. The son of Panduvasa, prince Abhaya by name, reigned immediately (after his father) twenty years. 8. The wise son of Dighavu, the clever Gamani, who attended Panduvasa, cohabited with the princess Citta. 9. In con- 1) This chapter belongs to the most fragmentary parts of the whole work. First is related the marriage of Panduvasa and Kaccana (vv. 1 — 4). After a stanza referring to the length of Panduvasa’s reign (v. 5), the names of Kaccana’s brothers are given who came over to Ceylon (see Mahavamsa, p. 56). The following verses contain a short abstract of what is related at length in the Mahavamsa, pp. 57 et seq. 11 * 164 10 , 9 — 11 , 12 . sequence of that intercourse the prince called Panduka was born. Saving his life (from the persecutions of his uncles), (Panduka) resided in Dovarikamandala. XI. I. Abhaya’s twentieth year having elapsed, Pakunda had completed his twentieth year. Pakundaka was crowned when the thirty -seventh year from his birth had elapsed. 2. After Abhaya’s twentieth year Pakundaka lived as a robber; seventeen years later he put to death seven of his maternal uncles, and received the royal coronation in the town of Anuradhapura. 3. When ten years (of his reign) had elapsed and sixty years (of it) were still to follow, he fixed the boundaries of the villages and com- pletely tranquillized (the country). 4. Enjoying sove- reignty both over men and Yakkhas, Pakunda reigned during full seventy years. 5. The son of Pakunda was the prince called Mutasiva; this king reigned sixty years over Tambapanni. 6. 7. There were then ten brothers, the sons of Muta- siva: Abhaya, Tissa, and Naga, Utti together with Matta- bhaya, Mitta, Siva, and Asela, Tissa, and Kira completing the number of ten, and princess Anula and Sivahi, the daughters of Mutasiva. 8. When eight years of Ajata- sattu had elapsed, Vijaya came hither; after the fourteenth year of Udaya Vijaya expired. After the sixteenth year of Udaya they crowned Panduvasa. 9. In the interval be- tween the two kings Vijaya and Panduvasa, Tambapanni was without a king during one year. 10. In the twenty- first year of Nagadasa, Panduvasa died, and they crowned Abhaya in the twenty-first year of Nagadasa. II. ... seventeen years * 1 ); twenty-four ... 12. In the fourteenth year of Candagutta the king called Pakundaka died; in the fourteenth year of Canda- 1) The first words of this fragment seem to refer to the interreign after Abhaya’s death, which lasted seventeen years. The number of twenty-four I cannot explain. 11 , 12 — 25 . 165 gutta they crowned Mutasiva. 13. Seventeen years had elapsed after the coronation of Asoka, then Mutasiva died. 14. When seventeen years of that king (that is, Asoka) and six months of the next year had elapsed, in the second month of the winter season, under the most auspicious Nakkhatta of Asalha, Devanampiya was installed in the kingdom of Tambapanni. 15. At the foot of the Chata mountain three bamboo poles were to be found. (The first was) white like silver; its creeper shone like gold. 16. 17. There was also (the second), the flower pole, (whereon most beautiful,) .delightful (figures) like the shapes of flowers (presented themselves), dark blue, yellow, red, pure white, and black; and so also (the third), the bird-pole on which birds (appeared), each with its natu- ral colours, and also quadrupeds. 18. The eight descrip- tions of pearls (also presented themselves), viz. the horse pearl, the elephant pearl, the chariot pearl, the myrobalan pearl, the bracelet pearl, the signet pearl, the Kakubha pearl, the Sadisa (Pakatika?) pearl. 19. When Devanam- piya had succeeded to the throne, (the people,) moved by the splendour of his coronation, brought the three kinds of gems from the Malaya country, the three bamboo poles from the foot of the Chata hill, and the eight kinds of pearls from the sea-shore. 20. Great crowds brought in the space of seven days, in consequence of Devanampiya’s merit, the gems which were produced in Malaya and which were worthy of a king. 21. When the king saw these costly, precious treasures, the unequalled, incompar- able, wonderful, rare treasures, — 22. 23. he spoke with a heart full of joy: „I am high-born, noble, the chief of men; such is the reward of my righteous deeds; look at the treasures I have gained, which are worth many lacs and are produced in aonsequence of my merit. Who is worthy to receive the donation of these treasures, — 24. my mother or my father, a brother, relations, friends, or com- panions ?“ Thus meditating the king remembered prince Asoka. 25. Devanampiyatissa and Dhammasoka, the ma- ster of men, were both intimate friends, united by faithful 166 11, 25—36. affection, though they never had seen each other. 26. have a dear ally, the ruler of Jainbudipa, the righteous Asokadhamma, a friend dear as my life. 27. He is worthy to receive from me the gift of these treasures, and I also am worthy to present unto him the treasure of these most precious ornaments (?). 28. Arise, my dear (?) x ), quickly take these treasures, go to Jambudipa, to the city called Puppha(pura), and present these most precious trea- sures to Asoka, my ally.“ 29. Mahaarittha, Sala, the Brahmana Parantapabbata, the astrologer Puttatissa, these four men were the messen- gers despatched by Devanampiya. 30. Devanampiya sent the three resplendent gems, the eight excellent pearls, and the three (bamboo poles which had the size of) chariot poles, besides a collection of the most precious chanks, together with many valuable objects. 31. The king sent his minister Sala and his commander-in-chief Arittha, Pa- rantapabbata, and his astrologer Puttatissa, who were de- lighted (?) (with this service). 32. (Asoka in return sent) a royal parasol, a ... of Stira wood (?), a diadem, ear ornaments, water from the Ganges, and an (anointing) vase, a chank trumpet, and a palanquin, — 33. a right hand chank, a virgin, all that being worthy (?) of a royal coronation; a suit (a koti?) of clothes which are (cleansed by being passed through the fire) without being washed 1 2 ), costly towels, — 34. most precious yellow sandal wood , and measures of rouge, yellow, and emblic myrobalan; and therewith he sent this message: 35. „The Buddha is the best among those who are worthy of presents, the Faith is the best of all things which refer to the extinction of the passions, and the Samgha is the best field of merit: these are the three best objects in the world of men and Devas. 36. To this (triad) I, the prince, pay my reverence for the sake of the highest bliss." 1) The king addresses his nephew Arittha; see the Mahavamsa, p. 69. 2) I have adopted Tumour’s translation of „adhovimam“ (Mahavamsa, p. 70). 11 , 37 — 12 , 7 . 167 37. Those four messengers having sojourned five months (in Pataliputta, departed,) taking away the pre- sents sent by Asokadhamma, — 38. and arrived in this island from Jambudipa on the twelfth day of the increas- ing moon in the month of Vesakha. The requisites for the coronation having been sent by Asokadhamma, — 39. they celebrated a second coronation of king Devanam- piya. This second coronation took place on the full moon day of the month of Vesakha; — 40. one month after that day, on the full moon day of the month of Jettha, Mahinda arrived in this island from Jambudipa together with his six companions. Here ends the description of the things for the royal coronation. XII. 1. The (monarch) called Asoka sent (to Devanampiya) a chowrie, a turban, a sword, a royal parasol, slippers, a diadem, a ... of Sara wood, an (anointing) vase, a right hand ehank, — 2. a palanquin, a conch trumpet, water from the Ganges, a koti of clothes which are (cleansed by being passed through the fire) without being washed, a golden vessel and spoon, costly towels, — 3. a man’s load of water from the Anotatta lake, most precious yellow sandal wood, a measure of rouge, eye collyrium brought by the Nagas, — 4. yellow and emblic myrobalan, costly Amata drugs, one hundred and sixty cart loads of fra- grant hill paddy which had been brought by parrots; (all these things being) the rewards for his meritorious actions. 5. (Besides he sent the following message:) „I have taken my refuge in the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Samgha; I have avowed myself a lay pupil of the Doctrine of the Sakyaputta. 6. Imbue your mind also with the faith in this triad, in the highest religion of the Jina, take your refuge in the Teacher." 7. Doing honour (to Deva- nampiyatissa by) this (commission), Asoka the illustrious despatched the messengers to Devanampiya. 168 12 , 7 — 20 . As soon as the messengers had departed, — 8. many Theras who possessed the great (magical) powers ad- dressed Mahinda, in the most excellent Asokarama, out of compassion for the country, of Lanka, (as follows:) 9. „The time has come to establish the Faith in the island of Lanka; go, most virtuous one, convert the island of Lanka. “ 10. The wise and learned Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, having heard the speech of the Fraternity, con- sented together with his companions. 11. Adjusting his robe so as to cover one shoulder, raising his clasped hands, and saluting them with an inclination of the head, (he said:) „I go to the island of Lanka. “ 12. The (prince) called Mahinda became then the chief of that number; Itthiya and the Thera Uttiya, Bhaddasala and Sambala, — 13. and the novice Sumana who was possessed of the six (supernatural) faculties and of the great (magical) powers, those five great Theras being possessed of the (same) six (supernatural) faculties and great (magical) powers, depart- ing from the Asokarama went forth together with their retinue. 14. Wandering from place to place they reached Vedissagiri. They sojourned as long as they liked in the monastery of Vedissagiri. 15. Thera (Mahinda), having instructed his mother (in the doctrine of) the refuges, the moral precepts, and the L T posatha ceremonies, made the inhabitants of the island firm in the true faith and in the religion. 16. (Once) in the evening, Thera Mahinda, the great teacher, retiring into solitude, reflected whether the time would be favourable or unfavourable (for the conversion of Lanka). 17. Perceiving the thought of the Thera, Sakka the chief of gods appeared to the Thera, and thus ad- dressed him face to face: 18. „The time has come to thee, great hero, to convert Lankadipa; go quickly to the best of islands out of compassion for created beings. 19. Go to the most excellent Lankadipa, preach the Dhamma to created beings; proclaim the four Truths, release men from the fetters (of sin); — 20. make illustrious the doc- trine of the supreme Buddha in Lankadipa. Thy (advent) 12 , 20 — 30 . 169 has been foretold by the Chief (of the Faith); the frater- nity of Bhikkhus has elected thee, — 21. and I shall do service to thee at thy arrival in Lankadipa and perform all that is necessary; it is time for thee to depart." 22. Hav- ing heard the speech of Sakka, Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, reflected (thus): „Bhagavat has rightly pro- phesied about me, the fraternity of Bhikkhus has elected me, — 23. and Sakka has exhorted me; I shall establish the Faith; I will go to Tambapanni; subtle is the people of Tambapanni, — 24. (yet) they have not heard of the well proclaimed path which leads to the destruction of all suffering. I shall proclaim it to them; I shall go to the island of Lanka." 25. Mahinda, the son of Asoka, who well knew the time and the season, having resolved to go to Lanka, told his companions (to come). Mahinda was the chief of that number; there were (then) his four fellow- pupils, — 26. the novice Sumana, and the lay -disciple Bhanduka. To these six men who were endowed with the six (supernatural) faculties, (Mahinda) who possessed the great (magical) powers, thus made known (his inten- tion): 27. „Let us go now to the extensive, most excel- lent island of Lanka, let us convert many people and establish the Faith." 28. Expressing their assent (by ex- claiming:) „Be it so", they all were joyful. (They added:) „It is time, venerable sir, let us go to the mountain called Missaka; the king (Devanampiyatissa) is just leaving the town in order to hunt." 29. Sakka, the chief of the gods, was delighted and addressed Thera Mahinda who had retired into solitude, with the following speech: 30. „Venerable sir, Bhagavat has given this prediction about thee: ,In future times the Bhikkhu Mahinda will convert the island, he will propa- gate the religion of the Jina, he will set on foot there the kingdom of Righteousness, he will deliver created beings from great pain, and will establish them on firm ground, he will act for the welfare of many people, for the joy of many people, out of compassion for the world, for the good, for the welfare, and for the joy of gods and men.‘ 170 12 , 31 — 36 . 31. Thus Bhagavat has indicated thee, and now, at the present time, the Thera and the Bhikkhus have charged thee with the conversion of the island. It is time, great hero, to convert the island; the hour has come, great hero, to convert the island; upon thee this task has devolved; bear this burden, convert Tambapanni, propagate the reli- gion of the Jina. I am thy obedient pupil who gets up before thee and walks behind thee.“ 32. (Mahinda re- plied:) „I accept what Bhagavat, our Teacher, has said; I will save Tambapauni, I will show the light (to the island) and cause the splendour of the Jina to increase. (Tambapanni) is covered and enclosed by the overcloud- ing darkness of ignorance and of (worldly) existence; it is ruined by envy and selfishness; it cannot rise from the delusions which are produced by the fault of idleness; it has entered on a wrong way and goes far astray from the true path; it is exhausted; high born people have become (as it were) people covered with sores, and have become (feeble like) Munja or Babbaja grass. Tambapanni has entirely been subdued by obstacles and passions in con- sequence of the obscurity of error and of the darkness of ignorance and of (worldly) existence; it is covered, per- vaded, veiled, overshadowed, and girt round with that great darkness, the obscurity of error. 33. I shall destroy the darkness of error and throw light on all Tambapanni, I shall cause to shine the religion of the Jina.“ Being thus exhorted by Vasavinda, the chief of gods, by such a speech, he rose up from his solitude, and hav- ing attained to the fullness of resolve, he thus asked for the assent of the fraternity of Bhikkhus: 34. „Let us go to Tambapanni; the people of Tambapanni are subtle; (yet) they have not heard of the well proclaimed path which leads to the destruction of all suffering. I shall proclaim it to them, I shall go to the island of Lanka. “ 35. Having resided thirty days on the delightful hill ofVedissa, (they reflected thus:) „It is now time to start; let us go to the best of islands." 36. They flew through the air from Jambudipa, as the king of swans flies in the 12 , 36 — 50 . 171 air. Having thus risen, the Theras alighted on the best of mountains (Missaka). 37. To the east of the most ex- cellent town (Anuradhapura), on the cloud-like mountain they stationed themselves, on the top of Missaka, as swans (alight) on the summit of a hill. 38. The (Thera) called Mahinda was then the chief of that fraternity; Itthiya, Thera Uttiya, Bhaddasala, and Sambala, — 39. the novice Sumana, and the lay-pupil Bhanduka, all these possessing the great (magical) powers, were the converters of Tamba- panni. 40. The Thera, rising into the air as the king of swans rises to the sky, stationed himself to the east of the most excellent town on the cloud -like mountain, — 41. 42. on the top of Missaka, as swans (alight) on the summit of a hill. At that time Devanampiyatissa, the son of Mutasiva, was king and ruler of Tambapanni. The eighteenth year had elapsed since the coronation of Asoka, — 43. and full seven months since the coronation of Tissa, when Mahinda, twelve years (after his Upasampada ordi- nation), arrived in this island from Jambudipa. 44. In the last month of summer, on the full moon day of the month Jettha, under the asterisms Anuradha and Jettha, Mahinda at the head of his companions arrived on mount Missaka. 45. The king, going a hunting, (also) came to mount Missaka. A god who had assumed the form of an elk appeared to the king. 46. The king, seeing the elk, quickly rushed on him and running behind him he came to a place enclosed by hills. 47. There the Yakkha dis- appeared near the Thera; seeing the Thera sitting there, the king was frightened. 48. (The Thera reflected:) „As the king is alone, he shall see also me alone lest he should be frightened ; when his troops have come up, then he may see the Bhikkhus (also).“ 49. There (Mahinda) saw the prince, the protector of the earth, who appeared like a wicked person, going to hunt; he called him by the name of that prince: „Come hither, Tissa“, thus he then addressed him. 50. (The king thought thus:) „Who is that solitary, bald-headed man without companion, wearing a yellow garment and wrapped in a mantle, who addresses I 172 12 , 50 — 63 . me in the language of non-human beings?" 51. (Mahinda replied:) „I whom you ask, o prince, o protector of the earth, am a Samana belonging to the world of men. We are Samanas, great king, pupils of the king of Truth; out of compassion towards thee we have repaired hither from Jambudipa.“ 52. The king laid aside his weapons and seated himself by the side (of Mahinda); having seated himself, the king exchanged greetings with words full of deep meaning. 53. Having heard the speech of the Thera, he laid aside his weapons; then he approached the Thera, exchanged greetings with him, and sat dowm. 54. Gra- dually the ministers and the troops also arrived ; fourty thousand men in number they surrounded (the king and the Theras). 55. When the troops had come up, the king perceived the (other) seated Theras (and asked:) „Aro there many other Bhikkhus, pupils of the universal Bud- dha?" 56. „There are many disciples of Buddha, versed in the threefold science, possessed of the (magical) powers, well acquainted with the exposition of the qualities of mind, who have subdued their passions and reached Ara- hatship." 57. After having ascertained by means of the Amba parable that this victorious king was a clever person, (Mahinda) preached to him the most excellent Hatthipada Sutta. 58. When they had heard that most excellent (por- tion of the) Doctrine, these forty thousand men took their refuge (with Buddha), like a wise man in whose mind faith has arisen. 59. Then the king, glad, highly delighted and joyful, addressed the fraternity of Bhikkhus: „Let us proceed to the town, my capital." 60. Quickly (Ma- hinda) converted the pious, learned and wise king called Devanam(piya) together with his army. 61. Hearing what the kind said, Mahinda replied: „Go you, great king; we shall stay here." 62. When he had sent away the king, Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, addressed the fraternity of Bhikkhus: „Let us confer the Pabbajja ordination on Bhanduka." 63. Having heard what the Thera said, they all quickly turning their thoughts (to- 12 , 63—75. 173 wards that object) examined the village boundary and con- ferred the Pabbajja ordination on Bhanduka. At the same time he received the Upasampada ordination and attained Arahatship. 64. The Thera standing on the top of the mountain said to the charioteer 1 ): „Nay, a chariot is not suitable (to us); the Tathagata has rejected (its use).“ 65. Having sent away the charioteer, the Theras who had subdued their senses amd possessed the great (magical) powers, started throught the air, as the king of swans (rises) to the sky. Descending from the sky, they alighted on the ground. 66. When the charioteer saw them who put on their under garments and dressed themselves in their robes, he joyfully went to tell the king. 67. When the king had (first) despatched the charioteer, he had thus addressed his ministers: „Erect a pavilion in the town within the precincts of the palace. 68. The princes and princesses, the queens, and the women of the harem who desire to meet them, may see the Theras who have arrived. “ 69. The high-born ministers, after having heard the speech of the king, constructed in the middle of the precincts of the palace a pavilion canopied with cloth. 70. A canopy was spread, a clean, white and spotless cloth; it was decora- ted with flags and shells, and adorned with white strips of cotton. 71. White sand was scattered, well mixed with white flowers; (such was) the white, decorated hall, similar to the snowy regions (of the skies). 72. Having decora- ted the hall with entirely white cloth and having made the floor level, they spoke to the king: 73. „The well con- structed, beautiful hall, great king, is completed; choose now, Sire, seats which are suitable for ascetics. “ 74. At that moment the charioteer arrived announcing; to the king-; „ A chariot, Sire, is not suitable for the Bhikkhu frater- nity to sit down (therein). 75. O wonderful, Sire! all the Theras who possess the great (magical) powers, first re- mained behind me after having sent me away, (but now) 1) The king had sent his chariot the' next morning for bringing the Theras to the town; see Mahav., p. 81. they have arrived before me. 76. A high seat and a great seat are not suitable for the Bhikkhus; order a carpet (for them); the Theras approach." 77. The king, delighted at hearing the speech of the charioteer, went forth to meet the Theras, and having saluted, he exchanged greetings (with them). 78. Taking the alms -bowls of the Theras and honouring them with perfumed garlands, the prince together with the Theras arrived at the gate of the royal palace. 79. The Thera, having entered the hall in the interior appartments of the king, saw the floor strewn (as above described) and the seat covered with cloth. 80. They sat down on the seats prepared for them which were covered with cloth. When they had seated them- selves, the king gave them water, rice-gruel and food, — 81. and served to them with his own hands a most ex- cellent meal. When the Thera had finished his meal and removed his hand from the bowl, — 82. (the kiug) ad- dressed queen Anula together with the women of the in- terior appartments: „You know the opportunity, queen; it is time to pay your respects to them (the Theras)." 83. Queen Anula, surrounded by five hundred girls, bowed to the Theras and honoured them to her heart’s content. 84. Having approached the Theras and saluted them, she sat down. (Mahinda) preached to them the Dhamma; the great teacher exposed the fearful Peta stories, — 85. 86. the Vimana stories, the Saccasamyutta. When they had heard that most excellent (portion of the) Doctrine, princess Anula and her five hundred attendants, like a wise man (?) in whose mind faith has arisen, attained the reward of Sotapatti; this was the first case of the attainment (of a stage of sanctification which occurred in Lanka). XIII. 1. The whole crowd, the multitude of people who had not seen the Theras before, assembled at the gate of the royal palace and set up a great shout. 2. The king hearing the great noise . . . (asked:) „For what reason have 13 , 2 — 16 . 175 all these numerous people, has this great crowd assem- bled?“ 3. (The ministers said:) „This great crowd, Sire, has assembled for seeing the Fraternity; as they did not obtain a sight (of them), they set up that great shout. “ 4. (The king replied:) „The palace is much too small for this multitude to place themselves therein; the elephant stables are not too small; (there) these crowds may see the Thera.“ 5. When (Mahinda) had finished his meal and gladdened (the king by preaching the Dhamma), he rose from his seat, left the royal palace, and went to the ele- phant stables. 6. In the elephant stables they prepared a magnificent couch; on that excellent couch Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, sat down. 7. Seated on that most excellent couch Mahinda, the chief of (that) com- pany (of Bhikkhus), then preached the most excellent Devaduta Sutta. 8. Having heard that Devaduta discourse (which treats of) the most fearful (consequences of) former deeds, they were frightened and seized by great emotion, being terrified by the fear of hell. 9. When he saw that the people were oppressed by fear, he proclaimed the four Truths; at the end (of his discourse) one thousand men attained (sanctification); this was the second case of the attainment (of sanctification which occurred in Lanka). 10. Leaving the elephant stables (he went forth), fol- lowed by a great crowd, delighting many people, as Bud- dha had done in Rajagaha. 11. The crowd left the town by the southern gate; there was a pleasure garden called Mahanandana, to the south of the town. 12. In (this) royal pleasure garden they prepared a magnificent couch; there the Thera sat down and preached the most ex- cellent Dhamma. 13. There he preached the most ex- cellent Balapandita Suttanta. At that time one thousand created beings attained sanctification through the Dhamma. 14. 15. A great crowd then gathered in the Nandana pleasure garden; noble women and maidens, the daugh- ters-in-law and the daughters of noble families crowded together in order to see the Thera. While he exchanged greetings with them, night had fallen. 16. (The king there- 176 13 , 16 — 29 . fore addressed Maliinda:) „The Theras may pass the night here in the Mahanandana garden; it is too late for going hence to the distant dwelling in the mountains." 17. (Ma- hinda replied:) „The town which is filled with so many people, is too close by; in the night there will be a great noise; nay, let us go to that mountain which is like the palace of Sakka and well fitting for a retired existence." 18. (Tissa answered:) „There is a solitary garden of mine, the Mahameghavana, suitable for going and coming, not too far and not too near, — 19. easily accessible for people who want (to see you), by day not exposed to much noise, at night there is no noise at all. 20. It is well fitted for a retired existence, and suits ascetic people; it is endowed with prospects and shadow, it is beautiful, and produces flowers and fruits, — 21. it is well enclosed by a wall and well protected by towers at the gates. There is a well arranged royal gate in my delightful gar- den, — 22. a well constructed lotus -pond covered with white and blue lotuses, cold water in suitable reservoirs, which is sweetly scented by flowers. 23. So delightful is my garden, appropriate for (you) and the fraternity of Bhikkhus. There, o Thera, reside; have compassion on me." 24. Hearing what the king said, Thera Mahinda with his companions, surrounded by the host of ministers, proceeded then to the Meghavana garden. 25. Being in- vited by the chief of men, Thera Mahinda, the great teacher, entered the suitable Mahameghavana garden. In that garden, in the royal pavilion, the Thera, the great teacher, passed the night. ■ 26. On the second day the king again visited the Theras. Having bowed to them, he spoke thus to the Theras: 27. „Have you had a good night’s rest? do you find this residence comfortable?" (The Theras replied:) „The dwelling is solitary, well fitting the season, agreeable to lie in for men, — 28. convenient for a retired existence and desirable." The king, delighted by that speech, re- joicing and excited, — 29. he the ruler of the earth, took a golden vessel and dedicated the garden (to the Frater- 13 , 29 — 43 . 177 nity). Raising bis clasped hands, he pronounced the fol- lowing words: 30. „Here, venerable Sir, I give up the beautiful Mahameghavana garden to the Fraternity of the four quarters of the world; accept it." 31. Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, hearing what the chief of men said, accepted the garden for the sake of the construction of a monastery for the Fraternity. 32. At the moment when the Mahameghavana garden was given and accepted, the earth began to quake, and again and again thunder (was heard). 33. The chief of men called Tissa bestowed it on the Fraternity; they turned the Mahameghavana garden into (a monastery called) the Tissarama. 34. The Mahameghavana was the first Arama, worthy of the Re- ligion, which Devanampiya bestowed on the Fraternity. 35. Then the earth quaked, a horror-exciting portent. All people and the king, being terrified, asked the Theras (about the reason of that earth-quake). 36. „This is the first monastery in the most excellent island of Lanka; the reason of this first earth-quake is that the Faith has been established here.“ 37. Witnessing that astonishing, terri- fying miracle, they all waved their garments, as nothing of the kind had been experienced in the town. 38. Thence the rejoicing king in whose mind wisdom had arisen, raising his clasped hands, presented many flowers to Mahinda, the enlightener of the island. 39. The Thera accepted the flowers and threw them down in one place; then the earth again quaked; this was the second earth-quake. 40. Witnessing this miracle also, the royal retinue together with the people of the kingdom shouted ; this was the second earth-quake. 41. The delighted king who rejoiced still more, (then asked:) „Satisfy my desire (to learn the reason of) this second earth-quake. “ 42. „The Fraternity will (here) perform its business which is irreproachable and worthy of the F aith. At this very spot, o great king, will be the consecrated enclosure." 43. The king, still more delighted, presented flowers to the Thera; the Thera accepted the flowers and threw them down on another spot; then the earth quaked again; this was the third 12 178 13 , 43 — 59 . earth-quake. 44. (The king asked :) „What is the reason, o great hero, of this third earth -quake? Satisfy all my wishes, tell me, you are well experienced." 45. „On this spot will be the bath-house with a tank; here the Bhi- kkhus always will fill the bath." 46. Devanampiya, filled with high joy and delight, presented full-blown jasmine flowers to the Thera. 47. The Thera accepted the flowers and threw them down on another spot. Then the earth quaked again. This was the fourth earth-quake. 48. Wit- nessing that miracle, the great crowds who had assem- bled, raising their clasped hands, paid reverence to (the Thera) who possessed the great (magical) powers. 49. The king, glad and delighted, quickly asked: „What is the reason, o great hero, of this fourth earth-quake?" 50. „The descendant of the Sakyas, the great hero, was enlightened regarding the whole Truth near the Assattha tree; (there) he became the highest Buddha. That tree will be esta- blished on this very spot in this most excellent island." 51. Hearing that, the king, glad, joyful, and excited, pre- sented most excellent jasmine flowers to the Thera. 52. The Thera accepted the flowers and threw them down on the ground; at that moment also the earth quaked; this was the fifth earth -quake. 53. Witnessing that miracle also, the royal retinue together with the people of the kingdom shouted and waved their garments. 54. (The king asked:) „What is the reason, o great sage, of the fifth earth- quake? Tell me this matter, if that is consistent (?) with your pleasure and will." 55. „Each fortnight they will here recite the Patimokkha; on this very spot the Upo- satha hall will stand." 56. (The king) presented beautiful flowers to the Thera also in another place; the Thera accepted the flowers and threw them down on that spot. Then the earth quaked again; this was the sixth earth- quake. 57. Witnessing this miracle also, the crowds who had assembled, joyfully thus addressed each other: „Here a Vihara will stand." 58. The king who was still more delighted, said to the Theras: „What is the reason, o great Sage, of the sixth earth-quake?" 59. „As long as in fu- 13 , 59 — 14 , 8 . 179 ture times the alms due to the Fraternity (will be distri- buted), the assembled Fraternities of JBhikkhus will receive them, o great king, on this very spot." 60. Hearing the Thera’s speech, the delighted king presented most beauti- ful flowers to the Thera. 61. The Thera accepted the flowers and scattered them on another spot; then the earth quaked again; this was the seventh earth-quake. 62. Wit- nessing this miracle, the whole royal retinue and the people of the kingdom waved their garments, when the ground of the earth quaked. 63. (The king asked:) „What is the reason, o great sage, of the seventh earth -quake? Ex- plain it, o great sage, satisfy the desire of the multitude." 64. (Mahinda replied:) „As long as learned people will reside in this monastery, the refectory and the dinner hall will be on this spot." XIV. 1. Having heard the speech of the Thera, the king was still more delighted. Not accepting the Campaka flowers (offerred to him by the gardener), he presented them to the Thera. 2. The Thera threw down the Cam- paka flowers on the ground; then the earth quaked again; this was the eighth earth -quake. 3. Witnessing this mi- racle, the royal retinue and the people of the kingdom shouted and waved their garments. 4. (The king asked:) „What is the reason, o great hero, of the eighth earth- quake? Explain it, o great sage, we listen to your speech?" 5. 6. „The relics of Tathagata’s body consist of eight Dona-measures, men possessed of magical power will con- vey hither one Dona, o great king, and deposit it at this very spot, and erect (here) a resplendent Thupa which will be the means whereby hearts will be touched and many people will be converted." 7. The whole crowd that had assembled, the royal retinue and the people of the kingdom shouted at the quaking of the great earth. 8. (The Thera) resided (during the next night) in the Tissarama, and when the night had passed, he put on 12 * 180 14 , 9 — 22 . his under garment and wrapped himself in his robe; — 9. then he took his alms-bowl and entered the town, the capital. Going about in quest of alms he came to the gate of the palace. 10. He entered the royal palace and sat down on a seat; there he took his meal and cleansed the bowl with his hand. 11. 12. Having finished his meal and gladdened (the king by preaching the Dhamma), he left the palace and the town by the southern gate. He then preached in the Nandana garden the most excellent Aggikkhandha Suttanta. There one thousand men attained sanctification. 13. Having preached the true Faith and having delivered many created beings (from their sinful condition), the Thera rose from his seat and resided again (during the next night) in the Tissarama. 14. Having re- sided there during the night, when the night had passed, he put on his under garment and wrapped himself in his robe; — 15. then he took his alms-bowl and entered the town, the capital. Going about in quest of alms he came to the gate of the palace. 16. He entered the royal pa- lace and sat down on a seat; there he took his meal and cleansed his bowl with his hand. 17. 18. Having finished his meal and gladdened (the king by preaching the Dhamma), he left the town, the capital. When he had rested at noon in the most excellent Nandana garden, he preached there the beautiful Suttanta of the Asivisa parable. At the end (of this sermon) one thousand men attained sanctification; (this was) the fifth case of the attainment of sanctification (which occurred in Lanka). 19. Having preached the true Faith and awakened created beings, he rose from his seat and went to the Tissarama. 20. The king was greatly delighted at the eight- fold (?) earth-quake; glad, rejoicing and satisfied the king thus addressed the Theras: 21. „The monastery has been firmly established, an excellent resting-place for the Fra- ternity. (Your) Abhinnapadaka meditation, venerable Sir, (has caused) this great earth-quake. “ 22. (The Thera re- plied:) „By this alone, o king, the rest-house for the Fra- ternity has not yet been firmly established; the Tathagata 14, 22—34. 181 has instituted (the ceremony) called the determination of boundaries. 23. 24. Having defined on all sides by the eight classes of landmarks the boundaries within which all Bhikkhus are considered as one section, and (having decreed about) not parting with the three robes *), all the sections (of the Fraternity) assemble and vote on their affairs. A place enclosed by boundaries which have been fixed in that way, is called one community. (Then) the monastery is well established, and the rest-house duly founded." 25. (The king answered:) „My sons and wives together with my ministers and my retinue, all have be- come your lay pupils and have taken for all their life their refuge (in the Faith). 26. I ask you, great hero, do what I say; let the whole multitude (of the towns- people) reside on the ground included by the boundaries. 27. Here always they will find a defence through the pro- tecting power (?) of charity and compassion." (Mahinda said:) ^Determine you the limits, o king, as you like; — 28. the limit being given, the Fraternity will settle the boundaries." Mahapaduma and Kunjara, the two state- elephants, — 29. were first harnessed to a golden plough in Kotthamalaka. The great army consisting of four hosts (proceeded), and together with the Theras the king, • — 30. the destroyer of his enemies, made a furrow with the golden plough. (During this progress there were seen) adorned full vases, beautiful flags of different colours, — 31. triumphal arches decorated with vai'ious flowers and flags, garlands (?), and many burning lights (?). (Thus the king) ploughed with the golden plough. 32. For the sake of the conversion of many people, the prince together with the Theras, turning his right hand towards the city, walked around it and came to the bank of the river. 33. Draw- ing (?) the furrow which indicated the line of the great boundary, on the ground with the golden plough, he then (?) ari’ived (again) at Kotthamalaka. 34. The two ends of the furrow having been united in the presence of 1) See the rules about the definition of boundaries and about the „tici- varena avippavasa", Mahavagga, II, 6 — 12. 182 14 , 34 — 48 . a great crowd, the earth quaked; this was the first earth- quake. 35. Witnessing that miracle, the whole royal re- tinue together with the people of the kingdom joyfully said to each other: „There will be a monastery within the boundary." 36. The ruler Devanampiya indicated to the Theras how far they had fixed the marks of the boundary line, of the enclosure, (and spoke thus:) 37. 38. „As the preparatory ceremonies for fixing the boundary and the enclosure have been performed, may the Thera now out of compassion for me settle the limits, in order to esta- blish firmly the Vihara which will be suitable for the fra- ternity of Bhikkhus." Having heard what the king said, Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, — 39. thus ad- dressed the fraternity of Bhikkhus: „0 Bhikkhus, let us fix the boundary." Under the constellation of Uttarasalha the whole Fraternity assembled. 40. Having determined the extent of the sacred enclosure, (Mahinda) who was gifted with (supernatural) vision, fixed the boundary within which the Bhikkhus were to be considered as one section. Having firmly established the most excellent Tissarama monastery, — 41. he resided (during the next night) in the Tissarama, and when the night had passed, he put on his under garment and wrapped himself in his robe; — 42. then he took his alms-bowl and entered the town, the capital. Going about in quest of alms, he came to the gate of the palace. 43. He entered the royal palace and sat down on a seat; there he took his meal and cleansed the bowl with his hand. 44. Having finished his meal and gladdened the king (by preaching the Dhamma), he left the town, the capital. When he had rested at noon in the Nandana pleasure garden, — 45. he then preached the Asivisupama Suttanta, the Anamataggiya Sutta, and the incomparable Cariya Pitaka; — 46. he also repeat- edly propounded the Gomayapindaovada and the Dhamma- cakkappavattana in that same place, in the Mahanan- dana garden. 47. 48. These Suttantas he preached during (those) seven days, and (in this time) Thera Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, delivered eight thousand and five 14 , 48 — 61 . 183 hundred people from the fetters (of sin). Having resided in the Tissarama together with his companions something less then a month, — 49. he thus addressed all the towns- men on the full -moon day of As:xlha, when the time of Vassa had approached: „The time of Vassa is near." Here ends the acceptance of the Mahavihara. 50. Having arranged his sleeping-place, Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, took his alms-bowl and his robe, and left the Tissarama. 51. He put on his under gar- ment and wrapped himself in his robe; then he took his alms-bowl and entered the town, the capital. 52. Going about in quest of alms, he came to the gate of the pa- lace. He entered the royal palace, and (there the Theras) sat down on the becoming seats. 53. There (Mahinda) took his meal and cleansed the bowl with his hand; (then) he preached the Mahasamaya Suttanta in order to exhort (the king). 54. Having exhorted the king, Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, rose from his seat and departed without taking leave. 55. The great teacher left the town by the eastern gate, and sending back all people he pro- ceeded to the (Missaka) mountain. 56. The ministers were filled with anxiousness, and announced to the king: „ All the great Theras, Sire, have gone to the Missaka moun- tain." 57. The king, frightened at this news, ordered the horses quickly to be put to the chariot. The prince taking the queens with him, quickly ascended the chariot. 58. Thera Mahinda together with his companions had pro- ceeded to the foot of the mountain. There was a lake called Nagacatukka, situated amidst the rocks; after bath- ing at that place and drinking (the water of that lake), he ascended the summit of the mountain. 59. The prince who profusely perspired in consequence of his great haste, saw from afar the Thera, standing on the summit of the mountain. 60. Leaving the queens in the chariot, the prince descended from the chariot, approached the Theras, saluted, and addressed them thus: 61. „Why, great hero, have you left the delightful kingdom , myself, and the 184 14 , 61—74. people, and retired to this mountain?" 62. (Mahinda replied:) „Here we shall spend, three full months, the Vassa which Tathagata has allowed to begin earlier or later" '). 63. (The king replied :) „I do everything that is required for the comfort of the Bhikkhu fraternity; have compassion on me, and instruct me." 64. „The Bhikkhus have been permitted by Buddha to begin the Vassa in a village as well as in the forest, (provided they) dwell in a room with shut doors." 65. „I have understood what you have said, the whole sense with its reasons; this very day I shall erect a residence suitable for the Vassa." 66. The illustrious monarch who had reached the full per- fection attainable by a layman, looked out (for a place), and dedicated (it) to the Theras, (saying:) „Reside here out of compassion; — 67. well, venerable Thera, take pos- session of these rock -cut cells (and of this) Arama. In order to establish firmly the Vihara, fix the boundary, great Sage." 68. 69. The son of the king’s sister, renowned by the name of Maharittha, and also fifty -five illustrious noble- men approached the king, saluted him, and said: „We all desire to receive the Pabbajja ordination from that man endowed with highest wisdom; — 70. 71. we will embrace a life of holiness; give us your consent, Sire." Hearing what they all had said, the delighted king, the ruler of the earth, approached the Theras, and thus addressed (Ma- hinda): „(There are) fifty-five chiefs with Mahaarittha at their head; confer on them personally the Pabbajja ordi- nation, great hero; I give my consent." 72. Hearing the king’s speech, Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, thus addressed the Bhikkhu fraternity : „Let us fix the boun- dary, o Bhikkhus." 73. (The Theras), in order to esta- blish firmly the Vihara, consecrated the boundary within which all Bhikkhus were to be considered as one section, and the enclosure (?), and proclaimed the decree about not parting with the three robes. 74. Having fixed the 1) See Maliavagga, III, 2, 2. 14 , 74 — 15 , 4 . 185 inner and the outer boundary at the Tuxnba enclosure, Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, proclaimed the (ex- tent of) the great boundary. 75. The (Thera) who was gifted with (supernatural) vision, consecrated the whole enclosure and the boundary, and firmly established the second monastery which was situated on the Tissapabbata. 7G. After having consecrated the boundary on the moun- tain precisely on the full-moon day of the month Asalha, on the Uposatha day, under the constellation of Uttar- asalha, — 77. he conferred the Pabbajja ordination on Maharittha who was the first person (who received it) in this second enclosure; at the same time he conferred the Upasampada ordination on this prince who belonged to the royal family of Tambapanni. 78. At the same time (those) fifty-five (other noblemen received) the Pabbajja and Upa- sampada ordinations. In the first Arama thirty -two consecrated enclosures were established; — 79. thirty-two in the second Arama, in the monastery of the Tissa mountain. The other small Aramas contained one enclosure each. 80. The Arama and the monastery being founded on that most excellent mountain, sixty-two persons, who were all Arahats, entered on the Yassa residence; this was the first time (that this event occurred in Lanka). Here ends the acceptance of the Cetiya mountain. XV. 1. (Mahinda said to the king:) „In the first month of the summer, on the full moon, on the Uposatha day, we have come hither from Jambudipa; we have dwelt on this most excellent mountain. 2. During five months we have not left the Tissarama nor the mountain; now we will go to Jambudipa; permit it, o lord of charioteers." 3. (The king replied:) „We serve you with food and drink, with clothes and dwelling-places; the whole people has taken refuge (in the Faith); what causes you dis- satisfaction?" 4. (Mahinda said: „We have no object here 186 15 , 4 — 17 . to which we may pay respect by) salutations and by rising from our seats, or by raising our clasped hands, and by respectful contemplation. For a long time, o great king, we have not seen the Sambuddha, the highest among men.“ 5. (The king answered:) „ Verily I have under- stood you, venerable sir; I will erect a most excellent Thupa; find you out a suitable place (?); I will build a Thupa in honour of the Teacher. 44 6. (Mahinda gave the following order to Sumana:) „Go, chief Sumana ; repair to Pataliputta, and address thus the righteous king Asoka: 7. „Your ally, great king, has been converted to the faith of Buddha; grant to him (some of) the most excellent relics; he is going to erect a Thupa in honour of the Teacher. 44 8. Learned (Su- mana) who was versed in the scriptures, a powerful, elo- quent speaker, who had reached the perfect possession of (magical) power, who was firm and well grounded (in the Faith), — 9. took his alms -bowl and his rohe, and instantly departed from the mountain. According to the truth he thus addressed king Dhammasoka: 10. „Hear, great king, the message which my teacher sends you. Your ally, great king, has been converted to the faith of Buddha; grant to him (some of) the most excellent relics; he is going to erect a Thupa in honour of the Teacher. 44 11. Having heard this speech, the rejoicing and excited king filled the alms -bowl with relics, (saying:) „Quickly depart, pious man. 44 12. The powerful, eloquent speaker then took the relics, rose into the air and repaired to Kosiya (Indra). 13. The eloquent man having approached Kosiya thus addressed him: „Hear, great king, the mes- sage which my teacher sends you. 14. King Devanam- piya has been converted to the faith of Buddha; grant to him a most excellent relic; he is going to erect a splendid Thupa. 44 15. Having heard his speech, Kosiya re- joicing gave him the right collar-bone (of Buddha, saying:) „Quickly depart, pious man. 44 16. The novice Sumana, leaving Kosiya and taking away the right collar-bone, de- scended on the most excellent mountain (Missaka). 17. The 15 , 17 — 31 . 187 wise man who was filled with modesty, fear of sin, and reverence, despatched by the king of Theras, placed him- self on the most excellent mountain. 18. The king to- gether with his brothers , at the head of a great army, and accompanied by the most excellent Bhikkhu frater- nity, then went to meet the relics of the highest Buddha. 19. 20. On the day of the full moon of the month Kattika, on the day of the Catumasa festival, the great hero ar- rived. (The dish with the relics) was placed on the frontal globe of the (state) elephant. 21. (The elephant) roared, like a struck gong; at that moment the earth quaked, when the Sage in the neighbourhood (of the mountain) approached. 22. The sound of the chanks and the roll of the drums mixed with the boom of the kettle-drums (was heard). The prince escorting (the relic) paid reve- rence to the highest of men. 23. The noble elephant turning westward proceeded together with the foot soldiers; he then entered the town by the eastern gate. 24. Men and women (there) offered various perfumes and garlands. The most excellent elephant leaving (the town) by the southern gate, — 25. proceeded to the very spot which teacher Kakusandha, Konagamana and Kassapa, the old Sages, formerly had visited. 26. When the most ex- cellent elephant had proceeded to that hill, the chief of men (there) deposited the relics of Sakyaputta. 27. At the moment when the relics were placed (there), the gods expressed their delight, and the earth began to quake in an astonishing, terrifying manner. 28. (The king) with his brothers, gladdening the ministers and the people of the kingdom (by his order), caused the bricks for the Thupa to be manufactured. 29. The noblemen paid singly their reverence to the most excellent Thupa; the highly precious relics which shone like a light, were covered with excellent gems. 30. (There were) white (?) canopies, separate canopies, covers (?), various (?) canopies, suitable ornaments, beauti- ful chowries. 31. Near the Thupa a brilliancy spread in all directions over the four quarters from the lamps, like 188 15 , 31 — 43 . the brilliancy of the rising sun. 32. Cloths brilliant with various colours were spread (?), and above (the Cetiya?) shone like (?) the cloudless sky. 33. A canopy covered with gold, which was encircled by (ornaments) made of gems and by most precious crystal, and adorned by gold sand .... (Mahinda related to the king the story of the relics of the three former Buddhas:) 34. „Here Sambuddha Kaku- sandha, chief of men, surrounded by forty thousand (Bhi- kkhus who were holy) like (himself), looked (over this island). 35. The Buddha, gifted by (supernatural) vision, moved by compassion, looked on created beings, and on the suffering men in Ojadipa, Abhayapura. 36. In Oja- dipa (he looked) with the power of the rays of his Bodhi on many created beings, on a great multitude that was to attain (supreme) knowledge, as the sun (awakens) the lotuses. 37. Accompanied by forty thousand Bhikkhus he repaired to Ojadipa, resembling the rising sun. 38. (The Buddha’s name was) Kakusandha, (that of the chief Thera) Mahadeva, the mountain (was called) Devakuta; (there reigned in the island of) Ojadipa, (in the town of) Abhaya- pura, a prince named Abhaya. 39. The well constructed town which was worth seeing, delightful, and pleasant, was situated near the Kadambaka river. 40. (At that time there raged in the island) a fearful epidemic fever called Punnakanaraka; the people were in a state of affliction like fishes in a net. 41. In consequence of the power of the Buddha the fever ceased. When (the Buddha) had preached the Truth which delivers from death, and had established the Faith of the Jina, — 42. eighty-four thou- sand men attained sanctification. At that time the mo- nastery was the Patiyanima, and (the Cetiya was) • the Dhaminakarakacetiya (Cetiya where the drinking vessel of the Buddha is preserved). 43. Mahadeva accompanied by one thousand Bhikkhus, remained (there), and the Jina, the highest being, himself departed from that place. 15 , 44 — 57 . 189 44. Here Sambuddha Konagamana, the great Sage, accompanied by thirty thousand Bhikkhus, looked (over the island). 45. The Sambuddha gifted with (supernatu- ral) vision, diffused his compassion through ten thousand worlds; the great hero looked on the suffering people of Varadipa. 46. In Varadipa (he looked) with the power of the rays of his Bodhi on many created beings, on a great multitude that was to attain (supreme) knowledge, as the sun (awakens) the lotuses. 47. Accompanied by thirty thousand Bhikkhus the Sambuddha repaired to Vara- dipa, resembling the rising sun. 48. (The Buddha’s name was) Konagamana, (that of the chief Thera) Mahasumana, the mountain (was called) Sumanakuta ; (there reigned in the island of) Varadipa, (in the town of) Vaddhamana, a prince named Samiddha. 49. 50. At that time the island suffered from a drought; there was a famine . . . When the created beings were afflicted by the famine like fishes in shallow water, abundant rain fell, when the Omniscient had arrived; the country became prosperous; he brought consolation to many people. 51. To the north of the town which was situated near the Tissatalaka, there was the Uttararama monastery; (the Cetiya at that time was) the Kayabandhanacetiya (Cetiya where the girdle of the Bud- dha is preserved). 52. Eighty-four thousand men attained sanctification. When the Truth which delivers from death, had been preached, — 53. Mahasumana, similar to the rising sun, accompanied by one thousand Bhikkhus, re- mained (there), and the great hero himself, the highest being, departed. 54. Here Sambuddha Kassapa, the ruler of the world, accompanied by twenty thousand Bhikkhus, looked (over the island). 55. Omniscient Kassapa looked down on the world of men and gods, and discerned by the pure vision of the Buddhas the beings who were to attain (supreme) knowledge. 56. Omniscient Kassapa, the receiver of offer- ings, diffusing (the rays of) his high compassion, per- ceived the furious contest (between king Jayanta and his brother Samiddha), — 57. and by the power of the rays 190 15 , 57 — 70 . of his Bodhi, as the sun (awakens) the lotuses, he saw many beings in the island of Mandadipa who were to attain (supreme) knowledge. 58. „I shall go to Manda- dipa and cause the Religion to shine there; I shall pro- duce there high splendour like that of the moon in the darkness (of the night)". 59. Surrounded by multitudes of Bhikkhus the Jina proceeded through the air; resembling the rising sun he repaired to Mandadipa. 60. (The Bud- dha’s name was) Kassapa, (that of the chief Thera) Sabba- nanda, the mountain (was called) Subhakuta, the name of the town was Visala, that of the prince was Jayanta. 61. To the east of the town which was situated near the Khema tank, there was the Paciuarama monastery; (the Cetiya at that time was) the Dakasatika Cetiya (Cetiya where the rain-cloak of the Buddha is preserved). 62. The Sambuddha, after having comforted and reconciled the (two) brothers, preached the Truth which delivers from death, and established the Faith. 63. When the Truth which delivers from death, had been preached, and the doctrine of the Jina had been established, eighty-four thousand men attained sanctification. 64. Glorious Sabba- nanda, surrounded by one thousand Bhikkhus, remained in Mandadipa; the ruler of the world departed. 65. Here (also stood) the Sambuddha who has ap- peared in the world (in the present age), the ruler of the world. „Out of compassion for the living I will save created beings." 66. The Sambuddha, the chief of the world, the highest among men, looked on the great ar- mies of Nagas which had assembled, ready for a battle. 67. The Serpents emitted smoke and flames, they raged, they spread great horror, they were destroying the great island. 68. (The Buddha) went alone (to the island:) „I shall go to the most excellent island; I shall pacify the two Serpents, the uncle and the nephew." 69. This Sambuddha was called Gotama; (it was) on the mountain called Cetiya(pabbata) ; there reigned in the delightful town called Anuradhapura a prince named Tissa. 70. In Kusinara, in the Upavattana of the Mallas, the holy Sam- 15, 70 — 81 . 191 buddha reached complete Nibbana by the destruction of the substrata (of existence). 71. (He at that time fore- told:) „Two hundred and thirty-six years will elapse; then (a Thera) called Mahinda by name will cause the splen- dour of the Religion to shine (in Lanka). 72. In the south of the town, at a delightful place (will be) a beautiful Ararna called the Thuparama. 73. At that time the island (will be known) by the name of Tambapanni; they will deposit a relic of my body in that most excellent island. “ 74. The queen called Anula was a believer in the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Fraternity; she confessed the true doctrine, and put away the desire of existence. (She expressed to the king her desire of being admitted into the Order.) 75. Having heard what the queen said, the king addressed the Thera thus: („ Queen Anula) be- lieves in the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Fraternity; she confesses the true doctrine, — 76. and puts away the desire of existence. Confer the Pabbajja ordination on Anula.“ (Mahinda replied:) „It is not permitted to Bhi- kkhus, o great king, to confer the Pabbajja ordination on women; — 77. my sister Samghamitta, o king, shall come hither. She will confer the Pabbajja ordination on Anula and will release her from all fetters. 78. Wise Samgha- mitta and clever Uttara, Heina and Masagalla, Aggimitta, chary of speech, Tappa and Pabbatacchinna, Malla and Dhammadasiya, - — 79. these Bhikkhunis who are free from desire and firm, whose thoughts and wishes are pure, who are firmly established in the true Dhamma and Vinaya, — 80. who have subdued their passions, who have their senses under control and have attained (perfection), who possess the three-fold science and know well the (magical) powers, who are well grounded in the highest bliss, will also come hither. 81. (Devanampiya) sat down, surrounded by his mi- nisters, and deliberated (about inviting princess Samgha- mitta). Having sat down in order to hold a council (about 192 15 , 81 — 16 , 1 . this matter), he thus addressed the ministers . . . 82. Prince Arittha, having heard what the king said, — 83. and having heard the speech of the Thera and received his commission, respectfully saluted his uncle (?) and departed in the northern direction. 84. 85. Having established their residence in a cer- tain quarter of the town, the noble ladies, five hundred virgins, queen Anula at their head, all high-born and illu- strious, having undertaken to observe the ten moral pre- cepts, all this multitude late and early surrounded Anula. 86. (Arittha) having proceeded to a sea -port went on board a great ship; when he had crossed the sea and reached the shore he stood (on dry ground). 87. The powerful minister (then) crossed the Vinjha range; having arrived at Pataliputta, he presented himself to the king. 88. (Arittha thus addressed Asoka:) „Your son, Sire, your offspring, o great king Piyadassana, Thera Mahinda has sent me in your presence. 89. King Devanampiya, your ally, o Piyadassana, who is converted to Buddha, has sent me in your presence. “ 90. (Then) the great Sage (went to Samghamitta and) communicated to her the message of her brother: „The royal virgins, o Samghamitta, and prin- cess Anula, — 91. all look to you for the Pabbajja ordi- nation." Wise Samghamitta, when she had heard the message of her brother, — 92. quickly went to the king and thus addressed him: „Give your consent, great king; I shall go to the island of Lanka; — 93. the great Sage has communicated to me the message of my brother." (Asoka replied:) „Your sister’s son Sumana and my son, your elder brother, — 94. being gone, prevent, dear, that you, my daughter, should go also." (Samghamitta replied:) „ Weighty, o great king, is my brother’s command. 95. The royal virgins, o great king, and princess Anula, they all look to me for their Pabbajja ordination." XVI. 1. The prince (Asoka) fitted out a great army con- sisting of four parts, and then went forth, taking with 16 , 1 — 16 . 193 him a branch of the Bo tree of the Tathagata. 2. Having passed through three kingdoms and the Vinjha range, having passed through the great forest, the prince came to the ocean. 3. The great four-fold army with the Bhikkhuni congregation at its head (?), proceeded to the great sea, carrying the excellent Bo tree. 4. When (the Bo branch) was carried to the sea, on high the musical instruments of the gods (were heard,) and below those of men, the instruments of men from all four quarters. 5. Prince Piya- dassana bowing paid his reverence to the Bo tree, and spoke thus: 6. „Learned, possessed of (magical) power, virtuous, most firm . . 7. The prince then (when the Bo branch had been despatched) wept, shed tears, and looked (on the parting vessel). Then he returned and came to his residence. 8. The Nimmita Nagas in the water, the Nimmita Devas in the heavens, the Nimmita Devas in the tree (itself), and (the Nagas) of the Naga world, — 9. they all surrounded the most excellent branch of the Bo tree which was carried away. The wild Pisacas, the Bhutas, Kumbhandas, and Rakkhasas, these non-human beings sur- rounded the branch of the Bo tree as it approached. 10. The Tavatimsas and Yamas and also the Tusita gods, the Nimmanarati gods and the Vasavatti gods — 11. (were) glad, joyful and delighted, when the Bo branch approached. And all the Tettimsa Devaputtas with Inda as their leader, — 12. 13. snapped their fingers and laughed when the Bo branch approached. The four (divine) Maharajas of the four quarters (of the horizon), Kuvera and Dhatarattha, Virupakkha and Virulhaka, surrounded the Sambodhi tree which was earned to the island of Lanka. 14. Maha- mukhas and kettle-drums, Divillas (?), leather -covered drums, and tabors (resounded); the gods joyfully shouted „Sadhu“ when the Bo branch approached. 15. Pariccha- ttaka flowers, celestial Mandarava flowers, and celestial sandal powder rained through the air, and the gods did homage to the Bo branch when it approached. 16. The gods offered on the ocean to the Bo tree of the Teacher 13 194 16 , 16 — 30 . Campaka flowers, Salla, Nimba, Naga, Punnaga, Ketaka flowers. 17. The Naga kings, the Naga princesses, the young Nagas, great crowds, left their residence and showed honour to the excellent Bo branch. 18. The Nagas, dressed in garments of various colours and wearing ornaments of various colours, joyfully sported around the great Bodhi on the ocean (shouting:) „Hail to us.“ 19. 20. The Nagas offered to the Bo branch on the glittering ocean red, white and blue lotuses of various kinds, Atimutta of honey-sweet scent, Takkarika and Kovilara flowers, trum- pet flowers, and quantities of Bimbajala flowers, Asoka and Sala flowers mixed with Piyangu. 21. The delighted Naga virgins, the joyful Naga kings, (all the) Nagas joy- fully sported around the Bo branch which was carried along, (shouting:) „Hail to us.“ 22. There the ground consisted of gems, and was covered with pearls and cry- stals; there were gardens and tanks adorned with various flowers. 23. Having remained there seven days, (the Na- gas) together with gods and men paid honour to the ex- cellent Bo branch on its departure from their residence. 24. The Naga virgins and the gods, surrounding the Sam- bodhi branch, (offered) strings of garlands and flower wreaths, and waved their garments. 25. The gods sported around the Bodhi which was carried along, (shouting:) „Hail.“ Pfiricchattaka flowers, celestial Mandarava flowers, and celestial sandal power rained through the air. 26. The N:\gas, Yakkhas, and Bhutas, together with gods and men, surrounded the Sambodhi branch which was carried along on the ocean. 27. There, surrounding the Bo branch, they danced, sung, played (instruments), laughed, and snapped the fingers of both hands. 28. The Nagas, Yakkhas, and Bhutas, together with gods and men, when the most ex- cellent Bodhi was carried along, exclaimed: „Oh auspi- cious event, hail.“ 29. Beautiful Nagas of brilliantly blue colour, holding flags, praised the most excellent Bodhi which was being established in the island of Lanka. 30. Great crowds, the prince with the queens, left the delightful (town of) Anuradhapura, and went to meet 195 16 , 30—41. the Sambodhi tree. 31. The prince together with his sons surrounded the Sambodhi tree; they offered scented gar- lands and most excellent perfumes (?). 32. The streets were well swept and offerings were prepared. When the Bodhi was established, the earth quaked. 33. The king appointed eight (persons of each class?) and the chiefs of each of eight warrior clans (?) to be Bodhi gards (?), for the custody of the most excellent Bodhi. 34. He fitted them out with great state, and be- stowed on them beautiful ornaments of every description; out of reverence for the Bo branch he ordered sixteen great lines to be traced on the ground (?) *). 35. Then he caused also pure white sand (?) to be scattered on that spot where the great lines had been drawn. He ap- pointed one thousand families . . . 36. He bestowed on them golden drums for the performance of the rites of royal coronations and other festivals. He gave (to them) one province and erected (for them) the Candagutta (pa- lace?) — 37. (and) the Devagutta palace, (and) duly (be- stowed on them) land donations (?); to other families he gave the revenue of villages. 38. The five hundred high-born, illustrious virgins of the royal court who were free from passion and steadfast, all received the Pabbajja ordination. 39. The five hundred virgins who surrounded Anula, who were free from pass- ion and steadfast, all received the Pabbajja ordination. 40. Prince Arittha, released from the chain of fear, received the Pabbajja ordination according to the doctrine of the Jina, together with five hundred companions. All these persons attained Arahatship and full perfection in the doc- trine of the Jina. 41. In the first month of the winter season, when the tree was full of blossoms, the great Bo branch was brought (hither) and established in Tamba- panni. 1) If my translation of this very corrupted passage is correct, the six- teen lines mentioned here may stand in some connexion with the sixteen lines drawn on the ground by Mara near the Bo tree at Uruvela (Jataka, I, p. 78). 13 196 « 17 , 1 — 15 . XVII. 1. 2. The excellent island of Lanka is thirty-two yoja- nas long, eighteen yojanas broad, its circuit is one hun- dred yojanas; it is surrounded by the sea, and one great mine of treasures. It possesses rivers and lakes, moun- tains and forests. 3. The island, the capital, the king, the affliction (which vexed the island), the relics, the Thupa, the lake, the mountain, the garden, the Bodhi tree, the (chief) Bhikkhuni, — 4. the (chief) Bhikkhu, and the most excellent Buddha: these are the thirteen subjects (to be treated in the following exposition). Listen to my enumer- ation of the four names of each of these subjects (in the time of the four last Buddhas). 5. (The island) was called Ojadipa, Varadipa, Manda- dipa, and the excellent Laiikadipa or Tambapanni. 6. Abha- yapura, Vaddhamana, Visala, Anuradhapura are the four names of the capital at (the time of) the teaching of the four Buddhas. 7. Abhaya, Samiddha, the ruler of men Jayanta, and Devanampiyatissa are the four kings. 8. The fever, the drought, the contest (of the two kings), and (the island's) being inhabited by the Yakkhas, these are the four afflictions which the four Buddhas have removed. 9. The relic of holy Kakusandha was the drinking vessel, the relic of Buddha Konagamana the girdle, — 10. the relic of Sambuddha Kassapa the rain-cloak; of glorious Gotama there is a Dona of corporeal relics. 11. In Abha- yapura was the Patiyarama, in Vaddhamanapura the Uttara- rama, in Visala the Pacinarama, in Anuradhapura the Thuparama which is situated in the southern direction: (there) the four Thupas at (the time of) the teaching of the four Buddhas (were situated). 12. 13. The town of Abhayapura was situated near the Kadambaka (lake), the town of Vaddhamana near the Tissa lake, the town of Visalapura near the Ivhema lake; Anuradhapura ....; the indication of the four directions (?) is as above. 14. The four names of the mountain are Devakuta, Sumanakuta, and Subhakuta; now it is called Silakuta. 15. The fam- 17 , 15 — 26 . 197 ous (?) garden (which was called in the four periods respectively) Mahatittha, Mahanama, Sagara, and Maha- meghavana, a path worthy of Saints, was the first resting place of the four chiefs of the world. 16. The Bodhi tree of holy Kakusandha was the most excellent Sirisa; Ruca- nanda who possessed the great (magical) faculties, took its southern branch and planted it in Ojadipa, in the Maha- tittha garden. 17. The Bodhi tree of holy Konagamana was the most excellent Udumbara; Kanakadatta who pos- sessed the great (magical) faculties, took its southern branch — 18. and planted it in Varadipa, in the Mahanama gar- den. The Bodhi tree of holy Kassapa was the most ex- cellent Nigrodha; — 19. (the Theri) called Sudhamma who possessed the great (magical) faculties, took its southern branch and planted the sacred tree in the garden called Sagara. 20. The Bodhi tree of holy Gotama was the most excellent Assattlia; Samghamitta who possessed the great (magical) faculties, took its southern branch — 21. and planted it in the island of Lanka, in the delightful Maha- meghavana. Rucananda, Kanakadatta, Sudhamma who pos- sessed the great (magical) powers, — 22. and learned, wise Samghamitta who was endowed with the six (super- natural) faculties, these were the four Bhikkhunis who brought each a Bo branch (to this island). 23. The Sirisa Bo tree (was planted) in the Mahatittha garden, the Udum- bara in the Mahanama, the Nigrodha in the Mahasagara garden; so the Assattha was planted in the Mahamegha- vana. 24. On a mountain, in those four gardens, the four Bo trees have been planted; on a mountain was the de- lightful resting-place (of the four Buddhas), when the four Buddhas proclaimed their doctrine. 25. Mahadeva who possessed the six (supernatural) faculties, Sumana versed in the analytical knowledge, Sabbananda possessing the great (magical) powers, and learned Mahinda, these highly wise Theras were the converters of Tambapanni. 26. Kakusandha, the highest in the whole world, who was endowed with the five kinds of (supernatural) vision, looking on the whole world, saw the excellent Ojadipa. 198 17 , 27 — 41 . 27. There raged then an epidemic fever called Punnakana- raka; at that time there raged an epidemic fever among the people. 28. Many people, attacked by this sickness, became distressed and disconsolate like fish which lie lost on the bank (of a river). 29. 30. Vexed by fear they were unable to regain happiness and tranquillity of mind. Kakusandha, the chief of the world, when he saw the afflicted beings who were being destroyed by the bonds of sickness, came hither from Jambudipa together with forty thousand companions, for the sake of subduing the disease. 31. Forty thousand (Saints) who possessed the six (supernatural) faculties and the great (magical) powers, surrounded the Sambuddha, as the stars in the sky sur- round the moon. 32. Kakusandha, the illuminator of the world, established himself with his pupils on the Deva- kuta mountain, shining in splendour like a god. 33. When he stood resplendent in Ojadipa on the Devakuta moun- tain, all people believed him to be a god. They did not understand that he was the Tathagata. 34. (When they saw him) who arose with the rising dawn, on the day of the full moon, on the Uposatha day, and who illumined that mountain with its forests as if it were burning, — 35. when they saw the burning mountain which diffused light through the four quarters, all the people of Abhaya- pura with the king were joyful and delighted. 36. Buddha Kakusandha, the ruler of the world, formed the following resolution: „May all people, all men who live in Ojadipa, see me.“ 37. 38. The Devakuta mountain was honoured among Rishis and liked by men; to that place went the hosts of people (who had been afflicted) by the distress of that fever, all the citizens together with the king, leaving the town, the capital, and there they paid homage to Kakusandha, the highest among men. 39. The royal re- tinue together with the people of the kingdom, a great crowd, arrived respectfully saluting the Sambuddha whom they believed to be a god. 40. 41. All this multitude ap- proached the most excellent Buddha, the highest among men. (The king thus addressed him:) ^Consent, o Bhaga- 17 , 41 — 53 . 199 vat, to dine to-day together with the Bhikkhu fraternity (in my palace); let us go to the town, to the capital. “ The Sambuddha agreed to the request of the king by re- maining silent. 42. Having understood his consent, the royal retinue and the people of the kingdom, paying great honour and respect (to the Buddha), then returned to the town. 43. (The king thus reflected:) „This fraternity of Bhikkhus is numerous, the crowd of the people is great; there is no place prepared for its reception in this narrow town, in my capital. 44. I possess a great pleasure gar- den, the delightful garden of Mahatittha which is not too narrow nor too distant, which will be convenient for the ascetics — 45. and will be suitable for a retired existence and for the Tathagata. There I will bestow presents on the Buddha and on the Bhikkhu fraternity. 46. 47. May all people obtain the sight of the Buddha and of the Fra- ternity.“ Omniscient Kakusandha, followed by forty thou- sand Bhikkhus, arrived at the Mahatittha garden. When the highest among men had entered the Mahatittha gar- den, — 48. the creepers and trees (were covered?) with flowers out of season. The king took a golden water-pot, — 49. and dedicated (the garden) for the sake (of the welfare) of Lanka, by pouring water over the hand (of the Buddha, saying): „I give, o Lord, this garden to the Samgha and to the Buddha, its chief. w It was a delight- ful resting-place, an appropriate residence for the Frater- nity. 50. Kakusandha, the ruler of the world, accepted the garden. At that moment the earth quaked; this was the first resting-place (of the Samgha in Lanka). 51. The highest leader of the world stood there, causing the im- movable earth to quake. (He then formed the following wish:) „Oh that Rucananda might take the Bo branch and come hither.“ 52. The Bhikkhuni who possessed the high (magical) powers, understanding the thought of holy Kakusandha, went to the great Sirisa Bodhi, and standing at its foot (she thought:) 53. „The Buddha desires that the Bodhi tree shall grow in Ojadipa.“ Thither she went in order to fetch the Bodhi tree, (the majesty of) which 200 17 , 53 — 68 . is beyond human reason (?). 54. (She then expressed the following resolution:) „May, with the consent of the most excellent Buddha, out of compassion for mankind, the southern branch sever itself through my magical power. 44 55. When Rucananda had pronounced this demand with clasped hands, the right branch severed itself (from the tree) and fixed itself in the vase. 56. Rucananda who possessed the high (magical) powers, took the Bo branch in the golden vase, and ordered five hundred Bhikkhunis to surround it. 57. At that moment the earth quaked together with oceans and mountains; it was a grand sight, wonderful and astonishing. 58. Witnessing this, the royal retinue and the people of the kingdom delighted all raised their clasped hands and paid reverence to the excellent Bodhi branch. 59. All the gods were delighted; the Devas joyfully shouted when they perceived the most excellent Bodhi branch. 60. The four (divine) Maharajas, the glo- rious guardians of the world, all these gods kept guard over the Sirisa Bodhi branch. 61. The Tavatimsa gods, the Vasavatti gods, Yama, Sakka, Suyama, Santusita, Su- nimmita, all surrounded the most excellent Bo branch. 62. The delighted crowds of gods, raising their clasped hands, together with Rucananda, paid reverence to the most excellent Bo branch. 63. Rucananda who possessed the high (magical) powers, carrying the Sirisa Bo branch, went to the excellent Ojadipa, accompanied by the sister- hood of Bhikkhunis. 64. The gods danced, laughed, and snapped the fingers of both hands, when the most excel- lent Sirisa Bo branch was carried to the excellent Ojadipa. 65. Rucananda who possessed the high (magical) powers, accompanied by a host of Devas, approached Kakusandha, carrying the Sirisa Bo branch. 66. At that moment the great hero Kakusandha, the ruler of the world, repaired to the spot in the Mahatittha garden destined for the re- ception of the Bo tree. 67. Rucananda herself did not plant the resplendent Bo branch; Kakusandha, perceiving that, himself stretched out his right hand. 68. Rucananda who possessed the high (magical) powers, placed the 17 , 68 — 82 . 201 southern branch of the Bo tree in the Buddha’s right hand, and respectfully saluted him. 69. Kakusandha, the chief of the world, the highest among men, took it and gave it to king Abhaya (saying:) „Plant it on this spot.“ 70. Abhaya, the increaser of the kingdom, planted it on the spot which Kakusandha, the leader of the world, had indicated. 71. When the Sirisa Bo branch had been planted in that delightful place, the Buddha preached the Doctrine, the four Truths which soothe (the mind of men). 72. When he had finished, one hundred and forty thousand men and thirty kotis of gods attained (sancti- fication). 73. The Bo tree of Kakusandha was a Sirisa, that of Konagamana an Udumbara, that of Kassapa a Nigrodha; (this is) the description of the three Bo trees. 74. The Bo tree of the incomparable Sakyaputta is the most ex- cellent Assattha; taking it (hither) they planted it in the Meghavana garden. 75. 76. The children of Mutasiva were ten [other] brothers, Abhaya, Tissa, and Naga, Utti and also Matta- bhaya, Mitta, Siva, and Asela, Tissa, and Kira; these were the brothers. Princess Anula and Sivali were the daugh- ters of Mutasiva. 77. How great is the number of years which elapsed between the time when Vijaya came over to the most ex- cellent Lankadipa, and the royal coronation of the son of Mutasiva? 78. Devanampiya was crowned two hundred years and thirty -six years more after the Sambuddha at- tained Parinibbana. 79. When Devanampiya was crowned, the royal (magical) powers came over him ; the lord of Tambapanni diffused rays of pure splendour. 80. At that time the most excellent Lankadipa was a storehouse of treasures. Produced by the pure splendour of Tissa many treasures came to light. 81. When the glad and excited king saw these treasures, he sent them as a present to Asokadhamma. 82. Asoka was delighted when he saw these presents. He sent in return to Devanampiya va- rious treasures destined to be used at his coronation. 202 17 , 83 — 96 . 83 — 86. The (monarch) called Asoka sent a chowrie, a turban, a royal parasol, a sword, slippers, a diadem, a . . . of Sara wood, an (anointing) vase, a right hand chank, a palanquin, a conch trumpet, earrings, a koti of clothes which are (cleansed by being passed through the fire) without being washed, a golden vessel and spoon, costly towels, a man’s load of water from the Anotatta lake, most precious yellow sandal wood, a measure of rouge, eye col- lyrium brought by the Nagas, yellow and emblic myro- balan, costly Amata drugs, one hundred and sixty cart loads of fragrant hill paddy which had been brought by parrots; (all these things being) the rewards for his merit- orious actions. 87. The requirements for his coronation as king of Lanka having been sent by Asokadhamma, Tissa, the lord of Tambapanni, celebrated his second co- ronation. 88. When thirty nights had elapsed after the second coronation of Tissa, Mahinda together with his com- panions arrived on this island from Jambudipa. 89. (King Devanampiya) erected the most excellent monastery called Tissarama. He also planted the great Bo tree in the Mahameghavana garden. 90. He built the great, delightful Thupa. Devanampiya erected a monastery on the Cetiya mountain; — 91. he constructed the Thuparama, the Tissa- rama (Issarasamana?) Vihara, the Vessagiri (Vihara), and the Colakatissa (Vihara?). 92. Aramas too (where the minor Bo branches were planted) at the distance of a yojana from each other, were made by king Tissa. He gave the great donation (which is called) the most excel- lent Mahapela. This prince reigned forty years. 93. Then (followed his) other four brothers, the sons of Mutasiva. Prince Uttiya reigned ten years. 94. Eight years after the coronation (of Uttiya), the enlightener of the island attained Nibbana. (The king) caused the fu- neral ceremonies to be performed to the east of the Tissa- rama. 95. When the twelfth year (after his Upasampada) had been completed, Mahinda came hither; at the end of his sixtieth year he attained Nibbana on the Cetiya moun- tain. 96. 97. When the enlightener of the island has at- 17 , 96 — 109 . 203 tained Nibbana, king Uttiya, having ordered full vases, triumphal arches, garlands, and burning lamps to be pre- pared, erected a most excellent hearse which was worth seeing. (Thus) he paid reverence to the enlightener of the Island. 98. Both gods and men, Nagas, Gandhabbas, and Danavas , all were grieved and paid reverence to the enlightener of the Island. 99. When they had performed the ceremonies during seven days on the most excellent Cetiya mountain, some people spoke thus: „Let us go to the town, to the capital." 100. (Other people replied:) „There (in the town) is a great, fearful noise and uproar; let us here burn the enlightener of the island of Lanka." 101. When the king heard what the crowd said, (he answered:) „I will erect a great Thupa to the east of the Tissarama". 102. Carrying Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, together with the funeral hearse, (the people) to- gether with the king, entered the eastern gate of the town. 103. Marching through the centre of the town, they left it by the southern gate, and performed great ceremonies during seven days in the Mahavihara. 104. Both gods and men erected a funeral pile of odoriferous drugs and placed it in the royal garden, (saying:) „Let us burn the virtuous one." 105. They took Mahinda, the enlightener of the island, together with the funeral hearse, circum- ambulated the Vihara, and caused (the people) to pay reverence to the most excellent Thupa. 106. The great crowd, leaving the Arama by its eastern gate, performed the funeral ceremonies at a place close by it. 107. They all, weeping, raising their clasped hands, ascended the pile, and bowing they set the pile on fire. 108. The great teacher having thus been burnt entirely, they erected a most excellent Thupa which contained his relics, and Aramas at the distance of one yojana from each other. 109. After the funeral ceremonies for Mahinda, the enlight- ener of the island, had been performed, that place first received the name of Isibhumi. 204 18 , l—io. XVIII. I. 1 ) At the present time there are other aged, middle- aged, and young (Bhikkhus), holders of the Vibhajja doc- trine, preservers of the tradition of the Vinaya and of the Faith. 2. Learned and virtuous they illuminate this earth; by a conduct which conforms to the Dhutanga rules they shine in the island of Lanka. 3. Many followers of Sakyaputta are here who well understand the true re- ligion and (its) history. Truly, for the sake of many people the possessor of (supernatural) vision has appeared in the world; the Jina has dispelled the darkness and shown the light. 4. They whose faith is well and firmly grounded on the Tathagata, leave all wretched states of existence and are born again in heaven. 5. And those who penetrate the constituent members of Bodhi, the organs (of spiritual life), the (ten) powers, attention, right exertion, and the complete system of (magical) powers, — 6. the holy eight- fold path which leads to the destruction of suffering, con- quer the army of Death and are victorious in the world. 7. The younger twin-sister of queen Maya, born from the same mother, kind like a mother, suckled Bhagavat. 8. (She was) called Mahapajapati, known by the name of Gotami, renowned, an original depositary (of the Faith), possessing the six (supernatural) faculties and the high (magical) powers. 9. The two chief female pupils were Khema and Uppalavanna; (besides, there was) Patacara, Dhammadinna, Sobhita, Isidasika, — 10. Visakha, Sona, and Sabala, wise Samghadasi, and Nanda, a guardian of the Dhamma and well versed in the Vinaya. These (Bhi- kkhunis) who well knew the Vinaya and the paths (of sanctification), (lived) in Jambudipa. 1) The opening lines of this chapter were evidently intended to form the conclusion of a list of Theras which, however, is wanting in the Dipa- vamsa or at least in the MSS. we possess. Vv. 1. 2 exactly correspond to v. 44 which ends the great list of Theris. Buddhaghosa gives in the Intro- duction of the Samanta Pasadika a list of Theras which he says is com- posed by the Porana (comp. Introd., pp. 2- — 5). This list presents a close resemblance to the list of Theris contained in this chapter. 18 , 11 — 24 . 205 11. The Theri Samghamitta, and wise Uttara, Hema, and Pasadapala, and Aggimitta, Dasika, — 12. Pheggu, Pabbata, and Matta, Malla, and Dhammadasiya, these young Bhikkhunis (these eleven Bhikkhunis?) came hither from Jambudipa. 13. They taught the Vinaya Pitaka in Anu- radhapura. They (also) taught the five Collections (of the Sutta Pitaka) and the seven Treatises (of the Abhi- dhamma). 14. Saddhammanandi, and Soma, and also Giriddhi, Dasiya, and Dhamrna, a guardian of the Dhamma and well versed in the Vinaya, — 15. and Mahila who kept the Dhutanga precepts, and Sobhana, Dhammatapasa, highly wise Naramitta who was well versed in the Vinaya, — 16. Sata, versed in the exhortations of Theris, Kali and Uttara, these Bhikkhunis received the Upasampada ordi- nation in the island of Lafik.a. 17. 18. ... and renowned Sumana who well under- stood the true religion and (its) history, these Bhikkhunis who were passionless and tranquil, the resolutions of whose minds were pure, who were firmly grounded in the true Faith and in the Vinaya, came together with twenty thou- sand Bhikkhunis . . ., honoured by illustrious, noble Abhaya. 19. They taught the Vinayapitaka in Anuradhapura; they (also) taught the five Collections (of the Sutta Pitaka) and the seven Treatises (of the Abhidhamma). 20. Renowned Mahila who well understood the true religion and (its) history, and Samanta, the daughters of king Kakavanna, — 21. and learned Girikali, the daughter of his Purohita, Dasi and Kali, the daughters of a rogue, well versed in the whole of the sacred Scriptures (?), — 22. these Bhikkhunis, well versed in the whole of the sacred Scriptures, unconquerable, the resolutions of whose minds were pure, who were firmly grounded in the true Faith and in the Vinaya, — 23. came from (?) Rohana together with twenty thousand Bhikkhunis, honoured by illustrious king Abhaya. They taught the Vinayapitaka in Anuradhapura. 24. Mahadevi and Paduma, illustrious Hemasa, Un- 206 18 , 24 — 39 . nala, Anjali, Suma, — 25. these Bhikkhunis who possessed the six (supernatural) faculties and the great (magical) powers, came . . . together with sixteen thousand Bhikkhu- nis. 26. Honoured by illustrious king Tissa Devanam- piya (?), they taught the Vinayapitaka in Anuradhapura. 27. Mahasona and Datta, wise Sivala, zealous Rupaso- bhini, venerated Devamanusa, — 28. Naga and Nagamitta, Dhammagutta, and Dasiya, and Samudda gifted with (su- pernatural) vision, who well understood the true Religion and (its) history, — 29. Sapatta, Channa, and Upali, ex- cellent Revata, these were the highest among the Vinaya- studying Bhikkhunis, the daughters of Somanadeva, — 30. Mala and Khema and Tissa, the highest among the preachers of the Dhamma, these taught the Vinaya first after the death of Abhaya (or: when the danger had dis- appeared ?). 31. 32. Sivala and Maharuha who well understood the true Religion and (its) history, and had converted to the Faith many people in Jambudipa, came hither from Jambu- dipa together with twenty thousand Bhikkhunis, invited by illustrious king Abhaya. 33. They taught the Vinaya- pitaka in Anuradhapura; they (also) taught the five Col- lections (of the Suttapitaka) and the seven Treatises (of the Abhidhamma). 34. Sivala together with queen Samuddanava, daugh- ters of a king, wise Nagapali, and clever Nagamitta, — 35. Mahila, a guardian of the Bhikkhunis and well versed in the Vinaya, Naga, and Nagamitta who well knew the true Religion and (its) history, these Bhikkhunis then re- ceived the Upasampada ordination in the island of Lanka. 36. All these were high-born and renowned in the Doc- trine, the most excellent ones among sixteen thousand Bhi- kkhunis, acknowledged to be the leaders. 37. Honoured by Kutikanna (and by his son,) illustrious Abhaya, they taught the Vinayapitaka in Anuradhapura. 38. Culanaga and Dhanna, venerated Sona, and re- nowned Sanha who well knew the true Religion and (its) history, — 39. highly learned and wise Mahatissa, the 18, 39—53. 207 daughter of Garnika, Culasumana, Mahasumana, and clever Mahakali, — 40. illustrious Lakkhadhamma, honoured and high-born, wise Dipanaya who was venerated in Roliana, — 41. renowned Samudda who well knew the true Reli- gion and (its) history, holders of the Vibhajja doctrine and of the Vinaya, who both were ornaments of the Sister- hood, — 42. these and other Bhikkhunis received the Upa- sampada ordination in the island of Lanka. (These Bhi- kkhunis,) the resolutions of whose minds were pure, who were firmly grounded in the true Faith and in the Vinaya, — 43. learned, versed in the Tradition, free from evil passions, and illustrious, went out (attained Nibbana) after having spread radiance, like fire-brands. 44. At the present time there are other aged, middle- aged, and young (Bhikkhunis), holders of the Vibhajja doctrine and of the Vinaya, preservers of the tradi- tion of the Faith. Learned and virtuous they illuminate this earth. 45. Prince Siva reigned ten years; he established the Arama and the Vihara of Nagarangana. 46. Prince Sura- tissa reigned ten years; he constructed five hundred mo- nasteries, a liberal, great, and meritorious deed. 47. Having conquered Suratissa, the two Damila princes Sena and Gutta righteously reigned during twelve (twenty -two?) years. 48. Prince Asela, a son of Mutasiva, put Sena and Gutta to death, and reigned ten years. 49. A prince, Elara by name, having killed Asela, reigned righteously forty-four years. 50. Avoiding the four evil paths of lust, hatred, fear, and ignorance, this incomparable monarch reigned righteously. 51. (Once) no rain fell during a whole winter, summer, and the rainy season. (Then) continually the cloud rained, rain fell during seven times seven days. 52. There were three cases which the king decided 1 ); (after that) rain fell only during the night and not in day- time. 53. A prince, Abhaya by name, the son of Kaka- vanna, whom the ten warriors surrounded, whose elephant 1) In the Mahavainsa (p. 128) an account of these three cases is given. 208 18, 54 — 19 , 5 . was Kandula, — 54. put thirty-two kings to death and alone continued the royal succession. This prince reigned twenty-four years. End of the Mahavara. XIX. I. 1 ) The king (Dutthagamani) built an exceedingly costly, quadrangular palace (the Lohapasada) of nine stories in height, at an expense of thirty kotis. 2. (He also erected the Mahathfipa, at the foundation of which the following materials were used:) chunnam work, great stones, clay, bricks, pure earth, a plate of iron, then marumba 2 ), — 3. small gravel, eight layers (?) of stones, twelve (layers?) of crystal and silver. 4. After the prince had caused these foundations to be laid, the Fraternity of Bhikkhus was called together, and the circle (of the base) of the Cetiya was described. 5. Indagutta, Dhammasena, the great preacher Piyadassi, Buddha, Dhamma, and Samgha, wise Mittanna, — 1) This chapter is very confused and fragmentary. However by com- paring the Mahavamsa it is possible to ascertain what the single verses refer to. Verse 1 relates to the great palace called Lohapasada which was erected by king Dutthagamani (comp. Mahav., p. 165, 1. 2). Vv. 2 — 4 con- tain a description of the different preparatory works for the construction of the Mahathupa built by the same king. There is nothing, however, to in- dicate the transition of the narrative from the Lohapasada to the Maha- thupa; perhaps v. 10 which would answer to this purpose, originally be- longed to the place between vv. 1 and 2. — Vv. 5 — 9 refer to the Bhikkhus present at the solemn inauguratory ceremonies at the foundation of the Mahathupa (see Mahavamsa, p. 171). — Vv. 11 — 17 refer to the acts of liberality performed by king Lajjitissa (Mah., p. 202), and to the history of his successors. — Vv. 18 — 20 give an account of the buildings erected by the seven great warriors of Abhava Vattagamani (Mah., p. 206). — Vv. 21 — 22 refer to Mahaculi Mahatissa, the successor of Vattagamani (Mah., p. 208). The last verse relates to the death of Dutthagamani. 2) I cannot define the exact meaning of „marumba“. Tumour trans- lates this word by „incense“ (Mah., p. 169), which is decidedly wrong. To me it seems to mean something like „gravel“. In the explanation of the tenth Pacittiya Rule, in the Sutta Vibhanga, I find the following passage which I give exactly according to the Paris MS. ( fonds Pali 6) which is written in Burmese characters: „pathavi nama dve pathaviyo jata ca pathavi ajata ca pathavi. jata nama pathavi suddhapamsu suddhamattika appapasaua appa- sakkhara appakathala appamarumpa appavalika ...; ajata nama pathavi suddhapasaua suddhasakkhara suddhakathala suddhamarumpa suddhava- lika“, etc. 19 , 6—18. 209 6. Anattana, Mahadeva, learned Dhammarakkhita, Uttara, and Cittagutta, and clever Indagutta, — 7. the great chief Suriyagutta of prompt wisdom, all these fourteen (Theras) came from Jambudipa to this country (when the foundation of the Maliathupa was laid). 8. (Besides these there were present) Siddhattha, Mangala, Sumana, Paduma, and also Sivali, Candagutta, and Suriyagutta, Indagutta, and Sa- gara, Mittasena, Jayasena, and Acala, the twelfth of them. 9. (The person that held the circle by which the base of the Thupa was described, and his parents, had the fol- lowing auspicious names, viz.:) Suppatitthitabrahma, the son, Nandisena, the father, Sumanadevi, the mother, these three lay persons. 10. (The king constructed) the Maha- thupa, the most excellent Mahavihara, expending twenty (twenty-four?) invaluable treasures. 11. (King Lajjitissa,) having heard the precepts for the conduct of itinerant Bhikkhus, which were propounded by the Fraternity, gave medicaments for the itinerant Bhi- kkhus, for the sake of their comfort, ... 12. Having heard the well-spoken speech of the Bhikkhunis, which had been delivered at the ... time (at Harikala?), the royal lord gave to the Bhikkhunis whatever they desired. 13. He constructed the Silatliupa, a Vihara on the Cetiya moun- tain, and the most excellent assembly hall which is called Jalaka. 14. (By the next king, Vattagamani, a monastery) was constructed at the place where the Nigantha Griri had dwelt. (From this circumstance,) the appellation and the name of Abhayagiri derived its origin. 15. The five kings Alavatta (Pulahattha!), and Sabhiya (Bahiya!), Panaya, Palaya, and Dathika reigned fourteen years and seven months. 16. Prince Abhaya (Vattagamani), the son of Saddhatissa, put the Damila Dathika to death and became king. 17. He erected the Abhayagiri (monastery) between the Silathupa and the Cetiya. This prince reigned twelve years and five months. 18. The seven champions of Abhaya constructed five Aramas. Uttiya and Saliya, Mula, Tissa, and Pabbata, Deva, and Uttara, these were the seven 14 210 19 , 19 — 20 , 8 . champions (of that king). 19. The (warrior) called Uttiya constructed the (monastery) called the Dakkhinavihara, Saliya the Saliyarama, Mula the Mulasaya, — 20. Pabbata the Pabbatarama, Tissa constructed the Tissarama, Deva and Uttara constructed the Devagara. 21. The son of Kakavanna, Mahatissa, the ruler of the earth, made an agreement to work for wages in the paddy fields, and gave (the money) to the tranquil, thought- ful Thera Summa. 22. Having made an agreement for full three years’ labour at a (sugar-) mill, he bestowed a great donation of a thousand kotis on the Bhikkhus. 23. Wise, enlightened Abhaya Dutthagamaui, after having performed meritorious deeds, entered after the dis- solution of his (human) body, the body of a Tusita god. XX. 1. The illustrious son of Kakavanna, known by the name of Tissa, built the Mahathupa (and) a Vihara. 2. He ordered the most excellent Kallakalena monastery to be constructed; and many other Viharas have been erected by Saddhatissa. 3. The number of the highly precious divi- sions of the Dhamma is eighty -four thousand; he paid reverence to each single division of the Dhamma separa- tely. 4. Illustrious Saddhatissa constructed a beautiful pa- lace with seven stories, and ordered it to be roofed with iron plates; — 5. 6. (hence) it first received the name Lohapasada (iron palace). He made a lump of glass (?). Around the most excellent Mahathupa he constructed a wall, decorated with figures of elephants, a beautiful enclo- sure; he (also) constructed a quadrangular tank (and gave it) for a certain time (to the Fraternity). 7. This prince reigned eighteen years. Having done many other merit- orious deeds and distributed rich donations, this wise monarch after the dissolution of his (human) body entered the body of a Tusita god. 8. The son of Saddhatissa, known by the name of Thulathana, constructed a great Arama, the Alakandara monastery. This prince reigned one month and ten days. 20, 9—23. 211 9. The son of Saddhatissa, known by the name of Lajjitissa, governed nine years and six months. 10. He constructed a . . . . *) at the most excellent Mahathupa and established the most delightful Kumbhila Arama. 11. He built the Dighathupa to the east of the Thuparama; in the most excellent Thuparama he constructed receptacles cased in stone. 12. After the death of Lajjitissa his younger brother named Khallatanaga reigned six years. 13. His com- mander-in-chief, Maharattaka by name, put this Khallataka to death and reigned one day, a wicked, ungrateful person. 14. The younger brother of the king, called Vattaga- mani, killed that wicked general and reigned five months. 15. (After that time) the Damila Pulahattha reigned three years, and the general Bahiya two years. 16. Having killed this (king), Panayamara reigned seven years. Having killed this (king), Palayamara reigned seven months. 17. Having killed this (king), a person Dathiya by name reigned two years. These five sovereigns belonging to the Damila tribe governed fourteen years and seven months in the interval (between the two parts of Vattagamani’s reign). 18. Then the glorious, great king Vattagamani came back and having put to death the Damila Dathika^ gained the sovereignty himself. 19. This king Abhaya Vattagamani reigned twelve years and in the beginning (before the above-mentioned interruption) five months. 20. Before this time, the wise Bhikkhus had orally handed down the text of the three Pitakas and also the Atthakatha. 21. At this time, the Bhikkhus who perceived the decay of created beings, as- sembled and in order that the Religion might endure for a long time, they recorded (the above-mentioned texts) in written books. 22. After his (Vattagamani’s) death Mahaculi Maha- tissa reigned fourteen years justly and righteously. 23. This king, full of faith, having done many meritorious deeds, 1) Probably this passage refers to the three „pupphayana“ mentioned in the Mahavamsa (p. 201, 1. 14), though I do not know how to explain or to correct the word used here (tilancanam). 14 212 20 , 23 — 21 , 4 . went to heaven after fourteen years. 24. The son of Vatta- gamani, known by the name of Coranaga, reigned twelve years living like a robber. 25. The son of Mahaculi, the prince known by the name of Tissa, reigned three years over the Island. 26. King Siva cohabited with queen Anula; he ruled one year and two months. 27. A king from a foreign country, Vatuka by name, a Damila, go- verned one year and two months. 28. Then followed king Tissa, known by the surname „the wood-cutter“ ; he then ruled one year and one month. 29. (A person) called Niliya by name, known as the Damila king, ruled the kingdom and governed three months. 30. A woman, Anula, killed these excellent persons and governed four months over Tambapanni. 31. The son of Mahaculi, called Kutikannatissa, con- structed an Uposatha hall near the Cetiyapabbata mona- stery. 32. In front of the building he erected a beautiful stone Thupa; there he planted a Bo branch and con- structed a great structure (around the Bo branch?). 33. He built a bath . . . for the Bhikkhunis. He also made a fence round the Padumassara garden. 34. He caused a ditch to be dug for the protection of the town, and a wall to be constructed full seven yards (in height). 35. He (also) caused the ponds Khema and Dugga to be dug (which he gave) for a certain time (?) (to the Fraternity). He (also) caused the Setuppala well and the beautiful Vannaka dike (?) to be constructed. This prince reigned twenty-two years. XXI. 1. Prince Abhaya, the son of Kutikanna, went to visit the Fraternity (?) in the beautiful Mahathupa. 2. The (Bhi- kkhus) who had subdued their passions and obtained self- control, who were spotless and pure of heart, recited (the Dhamma) in the relic room in honour (of the relics). 3. The king, when he heard them reading in the delight- ful relic room, walked round the Tbupa; but he could not see them at any of the four gates. 4. The royal ruler 21 , 4 — 19 . 213 of men, having paid in every way reverence to the most venerable recitation, thus thought: „Were do they read? 5. They do not recite at the four gates nor outside; surely the wise men read in the relic room. 6. I also desire to see the most excellent relic room, I will hear the recital and see the Bhikkhu fraternity." 7. Sakka, the king of gods, when he perceived the desire of the king, appeared in the relic room and thus addressed the Theras: 8. „The king, venerable sirs, desires to see the relic room." For the sake of the preservation of his faith they conducted him into the relic-room. 9. As the king beheld the relic- room, wisdom arose in his mind; he raised his clasped hands and worshipped the relics and made great offerings during seven days. 10. He seven times made most ex- cellent offerings, prepared with honey. He seven times made priceless offerings of ghee (?), — 11. and (also) duly seven times other (?) offerings. Seven times he made offerings of lamps, repeating them, — 12. and seven times beautiful offerings of flowers. During seven days he made offerings of water full (of flowers), and during seven days offerings of (common) water. 13. He ordered a priceless net-work of corals to be made, covering the surface of the Mahathupa as if it were dressed in a garment. 14. He made strong pillars for placing lamps around the foot of the Thupa, and got a tube filled with ghee; then he or- dered the lights seven times to be lit. 15. He caused a tube (to be laid) around the foot of the Thupa and to be filled with oil, and ordered the oil-lamps fourteen times to be lit. 16. Having caused (a tube?) to be filled with scented water, he fixed mats at the top (of the Thupa); (on these) he caused handsfull of blue lotuses to be scat- tered; this offering was made seven times. 17. Having dug a channel (from the Thupa) to the Khema pond (which was situated) to the west of the Thupa, he made there a water offering. 18. An entire Yojana around (the Thupa) he caused flowers to be planted, and made a flower thicket at the most excellent Mahathupa. 19. The prince, having collected flowers covered with opening buds, 2 n 21 , 19 — 33 . made a flower thicket fourteen times. 20. Having gathered various flowers, he constructed seven times a flower- pillar with a terrace and an enclosure. 21. He saw ... of various shapes, ornamented ...; the prince made them similar in shape. 22. He ordered chunnam work to be executed at the most excellent Mahathupa. Having cele- brated the coronation (of the Bo tree?), he held a festi- val connected with the execution of chunnam work (at the buildings around the Bo tree?). 23. Sakyaputta, the great hero, penetrated the whole Truth near the Assattha tree (and became?) the supreme (Buddha?). 24. Of this Bo tree which stood in the delightful Meghavana garden, illuminating the island, the prince held a coronation and a bathing festival. 25. The Bhikkhu fraternities who bring happiness (to the people), after having spent the rainy season (in the prescribed manner), celebrated the Pavarana ceremony; (the king) bestowed on them a Pavarana do- nation in order to show his liking for the Pavarana cere- mony. 26. He bestowed a donation of sandal wood on the Bhikkhu fraternity, the most excellent assembly. To the most excellent Mahathupa he made the donation of a great kettle-drum. 27. . . . dancers and acrobats in auspi- cious attitudes (?), all ... He constructed . . . and made a donation of it to the Mahathupa. 28. At the full moon day of the month Vesakha the Sambuddha was born; he celebrated a festival twenty -eight times in honour of this month. 29. Between the two monasteries of the de- lightful Mahameghavana and of the most excellent Thupa- rama he constructed an Uposatha hall. 30. He did many other meritorious acts and distributed rich donations. This prince reigned twenty-eight years. 31. Prince Naga, the son of Kutikanna, made bricks and other things (?) of costly substances in the most ex- cellent (Ambatthala Thupa?), — 32. and erected seats for the Dhamma preachers everywhere in the beautiful Am- batthala Thupa. He made a great offering called Giri- bhandagahana. 33. As many wise Bhikkhus were in Lan- kadipa, he gave a robe to each one of the Bhikkhu con- 21 , 33 — 48 . 215 gregation, of the most excellent assembly. This prince reigned twelve years. 34. Amandagamani, the son of Mahadathika, known by the surname Abhaya, caused a well and also the Ga- menditalaka to be dug. 35. He constructed the Rajata- lena (Vihara). Over the Thupa, in the most excellent Thuparama, he constructed a double canopy made of silver. 36. In the two most excellent palaces of the Mahavihara and of the Thuparama, he completely constructed treasu- ries and treasure- caves. 37. He also interdicted the de- struction of animal life in the territory of Tambapanni. This prince reigned nine years and eight months. 38. His younger brother, known as king Kanirajanu, reigned full three years. 39. The royal son of Amanda- gamani, known as Culabhaya, constructed the most excel- lent Gaggararama. 40. King Cfilabhaya reigned one year. A woman called Sivali, known by the surname Revati, — 41—43. the daughter of king Amanda, reigned four months. The son of Amanda’s sister, Ilanaga by name, removed this Sivali and reigned in the town. King Ilanaga, the destroyer of his enemies, having heard the Kapi-Jataka, ordered the Tissa and Dura ponds to be dug. This king reigned six years in the island of Lanka. 44. The king called Siva, known by the surname Candamukha, con- structed the Manikarama (Manikaragama tank?) near the monastery called Issara. 45. The queen -consort of that king, known by the name of Damiladevi, bestowed her own revenues from that very village on that Arama. This king reigned eight years and seven months. 46. King Tissa, known by the surname of Yasalala, governed eight years and seven months *). 47. King Subha, the son of a doorkeeper, constructed the Subharama and the delightful Villavihara. 48. Likewise he constructed her- mit’s cells which were called after his own name. This king governed six years over his kingdom. 1) According to the Mahavamsa: seven years and eight months. 216 22 , 1 — 14 . XXII. 1. King Vasabha constructed in the Cetiyapabbata monastery ten Thupas, a most glorious deed by which high reward is to be gained. 2. In the Issariya Arama he constructed a delightful Vihara (and) a pleasing and de- lightful Uposatha hall. 3. He also ordered a large kettle- drum to be made for the most excellent Mucela monastery. Every three years he gave six robes (to each monk). 4. Throughout the whole of Lankadipa he repaired dilapi- dated Aramas. Everywhere he constructed residences and made most precious offerings to the pious (Bhikkhus). 5. In the most excellent Thuparama he constructed a relic- chamber; full forty -four times the king held (Vesakha) festivals. 6. In the Mahavihara, in the Thuparama, and in the Cetiyapabbata monastery, at each of these places he ordered a thousand oil-lamps to be lit. 7. 8. The eleven tanks (formed by this king were) the Mayanti, the Raju- ppala tank, the Vaha, Kolamba, Mahanikkhavatti tank and also the Maharametti, the Kehala and Kali tanks, the Jam- buti, Cathamangana, and Abhivaddhamanaka tanks. 9. 10. He also constructed twelve irrigation canals in order to augment the fertility (of the land). Various me- ritorious acts he did; he made a wall and a ditch around the town with towers at the gates, and a great palace. He ordered lotus -ponds to be dug at different places in the town, the capital. 11. The most eminent king con- ducted water by means of an underground aqueduct (to those ponds). This ruler governed forty-four years. 12. The son of Vasabha, known as Tissa, the royal lord, ordered the Arama called Mangala to be constructed. He reigned straightway (after his father's death) three years over the Island. 13. Tissa’s sou, Gajabahukagamani, caused a great Thupa to be built in the delightful Abhayarama. 14. This royal chief constructed the pond called Gamani, according to the wishes of his mother; this lord (also) ordered the Arama called Rammaka to be built. He ruled twenty-two years over the Island. 22 , 15 — 33 . 217 15 — 17. The ruler of Tambapanni called king Ma- hallanaga caused the Sajilakandakarama, the Gotapabbata in the south, the Dakapasana Arama, the Salipabbata Vihara, the Tanaveli (Vihara), and in Rohana the Nagapabbata (Vi- hara) and the Girisalika Arama to be constructed. Having reigned six years he reached the end of his life and died. 18. 19. The son of Mahallanaga, known by the name of Bhatutissa, caused for the sake of (re-)establisking the Mahameghavana garden, a wall fence with towers at the gates to be constructed (around it); this king also founded the Vara- Arama (Gavara- Ar.?). 20. Having caused the pond called Gamani to be dug, Bhatutissa, the lord (of the Island), gave it to the Bhikkhu fraternity. 21. He (also^ ordered the pond called Randhakandaka to be dug. In the delightful Thuparama he constructed an Uposatha hall. 22. This king bestowed a great donation on the Bhikkhu fraternity. He reigned twenty-four years over the Island. 23. His younger brother, well known by the name of Tissa, erected an Uposatha hall in the delightful Abhaya- rama. 24. He constructed twelve edifices within (the limits of) the most excellent Mahavihara. In the Dakkhinarama he built a Vihara and a Thupa. 25. Many other merito- rious acts he did in honour of the blessed religion of the Buddha. He reigned eighteen years. 26. The sons of Tissa’s own body, two brothers worthy of royal dignity, reigned as rulers three years over the Island. 27. Vankanasikatissa reigned three years in Anuradha- pura, a king of proper and meritorious conduct. 28. After the death of Vankanasikatissa his son Gajabahukagamani reigned twenty-two years. 29. After Gajabahu’s death the father-in-law of that king, Mahallakanaga, reigned six years. 30. After the death of Mahallanaga his son Bha- tikatissa reigned twenty-four years over Lanka. 31. After Bhatikatissa’s death his younger brother Kanitthatissa reigned eighteen years over Lankadipa. 32. After the death of Kanitthatissa his son, known by the name of Khujja- naga, reigned two years. 33. Kunjanaga, the younger 218 22 , 33 — 47 . brother of Khujjanaga, put his royal brother to death and reigned one year over Lanka. 34. Having gained the victory (over Khujjanaga), Siri- naga reigned nineteen years in the most excellent Anu- radhapura over Lanka. 35. The king called Sirinaga by name made an offering of a garland of costly substances to the Mahathupa and erected a parasol over the Thupa. 36. He constructed an Uposatha hall, the most excellent Lohapasada. This prince reigned nineteen years. 37. The son of Sirinaga, the royal lord called Abhaya, gave two hundred thousand silver pieces to the Bhikklui fraternity. 38. At the most excellent great Bo tree he constructed a stone ledge. This king governed twenty-two years. 39. His younger brother, known as king Tissaka, erected a most excellent parasol over the Abhayarama and over the Mahathupa. 40. In the delightful Mahamegha- vana and in the beautiful Abhayarama, at both most excel- lent Viharas, he constructed a golden Thupa. 41. Having heard the Gilana discourse (of Buddha) which was preached by Thera Deva, he gave medicaments for the sick and (constructed) five most excellent residences (for the Sam- gha?). 42. Having seen a portent in the night, (he con- structed) the Dassamalini Arama; near the delightful Bo tree he erected figures formed by lamps. 43. In the reign of that king they proclaimed many wrong doctrines; proclaiming captious doctrines they ruined the religion of the Jina. 44. The king, when he perceived that wicked Bhikkhus ruined the religion of the Jina, to- gether with the minister Kapila subdued those wicked ones. 45. Having destroyed these captious doctrines and caused the (true) religion to shine, he gave (to the Frater- nity) the Hatthapannika (Sattapannika?) palace and (caused) boiled rice (to be provided) in the Meghavana. This royal ruler governed twenty-two years. 46. Tissa’s own son, known by the name of Sirinaga, reigned full two years over the Island. 47. This Sirinaga constructed an enclosure around the great Bo tree and also a beautiful pavilion. 22 , 48—59. 219 48. (The king) called Asarigatissa (Samghatissa) fixed golden parasols over the most excellent Mahathupa, on the top of the Thupa. 49. (He also constructed) of jewels a Thupa of the shape of a flame at the most excellent Mahathupa, and in connection (?) with that work he also brought offerings. 50. (Having heard) the Andhakavinda Suttanta 1 ), which was preached by Thera Deva, this vic- torious king ordered rice-milk continually to be distributed at the four gates (of the town). 51. Vijayakumara 2 ), the son of Sirinaga, reigned after his father’s death one year. 52. Samghatissa reigned four years ; he fixed a para- sol and goldsmith’s work on the Mahathupa. 53. King Samghabodhi by name was a virtuous prince; this king reigned two years. 54. This victorious king or- dered rice-milk continually to be distributed in the delight- ful Meghavana garden, and in the most excellent Maha- vihara he constructed a room where food was distributed by tickets. 55. The king called Abhaya, known by the surname Meghavapna, constructed a stone pavilion in the most ex- cellent Mahavihara. 56. 57. To the west of' the Maha- vihara he built a cloister for monks given to meditation. He (also) constructed an incomparable stone altar around the Bo tree and ordered a trench to be made, lined with stones, and a very costly triumphal arch. In the most excellent Bo tree sanctuary he erected a throne of stone. 58. Within the Dakkhinarama he constructed an Uposatha hall. He distributed a great donation to the fraternity of Bhikkhus, the most excellent community. 59. The king, having constructed a royal palace, a great, delightful build- ing, gave it to the Bhikkhu fraternity and then received 1) This discourse of Buddha which contains praises of those who pro- vide rice-milk for the Fraternity, is contained in the Mahavagga of the Vinaya-Pitaka, VI, 24. 2) The stanza treating of Vijaya is interposed between two sections which refer to king Samghatissa’s reign. The confusion seems brought on by an injudicious employment of different sources; I do not believe that we ought to alter the succession of these verses. 220 22, 69—73. it back. 60. In the Meghavana garden the king also cele- brated a Vesakha festival. He reigned thirteen years. 61. The son of Meghavanna was king Jetthatissa; this royal lord reigned over the island of Tambapanni. 62 — 65. In the most excellent Mahathupa he offered a very costly jewel. Having built a palace covered with iron and offered to it that most excellent jewel, the chief of men gave (to that palace) the name „Manipasada" („pa- lace of the gem“). Having constructed the Pacinatissa- pabbata Arama, the ruler of men called Tissa gave it to fraternity of Bhikkhus. The ruler of the earth, the chief of men, having ordered the Alambagama pond to be dug, held festivals (there) during eight years. This king reigned ten years over Tambapanni. 66. After Jetthatissa’s death his younger brother, king Mahasena, reigned twenty-seven years. 67. This king once thought thus: „There are two kinds of Bhikkhus in the Religion (of Buddha); which of them hold the right doc- trine and which hold the wrong doctrine, which are mo- dest and which are shameless?" 68. When thinking about this matter and searching after modest persons, he saw wicked Bhikkhus who were no (true) Samanas and (only) looked like (Samanas). 69. He saw people who were like stinking corpses, and in behaviour like blue flies, wicked persons, who were no (true) Samanas and (only) looked like (Samanas), — 70. Dummitta and Papasona and other shameless men. He went to those wicked Bhikkhus and asked them about the sense (of the Religion) and the doc- trine. 71. Dummitta and Papasona and other shameless men secretly consulted in order to mislead the pious (king). 72. These wicked, infatuated men taught that (computing) the twenty years (required for) the Upasampada ordina- tion from the conception, which has been admitted (by Buddha) in (the story about) Kumarakassapa J ), is not allowable. 73. The practice of (wearing) ivory (fans) 1 2 ) 1) Mahavagga, I, 75. 2) I have translated this passage according to the indications given in the Mahavamsa Tika (see the quotation in the footnote, p. 113), although 22, 73—76. 221 which has not been admitted in the story about the Cha- bbaggiyas, these shameless, idle (?) teachers taught to be allowable. 74. Regarding these and other matters many other shameless Bhikkhus, without a reason, for the sake of their own advantage, taught that (the true doctrine) was a false doctrine. 75. Having performed through his life, in consequence of his intercourse with those wicked persons, evil as well as good deeds, this king Mahasena passed away (to an- other existence) according to his actions. 76. Therefore one should fly far from intercourse with wicked men, as from a serpent or a snake, and self- con- trolled one should perform acts of benevolence as long as his existence lasts. I do not known any story in the Vina 3 ’a mentioning the Chabbaggiya Bhi- kkhus, which relates to the use of ivory fans. There is in the Khuddaka- vatthukhandha (Cullavagga, Y, 23, 1) a precept which implicitly excludes the use of fans made of ivory („anujanami bhikkhave tisso vijaniyo vaka- mayam usiramayam morapinchamavam“). I think that this is the passage alluded to, though the Chabbaggiyas are not expressly mentioned in it; in the short stories which precede and follow this one, most frequently mention is made of the transgressions of the Chabbaggiyas, so that the expression „Chabbaggivanam vatthu“ may have been extended to this passage also, by an inaccuracy which scarcely will be deemed strange. 222 Index of proper names. INDEX OF PROPER NAMES. (An asterisk indicates that the passage is corrupt or the reading doubtful.) Aggimitta 15, 78; 18,11. Accima 3, 8. 14. Accutagami 9, 32. 35. Anga 1, 39. *Angisa 3, 6. Acala 19, 8. Ajatasattu 3, 60; 4, 27; 5, 77; 11, 8. *Ajitajana 3, 17. Afijali 18, 24. Atthadassi 3, 41. Anattana 19, 6. Anuradha 10, 6. Anuradhanakkhatta *9, 32. 35. Anuradhapura 9,35; 11, 2; 15, 69; 16, 30; 17, 6 etc. Anuruddba 4, 4. 8. 50; 5, 8. 24. Anula 11, 7; 12, 82 et seq. ; 15, 74 et seq. ; 16, 39; 17, 76. — 20, 26. 30. Anotatta 1, 39; 6, 3; 12, 3; 17, 85. Aparantaka 8, 7. Aparaselika 5, 54. Abhaya (ancient king at Kakusandha’s time) 15, 38 ; 17, 7. 69 et seq. — (son of Panduvasa) 10, 3. 7; 11, 2. 10. — (son of Mutasiva) 11, 6; 17, 75. — (Dutthagamani) 18,18. 23. 32. 53; 19, 23. — (Vattagamani) 19, 16. 18; 20, 19. — (son of Kutikanna) 1 8, 37; 21, 1. Abhaya (Amandagamani) 21,’ 34. — (son of Sirinaga) 22, 37. — (Meghavauna) 22, 55. Abhavagiri 19, 14. 16. Abhayapura 15, 38; 17, 6 et seq. 35. *Abhitatta 3, 17. Amitodana 3, 46; 10, 6. Ayujjha 3, 15. Arittha 11, 29. 31; 14, 68 et seq.; 15, 82; 16, 40. Aritthapura 3, 22. Arindama 3, 15. Asela (son of Panduvasa) 10, 3. — (son of Mutasiva) 11, 7; 17, 76; 18, 48. 49. Asoka (ancient king) 3, 37. — (comp. Kalasoka) 5, 25. — (Dhammasoka, comp. Piyadassi) 1, 26. 27; 5, 59. 82. 10 1 et seq. ; 6, 12 et seq.; 7, 3 et seq.; 1 1, 13.24 et seq. ; 12, 4 et seq.; 15, 6 et seq. ; 17, 81 et seq. Assaji 1, 32. Ananda 4, 3. 7. 8. 50; 5, 7. 11. 12. 24. Amandagamani 21, 34. 39. 41. *Alavatta 19, 15. Itthiya 12, 12. 38. Indagutta 19, 5. 6. — 8. Indapatta 3, 23. Ilanaga 21, 42. Isidasika 18, 9. Isipatana 1, 33. Isibhumi 17, 109. Ujjeni (in India) 6, 15. — (in Ceylon) 9, 36. Uttara 8, 12. — 19, 6 19, 18. 20. Uttara 15, 78; 18, 11.— 18, 16. — 18, 18. Utti (son of Panduvasa) 10, 3. Utti, Uttiya (son of Mu- tasiva 11, 6; 17, 75. Ut93. 97. tiva (a Thera) 12, 12. 38. — (a warrior) 19, 18. 19. Udaya (Udayabhadda) 4, 38; 5, 97; 11, 8. Unnala 18, 24. Upacara 3, 5. Upatissa 9, 32. 36. Upatissanagara 9, 36; 10, 5. Upavattana 6,19; 15,70. Upali 4, 3. 7. 8. 28 et seq.; 5, 7. 11. 12. 76 et seq. Upali 18, 29. Uposatha 3, 4. Uppalavanna 18, 9. Ummadacitta 10, 4. Uruvela (in India) 1, 35. 38. 81. — (in Ceylon) 9, 35. Ekacakkhu 3, 19. 24. Ekabyohara 5, 40. Elara 18, 49. Okkaka 3, 41. Okkamukha 3, 41. Ojadipa 1, 73; 9, 20; 15, Index of proper names. 223 35 et seq. ; 17, 5. 1 6. 26 et seq. Kakusandha 2, 66; 15, 25. 34. 38; 17, 9. 16. 26 et seq., 73. Kaccana 4, 5; 5, 9. Kaccana 10, 1. Kanirajanu 21, 38. Kaudula 18, 53. Kannagoecha 3, 26. Kadambaka 15, 39; 17, 12 . Kanakadatta *17, 17 et seq. Kanitthatissa 22, 23. 26. 31 et seq. Kapila, Kapilavattliu 3, 17. 43. 51. Kapila (a minister) 22,44. Kappasika 1, 34. Kambalavasabha 3, 19. Kalarajanaka 3, 37. Kalyaua 3, 4. Kalyani 2, 42. 53. Kassapa (the Buddha) 2, 68 ; 15, 25. 54 et seq. ; 17, 10. 18. 73. — (a Thera) 4, 3. 8. 22; 5, 1 et seq. — (a Jatila) 1, 35. Kassapagotta 8, 10. Kassapika 5, 48. Kakandakaputta 5, 23. Kakavamia 18, 20. 53; 19, 21; 20, 1. Kalasoka (comp. Asoka) 4, 44; 5, 80. *99. *Kalissara 3, 32. Kali 18, 16. — 18, 21. Kasi 4, 39. Kira 11, 7; *17, 76. Kuiijanaga 22, 33. Kunjara 14, 28. Kutikanna 18, 37; 20, 31; 21, 1. 31. Kumarakassapa 4, 4; 5, 8; 22, 72. Kurudipa 1, 38. Kusa 3, 40. Kusavati 3, 9. Kusinara 3, 32; 5, 1; 15, 70. Kutagarasala 5, 29. Kotthamalaka 14, 29. 33. Kottbita (Kotthika) 4, 5; i] 9. Kondanua 1, 32. Konagamana 2, 67; 15, 25. 44. 48; 17, 9. 17. 73. Kontiputta 7, 32. Kosambi 3, 25. Kosala 2, 1. Khallatanaga 20, 12 et seq. Khujjanaga 22, 32. 33. Khujjasobhita 4, 49; 5, 22 . Khema 18, 9. — 18, 30. Ganga 7, 12; 11, 32; 12 , 2 . Gajabahukagamani 22, 13. 28. 29. Gandhara 8, 4. Gamika 18, 39. Gamani 10, 6. — 10, 8. Giri (Giridipa) 1, 67 et seq. — (a Nigantha) 19, 14. Girikali 18, 21. Giriddhi 18, 14. Giribbaja 4, 39. 40; 5, 5. Guttaka 18, 47. 48. Goknlika 5, 40. 41. Gotama 1 , 36. 41. 76; 2, 69; 3, 58; 15, 69; 17, 10. 20. Gotami 18, 8. Candagutta (a king) 5, 69. 73. 81.100; 6, 15; 11 , 12 . — (a Thera) 19, 8. — (a palace?) 16, 36. Candamukha 3, 42. — 21, 44. Candavajji 4, 46; 5, 58 et seq. 86 et seq. Candima 3, 42. Campa 3, 28. Cara 3, 5. Cittagutta 19, 6. Cittadassi 3, 41. Citta 10, 4. 8. Culanaga 18, 38. Culasumana 18, 39. Culabhaya 21, 39. 40. Culodara 2, 7 et seq. 29. Cetiya 3, 5. Cetiyapabbata 1 5, 69 ; 17, 90 etc. Cetiya 5, 42. Coranaga 20, 24. *Chaddanta 6, 7. Channagarika 5, 46. Channa 18, 29. Chabbaggiya 22, 73. Chatapabbata 11, 15. 19. Jambudipa 1, 26. 49; 6, 2 etc. Jayanta 15, 60; 17, 7. Jayasena 3, 44. — 19, 8. Jali 3, 42. Jetthatissa 22, 61. 66. Jetavana 2, 2. 16. 51. 53. • Takkasila 3, 31. Tappa 15, 78. Tambapanni (name of Ceylon) passim. — (town in Ceylon) 9, 30 et seq. *Tamalitti 3 ^a 3, 33. *Talissara 3, 32. Tissa (see Moggaliputta, Devanampiya). — (Kontiputta) 7, 32. — (a Sakiya) 10, 6. — (son of Panduvasa) 10, 3. — - (son of Mutasiva) 11, 6. 7; 17, 75. 76. — (a warrior) 19,18.20. — (different princes) 20, 1. — 20, 25. — 20, 28. — 20, 31. — 21, 46. — 22, 12. 13. — 22, 23. 26. — 22, 39. 46. — 22, 61. 64. Tissa 18, 30. Tumbamalaka 14, 74. Thulathana 20, 8. Datta 18, 27. Damila 18, 47; 19, 16; 20, 15 etc. Damiladevi 21, 45. Dasaratha 3, 40. Dathika 19, 15. 16; 20, 17. 18. Dasaka 4, 28 et seq.; 5, 77 et seq. Dasi (Dasiya, Dasika) 18, 11. — 14.— 21.— 28. Disampati 3, 40. Dighavapi 2, 60. Dighavu 10, 6. 8. Dipamkara 3, 31. Dipanaya 18, 40. Duppasaha 3, 16. 224 Index of proper names. Dummitta 22, 70. 71. *Durabhisara 8, 10. Deva (royal surname) 3, 20. 36. — (a warrior) 19, 18.20. — (a Thera) 22, 41. 50. Devakuta 15, 38; 17, 14. 32 et seq. Devagutta 16, 37. Devamanusa 18, 27. Devanampiya 11, 14 et seq.; 12, 7 - 17, 92; *18, 26. Devi 6, 16. Dovarikamandala 10, 9. Dhanna 18, 38. Dliamma 19, 5. Dhammagutta 3, 22. Dhammagutta 5, 47. — 18, 28. Dhammatapasa 18, 15. Dhammadasiya 15, 78; 18, 12. Dhammadinna 18, 9. Dhammarakkhita 19, 6. Dhammasena 3, 40. — 19, 5. Dliamma 18, 14. Dhammasoka, see Asoka. Dhammuttarika 5, 46. Dhota 3, 45. Nagaracatukka 14, 58. Naggadipa 9, 13. Nandanavana 13, 12 et seq. ; 14,11. 17. 44. 46. Nanda 18, 10. Nandisena 19, 9. Naradeva 3, 27. Naramitta 18, 15. Navaratha 3, 40. Naga (son of Mutasiva) 11, 6; 17, 75. — (son of Kutikanna) 21, 31. Nagadasa 4, 41 ; 5, 78; 11 , 10 . Nagadeva 3, 29. Nagapali 18, 34. Nagamitta 18, 28. — 34. — 35. Nagasena 3, 40. Naga 18, 28. — 35. Nigrodha 6, 34 et seq.; 7, 12. 31. *Nipuna (Nipura?) 3, 41. Niliya 20, 29. Nemiya 3, 36. 37. Neru 3, 8. Pakunda, see Panduka. *Pakula 3, 14. Pannattl 5, 41. Patacara 18, 9. Panduka (Pakunda) *4, 45; 5, 69. *78. 81; 10,9; 1 1, 1 et seq. 12. Panduvasa (Pauduraja) 4, 4 i ; *5, 78;’ 10, 2. 7. 8 ; 1 1 , 8 et seq. Pandusakka 10, 1. Patapa 3, 7. Paduma 19, 8. Paduma 18, 24. Panayamara 19, 15; 20, 16 '. Panada 3, 7. Pabbata 19, 18. 20. *Pabbatachinna 15, 78. 18, 12. Parantapabbata 11, 29. *31. Palayamara 19, 15; 20, 16. *Pasadapala 15, 78; 18, 11 . Pataliputta 5, 25. 59; 6, 18; 7, 45; 11, 28; 15, 6. 87. Papasoua 22, 70. 71. Piyadassana 6, 1. 2; 15, 88 et seq.; 16, 5. Piyadassi (Asoka) 6, 14. 24. — (a Thera) 19, 5. Punna 4, 4; 5, 8. Puttatissa 11, 29. 31. Pupphapura, see Patali- putta. Pubbaselika 5, 54. *Purinda 3, 33. Purindada 3, 20. Pulahattha *19, 15; 20, 15. *Pheggu 18, 12. *Baladatta 3, 25. *Baladeva 3, 25. Bahussutaka 5, 41. Barauasi 1, 30. 38. 34; 3, 16. 38. Bahiya *19, 15; 20, 15. Bilaratha 3, 41. Bindusara 5, 101; 6, 15. Bimbisara 3, 56. 58. Buddha 1 9, 5. Buddhadatta 3, 30. Brahmadatta 3, 18. *24. *Brahmadeva 3, 24. *Bhagirasa 3, 6. Bhauduka 12, 26. 39. 62. 63." Bhaddadeva 3, 26. Bhaddayanika 5, 46. Bhaddavaggiya 1, 34. Bhaddasala 12, 12. 38. Bhaddiya 1, 32. Bharata 3, 6. Bhativa 3, *52. 53. Bbatutissa (Bhatikatissa) 22, 18. 20. 30. 31. Bharukaccha 9, 26. Makhadeva 3, 33. Magadha 1, 39; 4, 40; 5, 5. Mangala 19, 8. Majjhanta 7, 25. Majjhantika 8, 2. 4. Majjhima 8, 10. Maniakkhika 2, 42. 52 et seq. Maudadipa 1, 73; 9, 20; 15, 57 et seq.; 17, 5. Matta 10, 4. Mattakala 10, 4. * Matta 18, 12. Mattabhava 11,6; 17,75. Madhura 3, 21. Mandhata 3, 5. Malaya 11, 19. 20. *Malitthiyaka 3, 33. Malla (a people) 15, 70. — (a Then) 15, 78; 18, 12 . Mahallanaga 22, 15. 18. 29. 30. Mahakali 18, 39. Mahakusa 3, 40. Mahaculi (comp. Maha- tissa) 20, 22. 25. 31. Mahatissa 19, 21; 20, 22. Mahatissa 18, 39. Mahadathika 21, 34. Mahadeva 7, 25; 8, 5. — 19, 6. — 15, 38. 43; 17, 25. Mabadevi 18, 24. Mahadhammarakkhita 8 , 8 . Mahanama 1, 32. Mahapajapati 18, 8. Index of proper names. 225 Mahapatapa 3, 7. Mahapaduma 14, 28. Mahapanada 3, 7. Mahamucala 3, 6. Mahameghavana, see Me- ghavana. Maharakkhita 8, 9. Maharattha 8, 8. Maharattaka 20, 13. Maharuci 3, 7. *Maharuha 18, 31. Mahali 10, 6. Mahasamgiti 5, 31. 32. 39. 42. Mahasammata 3, 3. Mahasudassana 3, 8. Mahasumana 18, 39. Mahasena 22, 66. 75. Mahasona 18, 27. Mahimsasaka 5, 45. 47. Mahiya 1, 51. Mahinda (son of Asoka) I, 27; 5, 82 et seq. ; 6, 1 7 et seq. ; 7,18 et seq. 42; 8, 13; 11, 40; 12, 8-17, 109. — (a king) 3, 28. Mahila 18, 15. — 20. — 35. Mabilarattha 9, 14. Mahisa 8, 5. Mahodara 2, 7 et seq. 29. Maya 18, 7. Mala 18, 30. *Masagalla 15, 78; 18, II . Mitta 11, 7; 17, 76. Mittanna 19, 5. Mittasena 19, 8. Mithila 3, 9. 29. 35. Missakagiri 12, 28. 37 et seq. ; 14, 56. *75. *79. Mucala 3, 6. Mucalinda 3, 6. Mutasiva 5, 82; 11, 5 et seq. 12. 13; 12, 42; 17, 75. 77; 18, 48. Mula 19, 18. 19. Mulakadeva 8, 10. Meghavanna 22, 55. 61. Meghavana 2, 6 1 . 64 ; 13, 18 et seq. ; 1 7, 15. 23. 74 etc. Moggaliputta 5, 57 et seq. ; 7, 1 6. 23 et seq. 39 et seq.; 8, 1. Moriva 6, 19. Yasa 1, 33. — 4, 50; 5, 23. Yasalala 21, 46. Yonaka 8, 9. Yonakadhammarakkhita 8, 7. Rakkhita 8, 6. Rajagaha (compare Giri- bbaja) 3, 9. 30. 52; 13, 10. Rajagirika 5, 54. Rama 3, 41. — 10, 4. — 6 . Rahula 3, 47. Rucananda 17, 16 et seq. 5 1 et seq. Ruci 3, 7. Rupasobhini 18, 27. Renu 3, 40. Revata 4, 49; 5, 22. Revata 18, 29. Revati 21, 40. Roja 3, 4. *Rojana 3, 27. Rohana (a prince) 10, 6. — (a province) 18, 23. 40; 22, 16. Lakkhadhamma 18, 40. Lanka, passim. Lajjitissa *20, 9 et seq. Lalarattha 9, 5. Vankanasikatissa 22, 27. 28. Vanga 9, 2. Vangisa 4, 4; 5, 8. Vajira 8, 20. Vajjiputtaka 4, 4 7. 48; 5, 17. 30. 45. 46. Vatuka 20, 27. Vattagamani 20, 14. 18. 19. 24. Vaddkamanapura 15, 48. 17, 6 et seq. Vappa 1, 32. Varakalyana 3, 4. Varadipa 1, 73; 9, 20; 15, 45 et seq.; 1 7, 5. 17. Vararoja 3, 4. Vasabha 22, 1. 12. Vasabliagami 4, 51; 5, 22. 24. Vijaya 3, 39. — 4, 27; 5, 77 ; 9,6 et seq. ; 1 1 , 8. 9. — 22, 51. Vijita 9, 32. 35. Vijitasena 3, 39. Vinjhatavi 15,87; 16,2. Vibhajjavadi 18, 41. 4 4. Vibhata 10, 4. Visakha 18, 10. Visala 15, 60; 17, 6 et seq. Veluvana 4, 39. Vedissa 6, 15; 12, 14.35. Vesaii 4, 47. 48. 52; 5, 17. 23. 29. Yessantara 3, 42. *Sakula 3, 14. Sakkodana 3, 45. Sakyaputta 2, 69; 12, 5; 13, 50; 15,26; 17,74; [18, 3]; 21, 23. Samkantika 5, 48. Samgha 19, 5. Samghatissa 22, *48. 52. Samghadasi 18, 10. Samghabodhi 22, 53. Samghamitta 6, 17; 7, 18 et seq. ; 15, 77. 90 et seq.; 17, 20 et seq.; 18, 11. *25. Sanjaya 3, 42. Sanha 18, 38. Sattapannaguha 4, 14; 5, 5.' ’ Saddbammanandi 18, 14. Saddhatissa 19, 16; 20, 2 et seq. Sapatta 18, 29. Sabala 18, 10. Sabbakami 4, 49; 5, 22. *Sabbatthivada 5,47.48. Sabbananda 15, 60. 64; 17, 25. Samankura 3, 37. Samatha 3, 40. Samanta 18, 20. Samiddba 15, 48; 17, 7. Samiddhi 2, 17 et seq. Samuddanava 18, 34. Samudda 18, 28. — 41. Sambala 12, 12. 38. Sambhuta 4, 50; 5, 22. Sammiti 5, 46. Sahadeva 8, 10. Sakiya 10, 6. Sagara 3, 6. — 19, 8. Sagaradeva 3, 6. — 34. *Sagala 3, 14. Salha 4, 49; 5, 22. 15 226 Index of proper names. Sana 4, 50; 5, 22. f?ata 18, 16. Sadhina 3, 21. *Sabhiya 19, 15. *Sala 11, 29. 31. Saliya 19, 18. 19. Siggava 4, 46; 5, 57 et seq.; 80 et seq. * Sitthi 3, 23. Siddhattha 3,4 7. — 19,8. Siddhattha 5, 54. Sirinaga 22, 34 et seq. — 46 et seq. Silakuta 17, 14. Siva (comp. Siva) 10, 4. — 11, 7; 17, 76; 18, 45. Sivi 3, 42. Siva (comp. Siva) 20, 26. — 21, 44. Sivala 11,7; *17, 76. — 18, 27. — 30. — 34. Sivali 9, 3. — 19, 8. — 2 1, 40, 41. Siha 9, 1 et seq. Sihaputta 9, 5. 6. Sihapura 9, 4. 5. 43. Sihabahu 9, 3. 21. Sihalii 9, 1. Sihavaliana 3, 42. Sibassara 3, 42. Sihahanu 3, 44. 45. 51. Sukkodana 3, 46. Snjata 3, 41. *Sutangana 1, 51. Suttavada 5, 48. Sudatta 2, 1. Sudassana 3, 7. *Sudinna 3, 33. Suddhodana 3, 45 et seq. Sudhamma 17, 19 et seq. Suppatitthita 19, 9. Suppara 9, 15 et seq. Subha 21, 47. Subhakuta 15,60; 17, 14. *Subhangana 1, 51. Sumana 4, 51; 5, 22. 24. — 12, 13. 26. 39; 15, 5 et seq. 28. 93. — 15, 48. 53; 17, 25. — 19, 8. Sumanakuta 15, 48; 17, 14. Sumanadevi 19, 9. Sumana 18, 17. Suma 18, 24. Sumitta(conip.Dummitta) 9, 6. 43. — 7. 32. Summa 19, 21. Suriyagutta 19, 7. — 8. Suvannabhumi 8, 12. Susima 9, 3. Susunaga 5, 25. 98 et seq. Suratissa 18, 46 et seq. Sena 18, 47. 48. Sona, comp. Sona, Papa- sona. Sona 18, 10. — 38. Sona 8, 12. Sonaka 4, 39 et seq.; 5, 78 et seq. Sobhana 18, 15. Sobhita 18, 9. Somanadeva 18, 29. Soma 18, 14. Hatthipura 3, 18. Himava 6, 3; 8, 10. Hemavatika 5, 54. Heina 15, 78 ; 18, 11. *Hemasa 18, 24. TABLE OF THE CEYLONESE KINGS ACCORDING TO THE DlPAVAMSA. Vijaya (reigned 38 years) 9, 28 — 44. Interregnum (1 year) .... 11, 9. Pauduvasa (30 v.) 10, 1- -6. Abhaya (20 y.) 10, 7. Interregnum (17 v.) .... • 11, 1 — -2. Paudukabhaya (70 y.) 11, 1 - -4. Mutasiva (60 v.) 11, 5. 13. Devanampiya Tissa (40 y.) .... 11, 4 - — 17, 92. Uttiya (10 y.) • 17, 93- — 109. Siva (10 y.) 18, 45. Suratissa (10 y.) 18, 46. Sena and Gutta (12 v. J ) . 18, 47. Asela (10 y.) . 18, 48. Elara (44 y.) 18, 49- -52. Abbava Dutthagamani (24 y.) 18, 53 — 19, 10 Saddhatissa (18 y.) ....... 20, 1 — 7. Thulathana (1 month and 10 days) 20, 8. 1) 22 y*ars according to the Mahavamsa. Table of the Ceylonese Kings. 227 m.) Lnjjitissa (9 y. 6 m. 1 ) Khallatanaga (6 y.) . Maharattaka (one day) . Abhaya Vattagamani (5 months) Pulahattha (Alavatta) (3 y.) . Bahiya (Sabhiya) (2 y.) Panayamtira (7 y.) .... Palayamara (7 months) Dathika (2 y.) Abhaya Vattagamani (12 y.) . Mahaeuli Mahatissa (14 y.) Coranaga (12 y.) Tissa (3 y.) Siva (1 y. 2 m.) Vatuka (l y. 2 m.) Tissa (1 y. 1 m.) .... Niliya (3 m. 2 ) Anula (4 m.) Kutikannatissa (22 y.) . . . . Abhaya (28 y.) Mahadathika Naga (12 y.) Abhaya Amandagamani (9 v. 8 Kanirajanu (3 v.) .... Culabhaya (1 y.) .... Sivali Revati (4 months) . Ilanaga (6 y.) Siva Candamukha (8 y. 7 m.) Tissa Yasalala (8 y. 7 m. 3 ) . Subha (6 y.) Vasabha (44 y.) Vankanasikatissa (3 y.) Gajabahukagamani (22 y.) Mahallanaga (6 y.) .... Bhatutissa (24 y.) Kanittha-Tissa (18 y.) . Khujjanaga (2 y.) .... Kunjanaga (1 y.) .... Sirinaga (19 y.) Abhaya 4 ) (22 y.) ... . Tissa' 4 ) (22 y.) Sirinaga (2 v.) Vijaya (1 y.) Samgliatissa (Asamgatissa) (4 y.) Samghabodhi (2 y.) .... Abhaya Meghavanna (13 y.) . Jetthatissa (10 y.) .... Mahasena (27 y.) .... 2) fi months according to the Mahfivarnsa. 3) According to the Mahavamsa : 7 years and 8 months. 4) In the Mnhavamsn, Tissa and Abhaya are transposed, and to Abhaya on'y eight years are given. 19, 11—13; 20, 1 20, 12 . 20, 13. 20, 14. 19, 15; 20. 15 — 19, 14. 16- -20; i 19, 21—22; 20, 20, 24. 20, 25. 20, 26. 20, 27. 20, 28. 20, 29. 20, 30. 20, 31—35. 21, 1—30. 21 , 31 — 33. 21, 34 — 37. 21, 38. 21, 39 — 40. 21, 40—41. 21, 41—43. 21, 44—45. 21 , 46. 21, 47—48. 22, 1 — 11. 22, 12. 27. 22, 13 — 14. 28. 22, 15—17. 29. 22, 18 — 22. 30. 22, 23 — 25. 31. 22, 26. 32. 33. 22, 34—36. 22, 37—38. 22, 39 — 45. 22, 46 — 47. 22, 51. 22, 48 — 50. 52. 22, 53. 54. 22, 55 — 60. 22, 61 — 65. 22, 66 — 76. months. Bidrlin, printed by A. W. ScHADE. DATE DUE HIGHSMITH # 45220